From 03c75c44272fafbdc68ad57c2895873f73a46a27 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Tue, 12 May 2015 22:34:18 +0000 Subject: latex2e-help-texinfo (12may15) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@37355 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog | 481 ++- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile | 100 +- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS | 20 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README | 7 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws | 61 + .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk | 1321 +++--- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html | 2127 ++++++---- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf | Bin 677196 -> 696267 bytes .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi | 953 +++-- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt | 4268 +++++++++++--------- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml | 3572 ++++++++-------- 11 files changed, 7373 insertions(+), 5537 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo') diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog index c373fc57bfe..8631bf40d6f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog @@ -1,14 +1,309 @@ -2014-05-19 Karl Berry +2015-05-12 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (@settitle): unofficial. + (About this document): reword a bit. + (UPDATED): now it's May. + More indexing. + + * Makefile (check-dw): new target. + * latex2e.texi: remove doubled words. + + * Makefile (txt_files): add aspell.en.pws. + (check-en): try spell-en first. + +2015-05-08 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Non-English characters): tersely define \dj \DJ + and \ng \NG (without typesetting). + * Makefile (spell): exclude \command names. + * aspell.en.pws: new file. + +2015-05-08 Jim Hefferon + and Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (LaTeX command syntax): (Re-)include description of + command syntax, inspired by alt-latex-info. + +2015-05-08 Karl Berry + + * Makefile (en, es, fr, spell, svr, svd): new targets. + (all): rework target. + (all_suffixes, txt_files): new vars. + +2015-05-07 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: some typos. + * latex2e-es.texi: can't use \sup with current texinfo.tex. + * Makefile: simplify to be maintainable at the cost of some + redundancy (sorry, Vincent). + +2015-05-06 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): + use @U to show the footnote symbols. + +2015-05-05 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: More indexing. Always ", etc.". Use of @dmn. + (Modes): re-paragraph the descriptions. + (\@@): Rename from \AT, now that Texinfo can handle @ in node names. + +2015-04-26 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Starting and ending): rename from + Starting & ending. Leave anchor behind. + + * latex2e.texi (Starting & ending): make a section. + Notes for a new syntax section. + More on the example document. + From Jim, 22 Apr 2015 15:06:24 +0000. + (beamer template, book template): transpose to make alphabetical. + (Command line): xref TeX engines, --help, etc. + +2015-04-23 Jim Hefferon + and Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Output files, TeX engines): new nodes. + Jim's original msg, 20 Apr 2015 12:42:23. + (Independently, eliminate some "very"s throughout.) + +2015-04-20 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (About this document, Overview): more clearly + separate these nodes. From Jim, 14 Apr 2015 19:57:21. + + * latex2e.texi (Document classes): Add descriptions of built-in + LaTeX classes. From Jim, 12 Apr 2015 22:10:47. + +2015-04-10 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Font styles): mention \nocorr and \nocorrlist. + (\/): mention automatic insertion from \textit and \itshape, etc. + From Jim, 10 Apr 2015 00:13:39. + +2015-04-08 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip): add defaults, + other tweaks. From Jim Hefferson, 7 Apr 2015 23:45:50. + +2015-04-07 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: start update for 2015. + Index pict2e (was curve2e) and other packages. + (\put): format synopsis like others, etc. + (\newcounter): metavar name supercounter. + +2015-02-22 Karl Berry + + * Makefile (texi2html): use -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL + (to be in next Texinfo release). + + * latex2e.texi (Math functions): avoid \sup, since @sup + is now a Texinfo command (for the next release). + + * latex2e.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): + \Roman for second @item. Typo reported by Jose Atria. + +2014-11-19 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French + + * Makefile: add targets check-fr, check-en & check-es. + + * latex2e.texi (node figure): typo occuped->occupied. + (node filecontents): Make it clear that it is about + files not documents. + +2014-10-20 Vincent Belaïche + + * Makefile: Add target `check' to compile each manual once with tex + and once with makeinfo. This is faster than using target `all'. + +2014-10-19 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi (\setcounter): replace @var{\counter} by @var{counter} + + * latex2e-es.texi (\setcounter): Same change as latex2e.texi + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\setcounter): Same change as latex2e.texi. + Progress Translation to French. + +2014-10-17 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-es.texi (\pagenumbering): use @backslashchar{} within + @vincentb in order to compile with tex. + +2014-10-17 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): fix explanation of + optarg; its default value is never "def", that was a misreading + of latex209.dtx. Rename to optargval. From Vincent. + + * latex2e.texi (\alph): avoid UTF-8 or @document*, sorry. + (\thinspace): this is not the place to use @dmn. + (figure) : these are counters not control + sequences, so no \. + + * latex2e-es.texi (\put): @vincentb, not @vincenb. + +2014-09-25 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi (\put): Make coordinates within @var{...} and add + explicit reference to them in the text. + (\usebox): typo add missing closing curly bracket + + * latex2e-es.texi (\put): Same as latex2e.texi (except that + \usebox node was ok). + + * latex2e-fr.texi (nodes \put, \usebox): Same as + latex2e.texi. Progress translation to French. + +2014-09-19 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi (document header): Set @documentencoding and + @documentlanguage. + (document footer): Add Emacs file local variable to specify + ispell dictionary. + + * latex2e.texi (\pagenumbering): Clarify that \pagenumber + also resets page number to 1. + (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): + add UTF-8 symbols next to symbol names for \fnsymbol. + (\newcounter): rename @var{cnt} -> + @var{countername}, and @var{countername} -> @var{super}, and make + it explicit in the text that @var{super} is the name of a counter. + (\newlength): @code{length} command -> @dfn{length} command. + (document footer): Add Emacs file local variable to specify + encoding. + + * latex2e-es.texi: Similar changes as latex2e.texi. + (\newlength): Also translate length to longitud, as this is + not a reserved word, we just mean an instruction to manage one + length. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Similar changes as latex2e.texi. Progress + translation to French. + +2014-09-10 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi (\thinspace): em -> @dmn{em}. + + * latex2e-es.texi (\thinspace): same as latex2e.texi. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French. + +2014-09-08 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French. + + * latex2e.texi (node Modes): replace `-' by `---', and `The box + make by' by `The box made by'. + (node Math miscellany): correct typo `for examp*l*e'. + +2014-08-30 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-es.texi (\vector): correct bug involved by renaming + y-slop/x-slop to declivex/declivey --- as I used @vincentb macro + encapsulation to mark my change, it made \ of \vector no longer a + "other" character. + +2014-08-29 Vincent Belaïche + + * Makefile: add definition of variable all, for clean to work. Add + squeaky as a synonym of realclean. Add in comment generic line for + other language being zipped to to dist. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Progression traduction + + * latex2e.texi (node Page layout parameters): correct typo clase -> classes + (node array): `in that row' -> `in each row of that column + + * latex2e-es.texi (node array): `el número de elementos y deben + tener el formato' -> `cual formato debe tener cada linea en esta + columna' + + +2014-08-24 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi (node Boxes): add @code{...} encapsulation. + (\dashbox): replace @code{...} by @var{...} for \dashbox + parameters in last sentence. (nodes \line & Glossaries) add + @acronym{...} around CTAN. + (\makebox of picture): use @example environment for the + synopsis, and @var{...} for the parameters. + (\vector): rename x-slope, and x both to xslope, respectively + for y-slope and y, and use consistently @var{...} encapsulation. + + * latex2e-es.texi (node Cajas): same as latex2e.texi. + (\dashbox): same as latex2e.texi. Rename parameter + @var{dlargo} to @var{glargo}, with 'g' for guión (aka + dash). + (nodes \line & Glossarios): same as latex2e.texi. + (\makebox of picture): same as latex2e.texi. + (\vector): same as latex2e.texi. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (node Boxes): same as latex2e.texi. + (\dashbox): same as latex2e.texi. + (nodes \line & Glossaries): same as latex2e.texi. + (\makebox of picture): same as latex2e.texi. + (\vector): same as latex2e.texi. + Progress further translation to French. + +2014-08-17 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi: (node Layout) Add @code{...} around \headheight + and \footskip in `Page layout parameters' menu entry + + * latex2e-es.texi: Same change as in latex2e.texi + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Same change as in latex2e.texi. Continue + progressing translation to French. + +2014-08-11 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi: Add @code{...} encapsulation in some places to + class names letter, slides, book, report, article, and to + environement theorem. + (Document class options) Add missing closing bracket. + + * latex2e-es.texi: Same changes as for latex2e.texi. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Same changes as for latex2e.texi. Progress + translation to French. + + +2014-08-10 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi: (Overview) change wording about case sensitivity. + + * latex2e-es.texi: (Descripción) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: (Overview) same change change as for + latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. (Whole document) Put in place + same structure as for original and progress translation. + +2014-08-01 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Creation --- still very approximate & preliminary... + + * Makefile: Make it generic + +2014-07-20 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e.texi (\LaTeXe), + * latex2e-es.texi (\LaTeXe): document LaTeX2e log. + +2014-05-19 Karl Berry * May 2014 release for TeX Live 2014. -2014-02-28 Karl Berry +2014-02-28 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (filecontents): tweak language. (Font styles): mention my disagreement with the oft-stated notion that \tt, et al., are "obsolete". -2014-02-27 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-27 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Clarify that LaTeX2e default filecontents environment DOES NOT overwrite existing files, you @@ -16,16 +311,16 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (filecontents): Align on the English version. -2014-02-26 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-26 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi: Align Spanish translation with changes made by Karl on 2014-02-23, and also some changes done before that. -2014-02-25 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-25 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: Correct typo, rm duplicate 2014 in copyright notice. -2014-02-23 Karl Berry +2014-02-23 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (@title): put the "unofficial" label here, not just the subtitle. @@ -33,24 +328,24 @@ and the latter is far more commonly used. Also fix truncated sentence about italic correction. -2014-02-02 Vincent Belaiche +2014-02-02 Vincent Belaiche * latex2e-es.texi (\includeonly, \input): correct @code for @section titles, plus \@fnsymbol not \fnsymbol. http://gna.org/bugs/?21582 -2014-01-31 Karl Berry +2014-01-31 Karl Berry * latex2e-es.texi (filecontents): new node from Vincent Belaiche. http://gna.org/bugs/?21569 * latex2e.texi: likewise, plus edits. -2013-05-13 Karl Berry +2013-05-13 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Font styles): mention \oldstylenums. (picture): \unitlength default is 1pt. -2013-04-25 Karl Berry +2013-04-25 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): mention * form; try to clarify optional arg defaults. @@ -61,27 +356,27 @@ * ltx-help.el (latex-help): handle try-completion returning a string for a partial match, vs. t for exact match. - -2013-04-25 Karl Berry + +2013-04-25 Karl Berry * ltx-help.el: untabify, doc fixes. -2012-05-10 Karl Berry +2012-05-10 Karl Berry * May 2012 release for TeX Live 2012. - + * latex2e.texi (About this document): mention a few other docs. (eqnarray): don't use it; reference Madsen article (figure): ! float specifier, \*number parameters. (Math accents): mention \mathring. -2012-04-25 Karl Berry +2012-04-25 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: Index \extracolsep, template list at http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates, other template updates, etc. -2011-05-12 Karl Berry +2011-05-12 Karl Berry * May 2011 release for TeX Live 2011. @@ -89,324 +384,324 @@ and remove spurious duplicate \textordfeminine entry. Report from Eric Jablow, 12 Apr 2011 05:17:47. -2011-05-05 Karl Berry +2011-05-05 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Document templates): Add link to http://www.howtotex.com/templates. -2011-05-03 Karl Berry +2011-05-03 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Overview): mention other engines, etc. (About this document): new node, for bug address, home page, etc. - + * latex2e.texi (Page layout parameters): discuss \linewidth vs. \columnwidth vs. \textwidth vs. \hsize in more detail. -2010-09-03 Karl Berry +2010-09-03 Karl Berry * latex2e-es.texi: translation to Spanish, from Nacho Pacheco, 27 Aug 2010 19:15:47. * Makefile: also build the Spanish. -2010-09-03 Karl Berry +2010-09-03 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: update TUGboat sample. - + * Makefile (%.html): use new perl makeinfo (texi2html), so no need for g_t kludge. -2010-07-12 Karl Berry +2010-07-12 Karl Berry * July 2010 release for TL 2010. * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): add many from ltoutenc. -2009-12-25 Karl Berry +2009-12-25 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Symbolic footnotes): new section. -2009-11-01 Karl Berry +2009-11-01 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Accents): add \underbar, although it isn't an accent. (Math miscellany): better distinguish \underline and \underbar. -2009-10-27 Karl Berry +2009-10-27 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Line breaking, Page breaking): move to earlier, matching top-level @menu. -2009-09-07 Karl Berry +2009-09-07 Karl Berry * September 2009 release for TL 2009. -2009-04-23 Karl Berry +2009-04-23 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Indexes): add considerably more info. -2008-06-12 Karl Berry +2008-06-12 Karl Berry * 2.0 release for ctan.org/get/doc/latex-info, and TeX Live 2008. -2007-11-05 Karl Berry +2007-11-05 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \put \raggedbottom -2007-11-04 Karl Berry +2007-11-04 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \ps \psi \Psi \pushtabs -2007-11-03 Karl Berry +2007-11-03 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \protect -2007-10-29 Karl Berry +2007-10-29 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (math): \Pr \prec \preceq \prime \prod \propto. -2007-10-28 Karl Berry +2007-10-28 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): \poptabs \pounds. -2007-10-25 Karl Berry +2007-10-25 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \perp \phi \pi \Pi \pm \pmod -2007-10-24 Karl Berry +2007-10-24 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \part \partial -2007-10-23 Karl Berry +2007-10-23 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \parskip -2007-10-22 Karl Berry +2007-10-22 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \parsep -2007-10-21 Karl Berry +2007-10-21 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \parindent -2007-10-20 Karl Berry +2007-10-20 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \parbox -2007-10-17 Karl Berry +2007-10-17 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \paragraph \parallel -2007-10-16 Karl Berry +2007-10-16 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \pagestyle -2007-10-15 Karl Berry +2007-10-15 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \pagenumberingstyle \pageref -2007-10-11 Karl Berry +2007-10-11 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \oplus \oslash \otimes -2007-10-10 Karl Berry +2007-10-10 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \onecolumn \opening -2007-10-08 Karl Berry +2007-10-08 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \dot \oe \OE \oint \omega \Omega \ominus -2007-10-07 Karl Berry +2007-10-07 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\oddsidemargin) -2007-10-06 Karl Berry +2007-10-06 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \obeycr, \restorecr; split page/line breaking into separate chapters. -2007-10-05 Karl Berry +2007-10-05 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \not \notin \nu \nwarrow \o \O -2007-10-04 Karl Berry +2007-10-04 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\normalmarginpar \normalsize) -2007-10-03 Karl Berry +2007-10-03 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \nopagebreak -2007-06-27 Karl Berry +2007-06-27 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \flat \flushbottom -2007-06-26 Karl Berry +2007-06-26 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \evensidemargin \exists \exp \fbox \fboxrule \fboxsep -2007-06-25 Karl Berry +2007-06-25 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \epsilon \equiv \eta -2007-06-24 Karl Berry +2007-06-24 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \em \emptyset \encl -2007-06-23 Karl Berry +2007-06-23 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \doublerulesep \downarrow \Downarrow \ell -2007-06-22 Karl Berry +2007-06-22 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \dot \doteq \dotfill -2007-06-21 Karl Berry +2007-06-21 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \displaystyle -2007-06-20 Karl Berry +2007-06-20 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \deg \delta \Delta \det \diamond \Diamong \diamondsuit \dim \div -2007-06-19 Karl Berry +2007-06-19 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \ddag \ddagger \ddot -2007-06-18 Karl Berry +2007-06-18 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \dblfloatpagefraction \dblfloatsep \dbltextfloatsep \dbltopfraction -2007-06-17 Karl Berry +2007-06-17 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \day \month \year; put xref chapter earlier. -2007-06-16 Karl Berry +2007-06-16 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \dashbox \dashv \date -2007-06-15 Karl Berry +2007-06-15 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \d \dag \dagger -2007-06-14 Karl Berry +2007-06-14 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \cos \cosh \cot \coth \cup -2007-06-13 Karl Berry +2007-06-13 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \cong \coprod \copyright -2007-06-12 Karl Berry +2007-06-12 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \columnsep \columnseprule \columnwidth -2007-06-11 Karl Berry +2007-06-11 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \cline \closing \clubsuit -2007-06-03 Karl Berry +2007-06-03 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \chi \circ \circle[*] -2007-06-01 Karl Berry +2007-06-01 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \centering \chapter \check -2007-05-31 Karl Berry +2007-05-31 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \caption \cc \cdot \cdots -2007-05-30 Karl Berry +2007-05-30 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \cal \cap -2007-05-24 Karl Berry +2007-05-24 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \bottomfraction, \bowtie, \Box, \breve, \bullet, \c. -2007-05-23 Karl Berry +2007-05-23 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \boldmath, \bot. -2007-05-22 Karl Berry +2007-05-22 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\bigskip, \bmod) -2007-05-21 Karl Berry +2007-05-21 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Math Symbols): \big operators -2007-05-19 Karl Berry +2007-05-19 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Using BibTeX): \bibliography, \bibliographystyle -2007-05-18 Karl Berry +2007-05-18 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\bf, \bibitem) -2007-05-17 Karl Berry +2007-05-17 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (verse environment, \beta) -2007-05-15 Karl Berry +2007-05-15 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (titlepage, verbatim): environments. (\verb). -2007-05-14 Karl Berry +2007-05-14 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (theorem): environment. -2007-05-12 Karl Berry +2007-05-12 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (tabbing): environment. -2007-04-12 Karl Berry +2007-04-12 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\AT): new node for \@. -2007-04-11 Karl Berry +2007-04-11 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (tabbing): \a' \a` \a= for accents. -2007-04-10 Karl Berry +2007-04-10 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (Accents): \~ for tilde accent. -2007-04-09 Karl Berry +2007-04-09 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \| -2007-04-06 Karl Berry +2007-04-06 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \\ in its various contexts -2007-04-02 Karl Berry +2007-04-02 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: macron accent * latex2e.texi (Accents): \= for macron. -2007-04-01 Karl Berry +2007-04-01 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: \: \; \< -2007-03-30 Karl Berry +2007-03-30 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: through \. -2007-03-28 Karl Berry +2007-03-28 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: remove unneeded @page, fix over/underfull boxes, etc. -2007-03-27 Karl Berry +2007-03-27 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi: remove node pointers * latex2e.texi: \*: discretionary multiplication. -2007-03-21 Karl Berry +2007-03-21 Karl Berry * latex2e.texi (\SPACE): new node. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile index 8e9050be5ad..8ccecf34c77 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile @@ -1,6 +1,21 @@ +# $Id: Makefile 333 2015-05-12 17:12:37Z karl $ # Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry. # Makefile for latexrefman. +en_tex_output = latex2e.dvi latex2e.pdf +es_tex_output = latex2e-es.dvi latex2e-es.pdf +fr_tex_output = latex2e-fr.dvi latex2e-fr.pdf +# +mi_suffixes = dbk html info txt xml +en_mi_output = $(addprefix latex2e., $(mi_suffixes)) +es_mi_output = $(addprefix latex2e-es., $(mi_suffixes)) +fr_mi_output = $(addprefix latex2e-fr., $(mi_suffixes)) +# +all_suffixes = dvi pdf $(mi_suffixes) + + +# how to build. +# texi2dvi = texi2dvi --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2dvi texi2pdf = texi2pdf --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2pdf # @@ -8,13 +23,14 @@ makeinfo = makeinfo texi2docbook = $(makeinfo) --docbook texi2html = $(makeinfo) --html --no-split texi2info = $(makeinfo) --no-split -texi2txt = $(makeinfo) --plaintext --no-split -o $@ +texi2txt = $(makeinfo) --plaintext --no-split texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml %.pdf: %.texi $(texi2pdf) $< %.dvi: %.texi $(texi2dvi) $< +# %.dbk: %.texi $(texi2docbook) -o $@ $< %.html: %.texi @@ -22,38 +38,76 @@ texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml %.info: %.texi $(texi2info) $< %.txt: %.texi - $(texi2txt) $< + $(texi2txt) -o $@ $< %.xml: %.texi $(texi2xml) $< -en_tex_output = latex2e.dvi latex2e.pdf -es_tex_output = latex2e-es.dvi latex2e-es.pdf -tex_output = $(en_tex_output) $(es_tex_output) + +# targets follow. +# +default: check-en + +# to test changes, build a subset: html and info (since these formats +# exercise significantly different code paths), and pdf for tex. +check_suffixes = html info pdf # -en_makeinfo_output = latex2e.info latex2e.html latex2e.txt \ - latex2e.xml latex2e.dbk -es_makeinfo_output = latex2e-es.info latex2e-es.html latex2e-es.txt \ - latex2e-es.xml latex2e-es.dbk -makeinfo_output = $(en_makeinfo_output) $(es_makeinfo_output) +check-en: spell-en $(addprefix latex2e., $(check_suffixes)) +check-es: $(addprefix latex2e-es., $(check_suffixes)) +check-fr: $(addprefix latex2e-fr., $(check_suffixes)) +check: check-en check-es check-fr + +# Build per language. +en: $(en_mi_output) $(en_tex_output) +es: $(es_mi_output) $(es_tex_output) +fr: $(fr_mi_output) $(fr_tex_output) + +# To build everything in all languages. +all: en es fr -all: makeinfo_output tex_output -makeinfo_output: $(makeinfo_output) -tex_output: $(tex_output) +# following the GNU sequence of clean targets. +distclean clean mostlyclean: + rm -rf latex2e*.t2* -mostlyclean clean: - rm -rf latex2e.t2* +realclean maintainer-clean: distclean + rm -f $(addprefix latex2e*., pdf dvi $(mi_suffixes)) -realclean distclean: clean - rm -f $(all) +# dist. +# +# We combine languages into one zip for upload. Will change if the +# translations ever become separately uploaded. +# Don't bother including .dvi files. +# +txt_files = ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README aspell.en.pws ltx-help.el dist = latex2e-help-texinfo.zip +# dist: all - @rm -f spanish; ln -s . spanish - @mkdir latex2e-help-texinfo; cd latex2e-help-texinfo; ln -s ../* . + rm -f spanish; ln -s . spanish + mkdir latex2e-help-texinfo && cd latex2e-help-texinfo && ln -s ../* . zip -q $(dist) \ -$(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/, ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README ltx-help.el \ - latex2e.texi $(en_makeinfo_output) latex2e.pdf) \ +$(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/, $(txt_files) \ + latex2e.texi $(en_mi_output) latex2e.pdf) \ $(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/, \ - latex2e-es.texi $(es_makeinfo_output) latex2e-es.pdf) - @rm -rf latex2e-help-texinfo + latex2e-es.texi $(es_mi_output) latex2e-es.pdf) + rm -rf latex2e-help-texinfo spanish @ls -l $(dist); unzip -t $(dist) + +# A hacky spell check target. +# Remove \commandnames to reduce exception list, but not {args} or +# [args], since they are often words. +spell spell-en: + sed -e 's/\\[a-zA-z]*//g' latex2e.texi \ + | aspell list --mode=texinfo --add-extra-dicts=`pwd`/aspell.en.pws \ + | sort -f -u + +# Check for doubled words. +# http://www.math.utah.edu/~beebe/software/file-tools.html#dw +check-dw: + grep -v '^@item' latex2e.texi | dw + +# Convenience targets to svn revert the generated files, +# and svn diff the source files. +svr: + svn revert $(addprefix latex2e*., $(all_suffixes)) +svd: + svn diff $(txt_files) *.texi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS index d2dc89fc459..894c9334f10 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS @@ -1,14 +1,30 @@ +$Id: NEWS 333 2015-05-12 17:12:37Z karl $ NEWS for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package. Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen. - Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco. +French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche. + +---------------------------------------------------------------- +Changes in May 2015 release: + +Usual bug fixes, more indexing, template updates. +Improve document and LaTeX overview, including general syntax. +Mention common engines, core classes, output files, italic corrections, pict2e. +Clarify optional arguments. +Avoid using plain's \sup, since @sup will be a Texinfo command. +For HTML, make the Up from Top be http://tug.org/texinfohtml. +Exception word list for spell checking, and make target for spell + checking and doubled words. +- +French translation begun (only in sources); Spanish translation updated. +Thanks to Vincent Belaiche and Jim Hefferon for their many contributions. ---------------------------------------------------------------- Changes in May 2014 release: Usual bug fixes, template updates. Add filecontents description, fnsymbol info, non-obsolescence of \tt et al., -mostly due to Vincent Belaiche. + mostly due to Vincent Belaiche. Updates to Spanish translation, also from Vincent. ---------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README index c459799ad4a..45d1a5d5abf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README @@ -1,3 +1,4 @@ +$Id: README 328 2015-05-07 18:33:27Z karl $ README for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package. Public domain. This file originally written 2008, Karl Berry. @@ -8,6 +9,8 @@ http://home.gna.org/latexrefman (the project home page) has more information, including links to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure. -Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for only +Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for just a few of the known deficiencies.) Please email any bug reports, new -material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org. +material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org, +also at https://mail.gna.org/listinfo/latexrefman-discuss. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d7b7e81f524 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +personal_ws-1.1 en 0 +ae +arabic +aring +Biemesderfer +Botway +bowtie +cmd +cp +dvi +dvitype +eg +ek +eng +eth +executivepaper +f's +fleqn +fn +fnsymbol +greek +hacek +hungarian +indexspace +intercolumn +Itemizations +LAH +legalpaper +letterpaper +lR +lrbox +Martinsen +niques +notitlepage +oe +onecolumn +oo +openany +openbib +openright +oslash +overbar +overdot +Overstrike +pagestyle +printindex +secnumdepth +superscripted +teck +tecks +texinfo +th +titlepage +twocolumn +twoside +underbar +xelatex +xyz +zet +ptr +usrguide diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk index 10eb5b9ea47..960c331c619 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk @@ -4,28 +4,29 @@ ]> -&latex;2e reference manual (May 2014) +&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (May 2015) + - - + + + - + + - - - + This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of May 2014. +document preparation system, version of May 2015. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -34,13 +35,13 @@ George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and -&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway -and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as -&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was -directly copied). +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by +L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users +Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no +text was directly copied). Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, -2014 Karl Berry. +2014, 2015 Karl Berry. Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. @@ -62,7 +63,7 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of May 2014. +document preparation system, version of May 2015. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -71,13 +72,13 @@ George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and -&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway -and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as -&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was -directly copied). +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by +L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users +Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no +text was directly copied). Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, -2014 Karl Berry. +2014, 2015 Karl Berry. Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. @@ -99,12 +100,10 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -&latex;2e +&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual -This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version as of May 2014. It is -intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of -&latex; for many years. +This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of +May 2015) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. @@ -112,183 +111,350 @@ intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of About this document -Knuth, Donald E. -Lamport, Leslie -&latex; Project team -The &latex; document preparation system is implemented as a macro -package for Donald E. Knuth’s &tex; typesetting program. -&latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now -maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org). -The official documentation written by the &latex; project is -available from their web site. - bug reporting reporting bugs -latexrefman-discuss@gna.org email address -The present document is completely unofficial and has not been -reviewed by the &latex; maintainers. Do not send bug reports or -anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all -comments to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org. - -The home page for this document is +http://home.gna.org/latexrefman home page +This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document +preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex; +typesetting program (see Overview). This document’s home page is http://home.gna.org/latexrefman. That page has links to the -current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other -infrastructure. - -Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about -&latex;. Here are a few: +current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and +subscriptions, and other infrastructure. -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr -Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation. +&latex; vs. &latex;2e +In this document, we will mostly just use ‘&latex;’ rather than +‘&latex;2e’, since the previous version of &latex; (2.09) was +retired many years ago. -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc -Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. - -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide -The guide for document authors maintained as part of &latex;; there -are several others. +unofficial nature of this manual +&latex; Project team +latexrefman-discuss@gna.org email address +&latex; is currently maintained by a group of volunteers +(http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by +the &latex; project is available from their web site. This document is +completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; +maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this +document to them. Instead, please send all comments to +latexrefman-discuss@gna.org. + +This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources +of information about &latex;, at all levels. Here are a few +introductions. + +http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr +latex-doc-ptr document +Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation. + +http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc +first-latex-doc document +Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. + +http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide +usrguide official documentation +The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of &latex;; +there are plenty of others available elsewhere. + +http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort +lshort document +A short introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages. http://tug.org/begin.html -Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;. - +Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;, with further +references. + + Overview of &latex; -What is &latex;? - overview of &latex; basics of &latex; +Knuth, Donald E. +Lamport, Leslie &latex; overview -&latex; typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the -&latex; “macro package” for &tex;. That is, it processes an input -file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that -describe how the text should be formatted. &latex; files are plain -text that can be written in any reasonable editor. It produces at -least three files as output: + +&latex; is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally +created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers +(http://latex-project.org). It is widely used, particularly for +complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics. + +macro package, &latex; as +A &latex; user writes an input file containing text along with +interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text +should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands +that interface with Donald E. Knuth’s &tex; typesetting program +(the technical term is that &latex; is a macro package for the +&tex; engine). The user produces the output document by giving that +file to the &tex; engine. + +The term &latex; is also sometimes used to mean the language in which +the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands +available to a &latex; user. + +Lamport &tex; +pronunciation +The name &latex; is short for “Lamport &tex;”. It is pronounced +LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, +produce the logo with \LaTeX. Where use of the logo is not +sensible, such as in plain text, write it as ‘LaTeX’. + + + + +Starting and ending + + +starting & ending +ending & starting +hello, world + +&latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard +starting and ending. Here is a “hello, world” example: + +\documentclass{article} +\begin{document} +Hello, \LaTeX\ world. +\end{document} + +document class, defined +Here, the ‘article’ is the so-called document class, +implemented in a file article.cls. Any document class can be +used. A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast +array of others are widely available. See Document classes. + +preamble, defined +You can include other &latex; commands between the +\documentclass and the \begin{document} commands. +This area is called the preamble. + +The \begin{document} ... \end{document} is a so-called +environment; the ‘document’ environment (and no others) is +required in all &latex; documents. &latex; provides many +environments itself, and many more are defined separately. +See Environments. -The main output file, which is one of: +The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from +a &latex; input file. + + + + +Output files + +&latex; produces a main output file and at least two accessory files. +The main output file’s name ends in either .dvi or .pdf. .dvi .dvi file latex command -If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) -file is produced. This contains commands that can be translated into -commands for virtually any output device. You can view such -.dvi output of &latex; by using a program such as -xdvi (display directly), dvips (convert to -PostScript), or dvipdfmx (convert to PDF). +xdvi command +dvips command +dvipdfmx command +dvitype command +If &latex; is invoked with the system command latex then it +produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension .dvi. You +can view this file with a command such as xdvi, or convert +it to a PostScript .ps file with dvips or to a +Portable Document Format .pdf file with dvipdfmx. +The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with +dvitype. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are +available (http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware). .pdf .pdf file pdf&tex; pdflatex command -If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” -(.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with -all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does -make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the -same document. - -lualatex command -Lua&tex; -If invoked as lualatex, a .pdf file is created using -the Lua&tex; engine (http://luatex.org). - -xelatex command -Xe&tex; -If invoked as xelatex, a .pdf file is created using -the Xe&tex; engine (http://tug.org/xetex). +If &latex; is invoked via the system command pdflatex, +among other commands (see &tex; engines), then the main output is +a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a +self-contained file, with all fonts and images included. -Many other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) exist, which -can produce HTML, XML, and other things. +&latex; also produces at least two additional files. -transcript file +.log +transcript file log file .log file -The “transcript” or .log file that contains summary -information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the -input file. +This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of +loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps +additional information for any errors. -auxiliary file +.aux +auxiliary file .aux file -An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, -for things such as cross-references. - -An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won’t try to -list them all. Xxx components? +cross references, resolving +forward references, resolving +references, resolving forward +Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as +cross references. For example, the first time that &latex; finds a +forward reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet +appeared in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled +question mark ??. When the referred-to spot does eventually +appear in the source then &latex; writes its location information to +this .aux file. On the next invocation, &latex; reads the +location information from this file and uses it to resolve the +reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered +location. + +.lof file +list of figures file +.lot file +list of tables file +.toc file +table of contents file +contents file +&latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename +ending. These include a .lof file that is used to make a list +of figures, a .lot file used to make a list of tables, and a +.toc file used to make a table of contents. A particular class +may create others; the list is open-ended. + + + + +&tex; engines + +engines, &tex; +implementations of &tex; +UTF-8 +Unicode input, native +TrueType fonts +OpenType fonts + +&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex; +implementation (see Overview). This section gives a terse +overview of the main programs. + +latex +pdflatex +pdf&tex; engine +etex command +e-&tex; +In &tex; Live (http://tug.org/texlive, if &latex; is invoked +via either the system command latex or pdflatex, +then the pdf&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). +When invoked as latex, the main output is a .dvi +file; as pdflatex, the main output is a .pdf file. + +pdf&tex; incorporates the e-&tex; extensions to Knuth’s original +program (http://ctan.org/pkg/etex), including additional +programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of +extensions of its own. e-&tex; is available on its own as the +command etex, but this is plain &tex; (and produces +.dvi). + +In other &tex; distributions, latex may invoke e-&tex; +rather than pdf&tex;. In any case, the e-&tex; extensions can be +assumed to be available in &latex;. + +lualatex +lualatex command +Lua&tex; +If &latex; is invoked via the system command lualatex, the +Lua&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This +program allows code written in the scripting language Lua +(http://luatex.org) to interact with &tex;’s typesetting. +Lua&tex; handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType +and TrueType fonts, and produces a .pdf file by default. +There is also dvilualatex to produce a .dvi file, +but this is rarely used. + +xelatex +xelatex command +Xe&tex; +If &latex; is invoked with the system command xelatex, the +Xe&tex; engine is run (http://tug.org/xetex). Like Lua&tex;, +Xe&tex; also natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and +OpenType fonts, though the implementation is completely different, +mainly using external libraries instead of internal code. Xe&tex; +produces a .pdf file as output; it does not support DVI output. + + +Other variants of &latex; and &tex; exist, e.g., to provide +additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p&tex;, +http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex, http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex). + + + + +&latex; command syntax + +command syntax \ character starting commands [...] for optional arguments {...} for required arguments -In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \, -followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single -non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are -optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are -required. +In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \; the +name itself then consists of either (a) a string of letters or +(b) a single non-letter. -case sensitivity of &latex; -&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless -explicitly directed to do otherwise. +A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments, either +required or optional. Required arguments are contained in curly +braces, {...}. Optional arguments are contained in square +brackets, [...]. Generally, but not universally, if the +command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any +required arguments. - - - -Starting & ending - -starting & ending -ending & starting - -A minimal input file looks like the following: +Some commands have a * form that is related to the form without +a *, such as \chapter and \chapter*. -\documentclass{class} -\begin{document} -your text -\end{document} - -where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. -See Document classes, for details of the various document classes -available locally. +&latex; commands are case sensitive; neither \Begin{document} +nor \begin{Document} will work. Most commands are lowercase, +but in any event you must enter all commands in the same case as they +are defined. -preamble, defined -You may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass -and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the -preamble). +This manual describes all accepted options and *-forms for the +commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs). + - + Document classes document classes classes of documents \documentclass -The class of a given document is defined with the command: +The document’s overall class is defined with this command, which is +normally the first command in a &latex; source file. \documentclass[options]{class} -The \documentclass command must be the first command in a -&latex; source file. - article class report class book class letter class slides class -Built-in &latex; document class names are (many other document -classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): +The following document class names are built into &latex;. +(Many other document classes are available as separate packages; +see Overview.) -article report book letter slides - - - -Standard options are described below. +article +For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use. + +book +Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front +matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix +(see Front/back matter). + +report +For documents of length between an article and a book, +such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters. + +slides +For slide presentations—rarely used today. In its place the +beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent (see beamer +template). + + +Standard options are described in the next section. - + Document class options document class options @@ -296,10 +462,9 @@ classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): class options global options -You can specify so-called global options or class options -to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square -brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate -them with a comma: +You can specify so-called global options or class options to +the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets. +To specify more than one option, separate them with a comma, as in: \documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class} @@ -334,21 +499,39 @@ size (default is letterpaper): notitlepage option Miscellaneous other options: -draft, final +draft +final black boxes, omitting -mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. -fleqn -Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. -landscape -Selects landscape format; default is portrait. -leqno -Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. -openbib -Use “open” bibliography format. -titlepage, notitlepage -Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. +Mark (draft) or do not mark (final) overfull boxes with a +black box in the margin; default is final. + +fleqn +flush left equations +centered equations +equations, flush left vs. centered +Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. + +landscape +landscape orientation +portrait orientation +Selects landscape format; default is portrait. + +leqno +left-hand equation numbers +right-hand equation numbers +equation numbers, left vs. right +Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. + +openbib +bibliography format, open +Use “open” bibliography format. + +titlepage +notitlepage +title page, separate or run-in +Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. -These options are not available with the slides class: +The following options are not available with the slides class. onecolumn option twocolumn option @@ -365,34 +548,35 @@ size (default is letterpaper): \evensidemargin \oddsidemargin Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except -for the book class. +that in the book class the default is twoside. -The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines -the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the -page and the text’s left margin. The defaults vary with the paper -size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided -printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is -40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, -with \evensidemargin the remainder. +For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided +printing, the \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin) parameter +determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left +side of the page and the text’s left margin, with \oddsidemargin +being 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and +\textwidth, and \evensidemargin is the remainder. openright openany -Determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page; default is openright for book. +Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is +openright for book, and openany for report. +clock option to slides class The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note. - -packages, loading loading additional packages +packages, loading additional +additional packages, loading \usepackage Additional packages are loaded like this: \usepackage[options]{pkg} -To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a -comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. +To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma, +as in \usepackage{pkg1,pkg2,...}, or use multiple +\usepackage commands. global options options, global @@ -403,7 +587,7 @@ by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with - + Fonts @@ -415,7 +599,7 @@ and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. - + Font styles font styles @@ -431,13 +615,22 @@ arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, -are cumulative; e.g.,, you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or +are cumulative; e.g., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. -These commands automatically supply an italic correction if needed. +\nocorrlist +\nocorr +These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections +if needed. (See \/, for the details of italic corrections.) +Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following +character is in the list \nocorrlist, which by default consists +of a period and a comma. To suppress the automatic insertion of +italic correction, use \nocorr at the start or end of the +command argument, such as \textit{\nocorr text} or +\textsc{text \nocorr}. \textrm (\rmfamily) \textrm @@ -548,8 +741,8 @@ FAQ entry: http: &latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. Also, they are used differently than the above commands: {\cmd -...} instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very -different things. +...} instead of \cmd{...}. These are two unrelated +constructs. \bf\bf bold font @@ -602,7 +795,7 @@ their place. - + Font sizes font sizes typeface sizes @@ -654,7 +847,7 @@ these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. - + Low-level font commands low-level font commands font commands, low-level @@ -743,7 +936,7 @@ followed by \selectfont. - + Layout layout commands @@ -751,7 +944,7 @@ followed by \selectfont. - + <literal>\onecolumn</literal> \onecolumn one-column output @@ -761,7 +954,7 @@ single-column output. This is the default. - + <literal>\twocolumn</literal> \twocolumn multicolumn text @@ -812,7 +1005,7 @@ and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt̵ - + <literal>\flushbottom</literal> \flushbottom @@ -826,7 +1019,7 @@ page. - + <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> \raggedbottom stretch, omitting vertical @@ -837,7 +1030,7 @@ stretched. - + Page layout parameters page layout parameters @@ -914,14 +1107,14 @@ then divided by two. \topskip\topskip Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of -the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the +the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. - + Sectioning sectioning @@ -929,7 +1122,7 @@ same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘
  • \part\part \chapter\chapter -(report and book class only) +(report and book class only) \section\section \subsection\subsection \subsubsection\subsubsection @@ -982,7 +1175,7 @@ The setting - + Cross references cross references @@ -991,7 +1184,7 @@ the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” - + <literal>\label</literal> \label @@ -1004,7 +1197,8 @@ the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are +distinguished, as usual. To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by @@ -1026,7 +1220,7 @@ a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: - + <literal>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> \pageref cross referencing with page number @@ -1042,7 +1236,7 @@ the place in the text where the corresponding - + <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> \ref cross referencing, symbolic @@ -1063,7 +1257,7 @@ such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare nu - + Environments environments @@ -1079,7 +1273,7 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - + <literal>abstract</literal> abstract environment @@ -1094,7 +1288,7 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - + <literal>array</literal> array environment arrays, math @@ -1110,8 +1304,8 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: within an equation environment (see equation). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is -specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should -be formatted, as follows: +specified by a single letter that tells how items in each row of that +column should be formatted, as follows: c centered @@ -1148,7 +1342,7 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. - + <literal>center</literal> center environment @@ -1169,7 +1363,7 @@ string \\. - + <literal>\centering</literal> \centering @@ -1198,7 +1392,7 @@ second line \\ - + <literal>description</literal> description environment @@ -1231,7 +1425,7 @@ plain typewriter}]. - + <literal>displaymath</literal> displaymath environment @@ -1256,17 +1450,17 @@ equation number, use the equation environment (see - + <literal>document</literal> document environment The document environment encloses the body of a document. -It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting & ending. +It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting and ending. - + <literal>enumerate</literal> enumerate environment @@ -1322,7 +1516,7 @@ letters: - + <literal>eqnarray</literal> eqnarray environment @@ -1349,7 +1543,7 @@ others) from the amsmath package. \\ (for eqnarray) The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column +equations or inequalities. It is similar to a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. @@ -1372,7 +1566,7 @@ zero width. - + <literal>equation</literal> equation environment @@ -1391,7 +1585,7 @@ on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. - + <literal>figure</literal> figure inserting figures @@ -1427,9 +1621,8 @@ output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. h -float package -(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment -appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; t is +(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment +appears. However, t is not allowed by itself; t is automatically added. here, putting floats @@ -1451,7 +1644,7 @@ The ! specifier does not mean “put see above. -The standard report and article classes use the default placement +The standard report and article classes use the default placement tbp. The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, @@ -1467,7 +1660,7 @@ present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text \bottomfraction -The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at the bottom; default ‘.3’. \floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction @@ -1498,17 +1691,21 @@ floats; default ‘.7’. Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. -Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page: +Counters relating to the number of floats on a page: -\bottomnumber\bottomnumber +bottomnumberbottomnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; default 1. -\topnumber\topnumber +dbltopnumberdbltopnumber +Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a +two-column page; default 2. + +topnumbertopnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; default 2. -\totalnumber\totalnumber +totalnumbertotalnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats: @@ -1516,7 +1713,7 @@ default 2. - + <literal>filecontents</literal>: Create external files filecontents external files, creating @@ -1561,13 +1758,13 @@ unrelated to using the created file. So you need to use, for instance, \input or \usepackage or \bibliography or whatever is applicable, to use the created file. -This environment is also useful to make a self-contained document, for -example, for a bug report, or to keep a .bib file with the main -document. +This environment is also useful to make a document in a self-contained +file, for example, for a bug report, or to keep the content of a +.bib file in the same file as the main document. - + <literal>flushleft</literal> flushleft environment left-justifying text, environment for @@ -1586,7 +1783,7 @@ right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - + <literal>\raggedright</literal> \raggedright ragged right text @@ -1606,7 +1803,7 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. - + <literal>flushright</literal> flushright environment ragged left text, environment for @@ -1625,7 +1822,7 @@ left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - + <literal>\raggedleft</literal> \raggedleft ragged left text @@ -1645,7 +1842,7 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. - + <literal>itemize</literal> itemize environment \item @@ -1771,7 +1968,7 @@ see \parskip): - + <literal>letter</literal> environment: writing letters letter @@ -1779,7 +1976,7 @@ see \parskip): - + <literal>list</literal> list lists of items, generic @@ -1808,7 +2005,7 @@ empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. - + <literal>math</literal> math environment @@ -1826,7 +2023,7 @@ See Math formulas. - + <literal>minipage</literal> minipage environment @@ -1865,7 +2062,7 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - + <literal>picture</literal> picture @@ -1946,32 +2143,34 @@ be the lower left corner of the box. - + <literal>\circle</literal> \circle -\circle[*]{diameter} +Synopsis: +\circle[*]{diameter} The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command draws a solid circle. -Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. +Circles up to 40pt can be drawn. - + <literal>\makebox</literal> -\makebox (picture) +\makebox (for picture) -\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} - +Synopsis: +\makebox(width,height)[position]{text} + The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a -width and height in multiples of \unitlength. +width and height in multiples of \unitlength. -The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: +The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that +your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: t Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. @@ -1990,7 +2189,7 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - + <literal>\framebox</literal> \framebox @@ -2010,7 +2209,7 @@ and the contents of the box. - + <literal>\dashbox</literal> \dashbox @@ -2024,12 +2223,12 @@ and the contents of the box. rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. The text is positioned at optional pos. -A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are -multiples of the dlen. +A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are +multiples of the dlen. - + <literal>\frame</literal> \frame @@ -2043,7 +2242,7 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. - + <literal>\line</literal> \line @@ -2054,14 +2253,16 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. The \line command draws a line with the given length and slope xslope/yslope. +pict2e package +graphics packages Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y have integer values from −6 -through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, -see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. +through 6. For lines of any slope, and plenty of other shapes, +see pict2e and many other packages on CTAN. - + <literal>\linethickness</literal> \linethickness @@ -2074,7 +2275,7 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. - + <literal>\thicklines</literal> \thicklines @@ -2084,7 +2285,7 @@ cf. \linethickness and - + <literal>\thinlines</literal> \thinlines @@ -2094,7 +2295,7 @@ cf. \linethickness and - + <literal>\multiput</literal> \multiput @@ -2108,7 +2309,7 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at pos - + <literal>\oval</literal> \oval @@ -2135,19 +2336,21 @@ boxes with rounded corners. - + <literal>\put</literal> - \put -\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } +Synopsis: -The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. +\put(xcoord,ycoord){ ... } + +The \put command places the material specified by the +(mandatory) argument in braces at the given coordinate, +(xcoord,ycoord). - + <literal>\shortstack</literal> \shortstack @@ -2170,22 +2373,22 @@ positions are: - + <literal>\vector</literal> \vector Synopsis: -\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} +\vector(xslope,yslope){length} The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -−4 and +4, inclusive. +length and slope. The xslope and yslope +values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive. - + <literal>quotation</literal> quotation @@ -2208,7 +2411,7 @@ normally. - + <literal>quote</literal> quote @@ -2216,7 +2419,7 @@ normally. displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting -Snyopsis: +Synopsis: \begin{quote} text @@ -2230,7 +2433,7 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - + <literal>tabbing</literal> tabbing environment @@ -2254,7 +2457,7 @@ the width of each column is constant and known in advance. This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular environment. -The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: +The following commands can be used inside a tabbing environment: \\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) End a line. @@ -2335,7 +2538,7 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ - + <literal>table</literal> table @@ -2368,7 +2571,7 @@ you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your tabl - + <literal>tabular</literal> tabular environment lines in tables @@ -2491,7 +2694,7 @@ environment: - + <literal>\multicolumn</literal> \multicolumn @@ -2517,7 +2720,7 @@ for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argumen - + <literal>\cline</literal> \cline @@ -2531,7 +2734,7 @@ which are specified in the mandatory argument. - + <literal>\hline</literal> \hline @@ -2542,7 +2745,7 @@ of a table. - + <literal>\vline</literal> \vline @@ -2554,7 +2757,7 @@ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an - + <literal>thebibliography</literal> thebibliography @@ -2585,7 +2788,7 @@ less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. - + <literal>\bibitem</literal> \bibitem @@ -2608,7 +2811,7 @@ associated label. - + <literal>\cite</literal> \cite @@ -2628,7 +2831,7 @@ citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce - + <literal>\nocite</literal> \nocite @@ -2639,7 +2842,7 @@ which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux f - + Using Bib&tex; using Bib&tex; @@ -2675,7 +2878,7 @@ publication. In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. +http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files @@ -2686,7 +2889,7 @@ Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and - + <literal>theorem</literal> theorem environment @@ -2705,7 +2908,7 @@ possibilities for n are described under \new - + <literal>titlepage</literal> titlepage environment @@ -2729,7 +2932,7 @@ produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment - + <literal>verbatim</literal> verbatim environment @@ -2754,7 +2957,7 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter. The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). - + <literal>\verb</literal> \verb @@ -2778,7 +2981,7 @@ verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text - + <literal>verse</literal> verse environment @@ -2804,7 +3007,7 @@ stanzas. - + Line breaking line breaking breaking lines @@ -2820,7 +3023,7 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the - + <literal>\\</literal>[*][<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>] \\ force line break new line, starting @@ -2836,7 +3039,7 @@ except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line. - + <literal>\obeycr</literal> & <literal>\restorecr</literal> \obeycr \restorecr @@ -2851,7 +3054,7 @@ in the output. - + <literal>\newline</literal> \newline new line, starting (paragraph mode) @@ -2862,14 +3065,14 @@ mode. - + <literal>\-</literal> (discretionary hyphen) \- (hyphenation) hyphenation, forcing The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at -that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually -find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +that point. &latex; is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds +most of the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional cases. @@ -2880,7 +3083,7 @@ that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. - + <literal>\fussy</literal> \fussy @@ -2893,7 +3096,7 @@ words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. - + <literal>\sloppy</literal> The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line @@ -2904,7 +3107,7 @@ interword spacing. - + <literal>\hyphenation</literal> \hyphenation hyphenation, defining @@ -2924,7 +3127,7 @@ misses the hyphenations in these words): - + <literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal> \linebreak \nolinebreak @@ -2948,7 +3151,7 @@ from a demand to a request. The priority must be a n - + Page breaking page breaking breaking pages @@ -2959,7 +3162,7 @@ but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - + <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> \cleardoublepage @@ -2972,7 +3175,7 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand - + <literal>\clearpage</literal> \clearpage flushing floats and starting a page @@ -2983,7 +3186,7 @@ figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - + <literal>\newpage</literal> \newpage new page, starting @@ -2994,7 +3197,7 @@ floats (see \clearpage above). - + <literal>\enlargethispage</literal> \enlargethispage enlarge current page @@ -3013,7 +3216,7 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit - + <literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal> \pagebreak \nopagebreak @@ -3038,7 +3241,7 @@ insistent the request is. - + Footnotes footnotes, creating @@ -3049,7 +3252,7 @@ produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the - + <literal>\footnote</literal> \footnote @@ -3068,7 +3271,7 @@ tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections. - + <literal>\footnotemark</literal> \footnotemark @@ -3086,7 +3289,7 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with - + <literal>\footnotetext</literal> \footnotetext @@ -3103,7 +3306,7 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode. - + Symbolic footnotes footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered @@ -3121,7 +3324,7 @@ redefine \@fnsymbol. - + Footnote parameters footnote parameters @@ -3131,7 +3334,7 @@ redefine \@fnsymbol. Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). +slides, where it does not appear). \footnotesep\footnotesep The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By @@ -3144,7 +3347,7 @@ footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘ - + Definitions definitions @@ -3154,7 +3357,7 @@ footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘ - + <literal>\newcommand</literal> & <literal>\renewcommand</literal> \newcommand commands, defining new ones @@ -3164,8 +3367,8 @@ footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘ \newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: - \newcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optarg]{defn} -\renewcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optarg]{defn} + \newcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optargval]{defn} +\renewcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optargval]{defn} * *-form of defining new commands @@ -3173,7 +3376,7 @@ command, respectively. Synopses: multiple paragraphs of text (not \long, in plain &tex; terms). cmd -The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it +The command name, beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand, it must already be defined. @@ -3182,12 +3385,14 @@ must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. -optarg -If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command’s -first argument is optional. The default value of the optional -argument (i.e., if it is not specified in the call) is optarg, -or, if that argument is present in the \newcommand but has an -empty value, the string ‘def’. +optargval +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the first +argument of command cmd is optional and its default value (i.e., +if it is not specified in the call) is optarg. In otherwise, +when calling the macro, if no [value] is given after +cmd—which is different from having [] for an +empty value—then string ‘optargval’ becomes the +value of #1 within defn when the macro is expanded. defn The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a @@ -3198,26 +3403,26 @@ text of the nth argument. - + <literal>\newcounter</literal> \newcounter counters, defining new Synopsis: -\newcounter{cnt}[countername] +\newcounter{countername}[supercounter] -The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. +The \newcounter command defines a new counter named countername. The new counter is initialized to zero. -Given the optional argument [countername], cnt -will be reset whenever countername is incremented. +Given the optional argument [super], countername +will be reset whenever the counter named supercounter is incremented. See Counters, for more information about counters. - + <literal>\newlength</literal> \newlength lengths, defining new @@ -3227,7 +3432,7 @@ will be reset whenever countername is incremented. \newlength{\arg} The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a -length command with a value of 0in. The argument must +length command with a value of zero. The argument must be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error occurs if \foo is already defined. @@ -3236,7 +3441,7 @@ for more information about lengths in general. - + <literal>\newsavebox</literal> \newsavebox @@ -3249,7 +3454,7 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. - + <literal>\newenvironment</literal> & <literal>\renewenvironment</literal> \newenvironment \renewenvironment @@ -3296,7 +3501,7 @@ may not contain any argument parameters. - + <literal>\newtheorem</literal> \newtheorem theorems, defining @@ -3330,7 +3535,7 @@ not both. - + <literal>\newfont</literal> \newfont fonts, new commands for @@ -3349,7 +3554,7 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd fi - + <literal>\protect</literal> \protect @@ -3380,7 +3585,7 @@ be preceded by \protect. - + Counters counters, a list of variables, a list of @@ -3400,7 +3605,7 @@ subsubsection - + <literal>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</literal>: Printing counters All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for @@ -3418,7 +3623,7 @@ instance, \alph{enumi}. \roman\roman uses lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... -\roman\roman +\Roman\Roman uses uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... \fnsymbol\fnsymbol @@ -3426,14 +3631,16 @@ instance, \alph{enumi}. symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. -The symbols mostly aren’t supported in Info, but here are the names: -asterisk(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel -double-asterisk(**) double-dagger double-ddagger +Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output): + +asterisk(*) dagger(‡) ddagger(‡) +section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(∥) +double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(‡‡) double-ddagger(‡‡) - + <literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> \usecounter list items, specifying counter @@ -3449,7 +3656,7 @@ the list items. - + <literal>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> \value counters, getting value of @@ -3467,7 +3674,7 @@ be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: - + <literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> \setcounter counters, setting @@ -3475,14 +3682,14 @@ be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: Synopsis: -\setcounter{\counter}{value} +\setcounter{counter}{value} -The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the +The \setcounter command sets the value of counter to the value argument. - + <literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> \addtocounter @@ -3491,7 +3698,7 @@ amount specified by the value argument, which may be - + <literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> \refstepcounter @@ -3501,7 +3708,7 @@ current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter - + <literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> \stepcounter @@ -3510,7 +3717,7 @@ resets all subsidiary counters. - + <literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Predefined counters \day \month @@ -3528,7 +3735,7 @@ current day (see \today). - + Lengths lengths, defining and using @@ -3537,7 +3744,7 @@ length as an argument. - + <literal>\setlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> \setlength lengths, setting @@ -3549,7 +3756,7 @@ understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm - + \addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>} \addtolength lengths, adding to @@ -3560,7 +3767,7 @@ may be negative. - + <literal>\settodepth</literal> \settodepth @@ -3571,7 +3778,7 @@ equal to the depth of the text argument. - + <literal>\settoheight</literal> \settoheight @@ -3583,7 +3790,7 @@ equal to the height of the text argument. - + <literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \settowidth @@ -3592,7 +3799,7 @@ to the width of the text argument. - + Predefined lengths lengths, predefined predefined lengths @@ -3620,7 +3827,7 @@ natural size, e.g., say - + Making paragraphs making paragraphs paragraphs @@ -3632,7 +3839,7 @@ a sectioning command. - + <literal>\indent</literal> \indent \parindent @@ -3649,7 +3856,7 @@ mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, < - + <literal>\noindent</literal> \noindent indent, suppressing @@ -3660,7 +3867,7 @@ the middle of a paragraph. - + <literal>\parskip</literal> \parskip vertical space before paragraphs @@ -3670,7 +3877,7 @@ before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. - + Marginal notes marginal notes notes in the margin @@ -3730,7 +3937,7 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. - + Math formulas math formulas formulas, math @@ -3785,7 +3992,7 @@ below summations. For example - + Subscripts & superscripts superscript subscript @@ -3802,7 +4009,7 @@ superscript. - + Math symbols math symbols symbols, math @@ -4447,7 +4654,7 @@ the pi symbol (\pi) in - + Math functions math functions functions, math @@ -4549,7 +4756,10 @@ spacing. \sinh \sup\sup -\sup +sup + + + \tan\tan \tan @@ -4560,7 +4770,7 @@ spacing. - + Math accents math accents accents, mathematical @@ -4636,7 +4846,7 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text - + Spacing in math mode spacing within math mode math mode, spacing @@ -4662,7 +4872,7 @@ commands for use in math mode: - + Math miscellany math miscellany @@ -4697,7 +4907,7 @@ For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times} \overline{text}\overline{text} Generates a horizontal line over tex. -For exampe, \overline{x+y}. +For example, \overline{x+y}. \sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The @@ -4725,14 +4935,13 @@ descenders. - + Modes modes paragraph mode math mode left-to-right mode -lR mode - +LR mode When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: @@ -4741,36 +4950,39 @@ modes: Math mode Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short -&latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when +Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when &latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. -“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it’s the one &latex; is in -when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your -text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in -“math mode” when it’s generating a mathematical formula. In “LR -mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it -produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, -unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it -never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words -into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting them from left -to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting -box was too wide to fit on the line. - -&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When -&latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. +Paragraph mode is the most common; it’s the one &latex; is in +when processing ordinary text. In this mode, &latex; breaks the +input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. + +&latex; is in math mode when it’s generating a mathematical +formula, either displayed math or within a line. + +\mbox, and LR mode +In LR mode, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output +that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. +However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to +right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a +hundred words into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting +them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely +complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line). +&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an +\mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside +the box—for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a +formula in the box. + +There are also several text-producing commands and environments for +making a box that put &latex; into paragraph mode. The box made by +one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. +When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to +be in “inner paragraph mode” (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph +mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. - + Page styles styles, page page styles @@ -4780,7 +4992,7 @@ the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - + <literal>\maketitle</literal> titles, making \maketitle @@ -4820,7 +5032,7 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. - + <literal>\pagenumbering</literal> \pagenumbering page numbering style @@ -4829,7 +5041,9 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. \pagenumbering{style} -Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: +Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style; also +resets the page number to 1. The style argument is one of +the following: arabic arabic numerals @@ -4848,7 +5062,7 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. - + <literal>\pagestyle</literal> \pagestyle header style @@ -4893,7 +5107,7 @@ the page. - + <literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}</literal> \thispagestyle @@ -4904,7 +5118,7 @@ changes to style for the current page only. - + Spaces spaces @@ -4916,7 +5130,7 @@ more often useful in math mode (see Spacin - + <literal>\hspace</literal> \hspace @@ -4936,10 +5150,12 @@ form. - + <literal>\hfill</literal> - \hfill + +stretch, infinite horizontal +infinite horizontal stretch The \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. @@ -4951,16 +5167,16 @@ equivalent to \hfill. - -<literal>\SPACE</literal> + +<literal>\SPACE</literal>: Normal interword space \SPACE \TAB \NEWLINE The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It’s -useful after punctuation which shouldn’t end a sentence. For example -Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. -It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a +useful after punctuation which shouldn’t end a sentence. For example, +the article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It +is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system. In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline @@ -4968,9 +5184,10 @@ are equivalent to \ . - -<literal>\@</literal> + +<literal>\@</literal>: Force sentence-ending punctuation \@ + The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after @@ -4982,26 +5199,27 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without produces - +
    … in C. Pascal, though … … in C. Pascal, though …
    - -<literal>\thinspace</literal> + +<literal>\thinspace</literal>: Insert 1/6em \thinspace \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that -is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in ’”. +is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested +quotes, as in ’”. - -<literal>\/</literal> + +<literal>\/</literal>: Insert italic correction \/ +italic correction The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, @@ -5015,14 +5233,22 @@ normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the &tex; output, the ‘f’s are nicely separated) with f: f;. +When changing fonts with commands such as \textit{italic +text} or {\itshape italic text}, &latex; will +automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (see Font +styles). + Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the ‘f’) with pdf&tex;. +There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done +in a different way. + - + <literal>\hrulefill</literal> \hrulefill @@ -5032,7 +5258,7 @@ rule. - + <literal>\dotfill</literal> \dotfill @@ -5043,7 +5269,7 @@ with dots instead of just white space. - + <literal>\addvspace</literal> \addvspace vertical space @@ -5054,50 +5280,56 @@ with dots instead of just white space. The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to length. +command will not add more space than is needed to make the natural +length of the total vertical space equal to length. - + <literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal> -These commands produce a given amount of space. +These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the +document class. \bigskip \bigskip \bigskipamount -The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line -space (with stretch and shrink). +The same as \vspace{\bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book and +article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt). \medskip \medskip \medskipamount -The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily -about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of +a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book +and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt). \smallskip \smallskip \smallskipamount -The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a -quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +The same as \vspace{\smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the +book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus +1pt). -The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. - - + <literal>\vfill</literal> \vfill +stretch, infinite vertical +infinite vertical stretch + The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to \vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). - + <literal>\vspace[*]{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> \vspace @@ -5115,7 +5347,7 @@ space is not removed.
    - + Boxes boxes @@ -5125,7 +5357,7 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - + <literal>\mbox{<replaceable>text}</replaceable></literal> \mbox @@ -5136,7 +5368,7 @@ lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. - + <literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal> \fbox @@ -5166,7 +5398,7 @@ argument. - + <literal>lrbox</literal> lrbox @@ -5179,7 +5411,7 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox. - + <literal>\makebox</literal> \makebox @@ -5208,7 +5440,7 @@ see \makebox (picture). - + <literal>\parbox</literal> \parbox @@ -5252,7 +5484,7 @@ for this to work. - + <literal>\raisebox</literal> \raisebox @@ -5272,7 +5504,7 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth. - + <literal>\savebox</literal> \savebox @@ -5287,7 +5519,7 @@ declared with \newsavebox (see + <literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \sbox @@ -5303,8 +5535,8 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled - -<literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable></literal> + +<literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}</literal> \usebox Synopsis: @@ -5317,7 +5549,7 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled - + Special insertions &latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a @@ -5325,7 +5557,7 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. - + Reserved characters reserved characters characters, reserved @@ -5374,7 +5606,7 @@ with ", so the previous example could also be written as - + Text symbols text symbols @@ -5402,6 +5634,11 @@ not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp packa logo, &latex; The &latex; logo. +\LaTeXe\LaTeXe +&latex;2e logo +logo, &latex;2e +The &latex;2e logo. + \guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) \guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») \guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) @@ -5446,7 +5683,7 @@ and \dots also work in math mode. double low-9 quotation mark single low-9 quotation mark low-9 quotation marks, single and double -Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚. \rq\rq @@ -5584,8 +5821,8 @@ has the ascender height. Centered period: \cdot. \textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) -questionation point, upside-down -Upside down questionation point: ¿. +question mark, upside-down +Upside down question mark: ¿. \textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) left quote, double @@ -5649,13 +5886,15 @@ has the ascender height. - + Accents accents characters, accented letters, accented +babel package +multilingual support &latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists @@ -5810,7 +6049,7 @@ descenders. See also \underline in + Non-English characters special characters @@ -5838,8 +6077,8 @@ used in languages other than English. \dh \DH -\dh (æ) -\DH (Æ) +\dh (ð) +\DH (Ð) Icelandic eth eth, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. @@ -5848,7 +6087,7 @@ used in languages other than English. \DJ \dj \DJ -xxxx +Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke. \ij \IJ @@ -5868,7 +6107,7 @@ used in languages other than English. \NG \ng \NG -xxxx +Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics. \o \O @@ -5903,7 +6142,7 @@ used in languages other than English. - + <literal>\rule</literal> \rule @@ -5925,7 +6164,7 @@ rectangles. The arguments are: - + <literal>\today</literal> \today @@ -5942,7 +6181,7 @@ of other date formats. - + Splitting the input splitting the input file input file @@ -5958,7 +6197,7 @@ external file to be created with the main document. - + <literal>\include</literal> \include @@ -5981,7 +6220,7 @@ read by another \include command. - + \<literal>includeonly</literal> \includeonly @@ -5999,7 +6238,7 @@ effective. - + \input \input @@ -6018,12 +6257,12 @@ is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar - + Front/back matter - + Tables of contents table of contents, creating @@ -6042,9 +6281,12 @@ table of contents, write a \newpage command after the \listoffigures \listoftables +.lof file +.lot file The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables -produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. +produce a list of figures and a list of tables (from .lof and +.lot files), respectively. Everything works exactly the same +as for the table of contents. \nofiles The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and @@ -6052,7 +6294,7 @@ Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - + \addcontentsline \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} table of contents entry, manually adding @@ -6078,17 +6320,17 @@ following, matching the value of the ext argument: For the list of tables. entry -The actual text of the entry. +The text of the entry. \contentsline What is written to the .ext file is the command \contentsline{unit}{name}. - + - + \addtocontents \addtocontents{ext}{text} @@ -6097,9 +6339,9 @@ command \contentsline{unit}{nam generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written: -toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or -lot (list of tables). +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of +figures), or lot (list of tables). text The text to be written. @@ -6107,7 +6349,7 @@ generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. - + Glossaries glossaries @@ -6124,12 +6366,13 @@ generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. \glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. +glossary package The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier glossaries. - + Indexes indexes @@ -6148,6 +6391,7 @@ the preamble. is the current \thepage value. ‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries +index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’ To generate a index entry for ‘bar’ that says ‘See foo’, use a vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso instead of see to make a ‘See also’ entry. @@ -6192,7 +6436,7 @@ preparing the index. - + Letters letters creating letters @@ -6233,7 +6477,7 @@ commands, use \\ to separate the items. - + \address{<replaceable>return-address}</replaceable> \address @@ -6242,14 +6486,14 @@ should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation’s standard +will be formatted for copying onto your organization’s standard letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. - + <literal>\cc</literal> \cc @@ -6264,7 +6508,7 @@ printed on a separate line. - + <literal>\closing</literal> \closing @@ -6280,7 +6524,7 @@ printed on a separate line. - + <literal>\encl</literal> \encl @@ -6294,18 +6538,18 @@ printed on a separate line. - + <literal>\location</literal> \location \location{address} -This modifies your organisation’s standard address. This only appears +This modifies your organization’s standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. - + <literal>\makelabels</literal> \makelabels @@ -6317,7 +6561,7 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. - + <literal>\name</literal> \name @@ -6328,7 +6572,7 @@ address. - + <literal>\opening{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \opening letters, starting @@ -6345,7 +6589,7 @@ For instance: - + <literal>\ps</literal> \ps postscript, in letters @@ -6355,7 +6599,7 @@ For instance: - + <literal>\signature{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \signature @@ -6365,7 +6609,7 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within - + <literal>\startbreaks</literal> \startbreaks @@ -6374,9 +6618,8 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. - - + <literal>\stopbreaks</literal> \stopbreaks @@ -6385,9 +6628,8 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. - - + <literal>\telephone</literal> \telephone @@ -6399,14 +6641,14 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within - + Terminal input/output input/output terminal input/output - + <literal>\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> \typein @@ -6424,7 +6666,7 @@ redefined to be the typed input. - + <literal>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> \typeout @@ -6446,19 +6688,24 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in - + Command line command line +.tex, default extension The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; &tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the -input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You -specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the -command; e.g. +input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You can +also specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting with a backslash. +For example, this processes foo.tex without pausing after every +error: latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' -will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. +–help command-line option +With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also +be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with ‘-’ or +‘--’. For a list of those options, try ‘latex --help’. *’ prompt prompt, ‘* @@ -6467,7 +6714,8 @@ command; e.g. ‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. - +See &tex; engines, for other system commands invoking &latex;. + @@ -6475,37 +6723,17 @@ command; e.g. document templates Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional template resources are listed +be useful. Additional template resources are listed at http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. - -<literal>book</literal> template - -\documentclass{book} -\title{Book Class Template} -\author{Alex Author} - -\begin{document} -\maketitle - -\chapter{First} -Some text. - -\chapter{Second} -Some other text. - -\section{A subtopic} -The end. -\end{document} - - - - + <literal>beamer</literal> template -The beamer class creates slides presentations. +beamer template and class +The beamer class creates presentation slides. It has a vast +array of features, but here is a basic template: \documentclass{beamer} @@ -6533,10 +6761,35 @@ The end. http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/. + + +<literal>book</literal> template + +\documentclass{book} +\title{Book Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\chapter{First} +Some text. + +\chapter{Second} +Some other text. + +\section{A subtopic} +The end. +\end{document} + + <literal>tugboat</literal> template +TUGboat template +ltugboat class + TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, http://tug.org/TUGboat. @@ -6570,8 +6823,8 @@ This is an example article for \TUB{}. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the -hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the +\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output. Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html index 60b77bf9423..6d6fb8eed5f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ - + -LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2014) +LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (May 2015) - - + + @@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. --> @@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} - -

    LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2014)

    + +

    LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (May 2015)

    @@ -95,31 +95,30 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
    • 1 About this document
    • 2 Overview of LaTeX
    • -
    • 3 Starting & ending
    • -
    • 4 Document classes
    • -
    • 5 Fonts
    • -
    • 6 Layout
    • -
    • 7 Sectioning
    • -
    • 8 Cross references
    • -
    • 9 Environments
    • -
    • 10 Line breaking
    • -
    • 11 Page breaking
    • -
    • 12 Footnotes
    • -
    • 13 Definitions
    • -
    • 14 Counters
    • -
    • 15 Lengths
    • -
    • 16 Making paragraphs
    • -
    • 17 Math formulas
    • -
    • 18 Modes
    • -
    • 19 Page styles
    • -
    • 20 Spaces
    • -
    • 21 Boxes
    • -
    • 22 Special insertions
    • -
    • 23 Splitting the input
    • -
    • 24 Front/back matter
    • -
    • 25 Letters
    • -
    • 26 Terminal input/output
    • -
    • 27 Command line
    • +
    • 3 Document classes
    • +
    • 4 Fonts
    • +
    • 5 Layout
    • +
    • 6 Sectioning
    • +
    • 7 Cross references
    • +
    • 8 Environments
    • +
    • 9 Line breaking
    • +
    • 10 Page breaking
    • +
    • 11 Footnotes
    • +
    • 12 Definitions
    • +
    • 13 Counters
    • +
    • 14 Lengths
    • +
    • 15 Making paragraphs
    • +
    • 16 Math formulas
    • +
    • 17 Modes
    • +
    • 18 Page styles
    • +
    • 19 Spaces
    • +
    • 20 Boxes
    • +
    • 21 Special insertions
    • +
    • 22 Splitting the input
    • +
    • 23 Front/back matter
    • +
    • 24 Letters
    • +
    • 25 Terminal input/output
    • +
    • 26 Command line
    • Appendix A Document templates
    • Concept Index
    • Command Index
    • @@ -133,265 +132,270 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} -

      LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when +

      Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.

      -

      “Paragraph mode” is the most common; it’s the one LaTeX is in -when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your -text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in -“math mode” when it’s generating a mathematical formula. In “LR -mode”, as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that it -produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, -unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it -never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words -into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left -to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting -box was too wide to fit on the line. -

      -

      LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When -LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. +

      Paragraph mode is the most common; it’s the one LaTeX is in +when processing ordinary text. In this mode, LaTeX breaks the +input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. +

      +

      LaTeX is in math mode when it’s generating a mathematical +formula, either displayed math or within a line. +

      + +

      In LR mode, as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output +that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. +However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to +right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a +hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep typesetting +them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely +complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line). +LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an +\mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside +the box—for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a +formula in the box. +

      +

      There are also several text-producing commands and environments for +making a box that put LaTeX into paragraph mode. The box made by +one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. +When LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to +be in “inner paragraph mode” (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph +mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.


      @@ -7488,7 +7741,7 @@ in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19 Page styles

      +

      18 Page styles

      @@ -7514,7 +7767,7 @@ the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. Next: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.1 \maketitle

      +

      18.1 \maketitle

      @@ -7573,7 +7826,7 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. Next: , Previous: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.2 \pagenumbering

      +

      18.2 \pagenumbering

      @@ -7583,7 +7836,9 @@ Next: , Prev
      \pagenumbering{style}
       
      -

      Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: +

      Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style; also +resets the page number to 1. The style argument is one of +the following:

      arabic
      @@ -7615,7 +7870,7 @@ Next: , Prev Next: , Previous: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.3 \pagestyle

      +

      18.3 \pagestyle

      @@ -7681,7 +7936,7 @@ the page. Previous: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.4 \thispagestyle{style}

      +

      18.4 \thispagestyle{style}

      The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the @@ -7696,7 +7951,7 @@ changes to style for the current page only. Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20 Spaces

      +

      19 Spaces

      LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. @@ -7713,11 +7968,11 @@ more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in • \SPACE:  Normal interword space. -• \AT:  Ending a sentence. +• \@:  Ending a sentence. • \thinspace:  One-sixth of an em. -• \/:  Per-character italic correction. +• \/:  Insert italic correction. • \hrulefill:  Stretchable horizontal rule. @@ -7743,7 +7998,7 @@ Vertical space Next: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.1 \hspace

      +

      19.1 \hspace

      Synopsis: @@ -7770,9 +8025,11 @@ form. Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.2 \hfill

      - +

      19.2 \hfill

      + + +

      The \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. @@ -7787,18 +8044,18 @@ equivalent to \hfill.

      -Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      - -

      20.3 \SPACE

      + +

      19.3 \SPACE: Normal interword space

      The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It’s -useful after punctuation which shouldn’t end a sentence. For example -Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. -It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a +useful after punctuation which shouldn’t end a sentence. For example, +the article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It +is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system.

      In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline @@ -7806,15 +8063,15 @@ are equivalent to \ .


      - +

      Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      - -

      20.4 \@

      + +

      19.4 \@: Force sentence-ending punctuation

      - +

      The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without @@ -7837,16 +8094,15 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without

      -Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      +Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      - -

      20.5 \thinspace

      + +

      19.5 \thinspace: Insert 1/6em

      \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that -is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in ’”. -

      +is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested +quotes, as in ’”.


      @@ -7854,9 +8110,10 @@ in ’”.

      Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      - -

      20.6 \/

      + +

      19.6 \/: Insert italic correction

      +

      The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, @@ -7870,11 +8127,18 @@ normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the ‘f’s are nicely separated) with f: f;.

      +

      When changing fonts with commands such as \textit{italic +text} or {\itshape italic text}, LaTeX will +automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (see Font styles). +

      Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space after the ‘f’) with pdfTeX.

      +

      There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done +in a different way. +


      @@ -7883,7 +8147,7 @@ with pdfTeX. Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.7 \hrulefill

      +

      19.7 \hrulefill

      The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can @@ -7898,7 +8162,7 @@ rule. Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.8 \dotfill

      +

      19.8 \dotfill

      @@ -7913,7 +8177,7 @@ with dots instead of just white space. Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.9 \addvspace

      +

      19.9 \addvspace

      @@ -7923,8 +8187,8 @@ Next: \vfill, Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip

      +

      19.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip

      -

      These commands produce a given amount of space. +

      These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the +document class.

      \bigskip
      -

      The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line -space (with stretch and shrink). +

      The same as \vspace{\bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book and +article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt).

      \medskip
      -

      The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily -about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +

      The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of +a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book +and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt).

      \smallskip
      -

      The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a -quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +

      The same as \vspace{\smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the +book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus +1pt).

      -

      The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. -


      @@ -7972,9 +8239,12 @@ quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.11 \vfill

      +

      19.11 \vfill

      + + +

      The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to \vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). @@ -7987,7 +8257,7 @@ can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.12 \vspace[*]{length}

      +

      19.12 \vspace[*]{length}

      Synopsis: @@ -8011,7 +8281,7 @@ space is not removed. Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21 Boxes

      +

      20 Boxes

      @@ -8023,7 +8293,7 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands. • \fbox and \framebox:  Put a frame around a box. -• lrbox:  An environment like \sbox. +• lrbox:  An environment like \sbox. • \makebox:  Box, adjustable position. @@ -8031,9 +8301,9 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands. • \raisebox:  Raise or lower text. -• \savebox:  Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. +• \savebox:  Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. -• \sbox:  Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. +• \sbox:  Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. • \usebox:  Print saved text. @@ -8047,7 +8317,7 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands. Next: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.1 \mbox{text}

      +

      20.1 \mbox{text}

      @@ -8063,7 +8333,7 @@ lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.2 \fbox and \framebox

      +

      20.2 \fbox and \framebox

      @@ -8099,7 +8369,7 @@ argument.

      Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.3 lrbox

      +

      20.3 lrbox

      \begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} @@ -8117,7 +8387,7 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox. Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.4 \makebox

      +

      20.4 \makebox

      Synopsis: @@ -8159,7 +8429,7 @@ see \makebox (picture). Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.5 \parbox

      +

      20.5 \parbox

      Synopsis: @@ -8220,7 +8490,7 @@ for this to work. Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.6 \raisebox

      +

      20.6 \raisebox

      Synopsis: @@ -8247,7 +8517,7 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth. Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.7 \savebox

      +

      20.7 \savebox

      Synopsis: @@ -8269,7 +8539,7 @@ declared with \newsavebox (see \newsa Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}

      +

      20.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}

      Synopsis: @@ -8291,8 +8561,8 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled

      Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      - -

      21.9 \usebox{\boxcmd

      + +

      20.9 \usebox{\boxcmd}

      Synopsis: @@ -8312,13 +8582,13 @@ Previous: , Up: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22 Special insertions

      +

      21 Special insertions

      LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.

      - @@ -8340,7 +8610,7 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. Next: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.1 Reserved characters

      +

      21.1 Reserved characters

      @@ -8396,7 +8666,7 @@ with ", so the previous example could also be written as Next: , Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.2 Text symbols

      +

      21.2 Text symbols

      @@ -8437,6 +8707,14 @@ not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package.

      The LaTeX logo.

      +
      \LaTeXe + +
      +
      + +

      The LaTeX2e logo. +

      +
      \guillemotleft («)
      @@ -8514,7 +8792,7 @@ and \dots also work in math mode.
      -

      Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +

      Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚.

      @@ -8742,8 +9020,8 @@ has the ascender height.
      \textquestiondown (or ?`)
      -
      -

      Upside down questionation point: ¿. +

      +

      Upside down question mark: ¿.

      \textquotedblleft (or ``) @@ -8853,12 +9131,14 @@ has the ascender height. Next: , Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.3 Accents

      +

      21.3 Accents

      + +

      LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists @@ -9040,7 +9320,7 @@ descenders. See also \underline in Math Next: , Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.4 Non-English characters

      +

      21.4 Non-English characters

      @@ -9069,8 +9349,8 @@ used in languages other than English.
      \dh
      \DH
      -
      - +
      +

      Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. @@ -9080,7 +9360,7 @@ used in languages other than English.

      \DJ
      -

      xxxx +

      Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.

      \ij
      @@ -9103,7 +9383,7 @@ used in languages other than English.
      \NG
      -

      xxxx +

      Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics.

      \o
      @@ -9150,7 +9430,7 @@ used in languages other than English. Next: , Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.5 \rule

      +

      21.5 \rule

      Synopsis: @@ -9184,7 +9464,7 @@ rectangles. The arguments are: Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.6 \today

      +

      21.6 \today

      The \today command produces today’s date, in the format @@ -9205,7 +9485,7 @@ of other date formats. Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23 Splitting the input

      +

      22 Splitting the input

      @@ -9235,7 +9515,7 @@ external file to be created with the main document. Next: , Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23.1 \include

      +

      22.1 \include

      Synopsis: @@ -9265,7 +9545,7 @@ read by another \include command. Next: , Previous: , Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23.2 \includeonly

      +

      22.2 \includeonly

      Synopsis: @@ -9290,7 +9570,7 @@ effective. Previous: , Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23.3 \input

      +

      22.3 \input

      Synopsis: @@ -9315,7 +9595,7 @@ is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      24 Front/back matter

      +

      23 Front/back matter

      - @@ -9625,7 +9910,7 @@ commands, use \\ to separate the items. Next: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.1 \address{return-address}

      +

      24.1 \address{return-address}

      The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it @@ -9633,7 +9918,7 @@ should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands.

      If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation’s standard +will be formatted for copying onto your organization’s standard letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. @@ -9646,7 +9931,7 @@ letter will be formatted as a personal letter. Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.2 \cc

      +

      24.2 \cc

      @@ -9668,7 +9953,7 @@ printed on a separate line. Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.3 \closing

      +

      24.3 \closing

      @@ -9693,7 +9978,7 @@ Next: , Previous: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.4 \encl

      +

      24.4 \encl

      @@ -9714,12 +9999,12 @@ Next: , Previo Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.5 \location

      +

      24.5 \location

      \location{address}

      -

      This modifies your organisation’s standard address. This only appears +

      This modifies your organization’s standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.

      @@ -9730,7 +10015,7 @@ if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.6 \makelabels

      +

      24.6 \makelabels

      \makelabels{number} @@ -9747,7 +10032,7 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.7 \name

      +

      24.7 \name

      \name{June Davenport} @@ -9763,7 +10048,7 @@ address. Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.8 \opening{text}

      +

      24.8 \opening{text}

      @@ -9789,7 +10074,7 @@ For instance: Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.9 \ps

      +

      24.9 \ps

      @@ -9804,7 +10089,7 @@ Next: , Prev Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.10 \signature{text}

      +

      24.10 \signature{text}

      Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the @@ -9819,7 +10104,7 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.11 \startbreaks

      +

      24.11 \startbreaks

      \startbreaks @@ -9827,7 +10112,6 @@ Next: , Pr

      Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again.

      -
      @@ -9835,7 +10119,7 @@ Next: , Pr Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.12 \stopbreaks

      +

      24.12 \stopbreaks

      \stopbreaks @@ -9843,7 +10127,6 @@ Next: , Prev

      Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs.

      -
      @@ -9851,7 +10134,7 @@ Next: , Prev Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      25.13 \telephone

      +

      24.13 \telephone

      \telephone{number} @@ -9867,7 +10150,7 @@ Previous: Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      26 Terminal input/output

      +

      25 Terminal input/output

      @@ -9886,7 +10169,7 @@ Next: , Previou Next: , Up: Terminal input/output   [Contents][Index]

      -

      26.1 \typein[cmd]{msg}

      +

      25.1 \typein[cmd]{msg}

      Synopsis: @@ -9911,7 +10194,7 @@ redefined to be the typed input. Previous: , Up: Terminal input/output   [Contents][Index]

      -

      26.2 \typeout{msg}

      +

      25.2 \typeout{msg}

      Synopsis: @@ -9939,20 +10222,25 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      27 Command line

      +

      26 Command line

      +

      The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the -input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You -specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the -command; e.g. +input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You can +also specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting with a backslash. +For example, this processes foo.tex without pausing after every +error:

      latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
       
      -

      will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. + +

      With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also +be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with ‘-’ or +‘--’. For a list of those options, try ‘latex --help’.

      @@ -9961,7 +10249,8 @@ command; e.g. ‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document.

      - +

      See TeX engines, for other system commands invoking LaTeX. +


      @@ -9974,56 +10263,31 @@ Next: , Previ

      Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional template resources are listed +be useful. Additional template resources are listed at http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates.

      - - -
      - - - -

      A.1 book template

      - -
      \documentclass{book}
      -\title{Book Class Template}
      -\author{Alex Author}
      -
      -\begin{document}
      -\maketitle
      -
      -\chapter{First}
      -Some text.
      -
      -\chapter{Second}
      -Some other text.
      -
      -\section{A subtopic}
      -The end.
      -\end{document}
      -
      -
      -

      A.2 beamer template

      +

      A.1 beamer template

      -

      The beamer class creates slides presentations. + +

      The beamer class creates presentation slides. It has a vast +array of features, but here is a basic template:

      \documentclass{beamer}
       
      @@ -10051,15 +10315,45 @@ Next: ,
       http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/.
       

      +
      + + + +

      A.2 book template

      + +
      \documentclass{book}
      +\title{Book Class Template}
      +\author{Alex Author}
      +
      +\begin{document}
      +\maketitle
      +
      +\chapter{First}
      +Some text.
      +
      +\chapter{Second}
      +Some other text.
      +
      +\section{A subtopic}
      +The end.
      +\end{document}
      +
      +

      A.3 tugboat template

      + + +

      TUGboat is the journal of the TeX Users Group, http://tug.org/TUGboat.

      @@ -10093,8 +10387,8 @@ This is an example article for \TUB{}. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the -hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the +\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output. Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: @@ -10225,6 +10519,7 @@ Next: , Previ accessing any character of a fontReserved characters acute accentAccents acute accent, mathMath accents +additional packages, loadingDocument class options ae ligatureNon-English characters align environment, from amsmatheqnarray aligning equationseqnarray @@ -10240,9 +10535,10 @@ Next: , Previ ASCII tilde, in textText symbols asterisk, centered, in textText symbols author, for titlepage\maketitle -auxiliary fileOverview +auxiliary fileOutput files
      B +babel packageAccents backslash, in textText symbols bar, double vertical, in textText symbols bar, vertical, in textText symbols @@ -10250,6 +10546,8 @@ Next: , Previ bar-over accent, mathMath accents bar-under accentAccents basics of LaTeXOverview +beamer template and classbeamer template +bibliography format, openDocument class options bibliography, creating (automatically)Using BibTeX bibliography, creating (manually)thebibliography bibTeX, usingUsing BibTeX @@ -10274,10 +10572,10 @@ Next: , Previ calligraphic letters for mathFont styles cap heightText symbols caron accentAccents -case sensitivity of LaTeXOverview cc list, in letters\cc cedilla accentAccents centered asterisk, in textText symbols +centered equationsDocument class options centered period, in textText symbols centering text, declaration for\centering centering text, environment forcenter @@ -10297,9 +10595,11 @@ Next: , Previ closing quoteText symbols code, typesettingverbatim command lineCommand line +command syntaxLaTeX command syntax commands, defining new ones\newcommand & \renewcommand composite word mark, in textText symbols computer programs, typesettingverbatim +contents fileOutput files copyright symbolText symbols counters, a list ofCounters counters, defining new\newcounter @@ -10310,6 +10610,7 @@ Next: , Previ creating tablestable credit footnote\maketitle cross referencesCross references +cross references, resolvingOutput files cross referencing with page number\pageref cross referencing, symbolic\ref currency, dollarText symbols @@ -10332,6 +10633,7 @@ Next: , Previ displaying quoted text with paragraph indentationquotation displaying quoted text without paragraph indentationquote document class optionsDocument class options +document class, definedStarting and ending document classesDocument classes document templatesDocument templates dollar signText symbols @@ -10357,6 +10659,7 @@ Next: , Previ
      E e-dashText symbols +e-TeXTeX engines ellipsisText symbols em-dashText symbols em-dash, three-quartersText symbols @@ -10364,14 +10667,17 @@ Next: , Previ emphasisFont styles emphasisFont styles enclosure list\encl -ending & startingStarting & ending +ending & startingStarting and ending +engines, TeXTeX engines enlarge current page\enlargethispage environmentsEnvironments environments, defining\newenvironment & \renewenvironment equation number, cross referencing\ref +equation numbers, left vs. rightDocument class options equation numbers, omittingeqnarray equations, aligningeqnarray equations, environment forequation +equations, flush left vs. centeredDocument class options es-zet German letterNon-English characters eth, Icelandic letterNon-English characters euro symbolText symbols @@ -10386,7 +10692,7 @@ Next: , Previ figures, insertingfigure fixed-width fontFont styles float packagefigure -float packagefigure +flush left equationsDocument class options flushing floats and starting a page\clearpage font commands, low-levelLow-level font commands font sizesFont sizes @@ -10402,6 +10708,7 @@ Next: , Previ footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedSymbolic footnotes formulas, environment forequation formulas, mathMath formulas +forward references, resolvingOutput files fragile commands\protect French quotation marksText symbols functions, mathMath functions @@ -10410,6 +10717,8 @@ Next: , Previ global optionsDocument class options global optionsDocument class options glossariesGlossaries +glossary packageGlossaries +graphics packages\line grave accentAccents grave accent, mathMath accents greater than symbol, in textText symbols @@ -10422,6 +10731,7 @@ Next: , Previ hat accent, mathMath accents header style\pagestyle header, parameters forPage layout parameters +hello, worldStarting and ending here, putting floatsfigure hungarian umlaut accentAccents hyphenation, defining\hyphenation @@ -10432,15 +10742,20 @@ Next: , Previ Icelandic ethNon-English characters Icelandic thornNon-English characters ij letter, DutchNon-English characters +implementations of TeXTeX engines in-line formulasmath indent, forcing\indent indent, suppressing\noindent indentation of paragraphs, in minipageminipage +index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’Indexes indexesIndexes +infinite horizontal stretch\hfill +infinite vertical stretch\vfill initial commandfilecontents input fileSplitting the input input/outputTerminal input/output inserting figuresfigure +italic correction\/ italic fontFont styles
      J @@ -10448,14 +10763,18 @@ Next: , Previ justification, ragged right\raggedright
      K -Knuth, Donald E.About this document +Knuth, Donald E.Overview
      L labelled lists, creatingdescription -Lamport, LeslieAbout this document +Lamport TeXOverview +Lamport, LeslieOverview +landscape orientationDocument class options LaTeX logoText symbols LaTeX overviewOverview LaTeX Project teamAbout this document +LaTeX vs. LaTeX2eAbout this document +LaTeX2e logoText symbols layout commandsLayout layout, page parameters forPage layout parameters left angle quotation marksText symbols @@ -10464,6 +10783,7 @@ Next: , Previ left quoteText symbols left quote, doubleText symbols left quote, singleText symbols +left-hand equation numbersDocument class options left-justifying text\raggedright left-justifying text, environment forflushleft left-to-right modeModes @@ -10487,19 +10807,24 @@ Next: , Previ lining text up in tablestabular lining text up using tab stopstabbing list items, specifying counter\usecounter +list of figures fileOutput files +list of tables fileOutput files lists of itemsitemize lists of items, genericlist lists of items, numberedenumerate loading additional packagesDocument class options -log fileOverview +log fileOutput files logo, LaTeXText symbols +logo, LaTeX2eText symbols logo, TeXText symbols low-9 quotation marks, single and doubleText symbols low-level font commandsLow-level font commands -lR modeModes -LuaTeXOverview +LR modeModes +ltugboat classtugboat template +LuaTeXTeX engines
      M +macro package, LaTeX asOverview macron accentAccents macron accent, mathMath accents Madsen, Larseqnarray @@ -10523,6 +10848,7 @@ Next: , Previ monospace fontFont styles moving arguments\protect multicolumn text\twocolumn +multilingual supportAccents multind packageIndexes multiplication symbol, discretionary line breakMath miscellany
      @@ -10546,6 +10872,7 @@ Next: , Previ old-style numeralsFont styles one-column output\onecolumn opening quoteText symbols +OpenType fontsTeX engines options, document classDocument class options options, globalDocument class options ordinals, feminine and masculineText symbols @@ -10555,7 +10882,7 @@ Next: , Previ overview of LaTeXOverview
      P -packages, loadingDocument class options +packages, loading additionalDocument class options page break, forcing\pagebreak & \nopagebreak page break, preventing\pagebreak & \nopagebreak page breakingPage breaking @@ -10571,21 +10898,25 @@ Next: , Previ paragraphsMaking paragraphs parameters, for footnotesFootnote parameters parameters, page layoutPage layout parameters -pdfTeXOverview +pdfTeXOutput files +pdfTeX engineTeX engines period, centered, in textText symbols +pict2e package\line pictures, creatingpicture pilcrowText symbols placement of floatsfigure poetry, an environment forverse polish lNon-English characters +portrait orientationDocument class options postscript, in letters\ps pounds symbolText symbols -preamble, definedStarting & ending +preamble, definedStarting and ending predefined lengthsPredefined lengths prompt, ‘*Command line +pronunciationOverview
      Q -questionation point, upside-downText symbols +question mark, upside-downText symbols quotation marks, FrenchText symbols quote, straight baseText symbols quoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingquotation @@ -10597,6 +10928,7 @@ Next: , Previ ragged right text\raggedright ragged right text, environment forflushleft redefining environments\newenvironment & \renewenvironment +references, resolving forwardOutput files registered symbolText symbols remarks in the marginMarginal notes reporting bugsAbout this document @@ -10607,6 +10939,7 @@ Next: , Previ right quoteText symbols right quote, doubleText symbols right quote, singleText symbols +right-hand equation numbersDocument class options right-justifying text\raggedleft right-justifying text, environment forflushright ring accentAccents @@ -10643,13 +10976,15 @@ Next: , Previ special charactersNon-English characters specifier, float placementfigure splitting the input fileSplitting the input -starting & endingStarting & ending +starting & endingStarting and ending starting a new page\newpage starting a new page and clearing floats\clearpage starting on a right-hand page\cleardoublepage sterling symbolText symbols straight double quote, baseText symbols straight quote, baseText symbols +stretch, infinite horizontal\hfill +stretch, infinite vertical\vfill stretch, omitting vertical\raggedbottom styles of textFont styles styles, pagePage styles @@ -10660,6 +10995,7 @@ Next: , Previ T tab stops, usingtabbing table of contents entry, manually adding\addcontentsline +table of contents fileOutput files table of contents, creatingTables of contents tables, creatingtable terminal input/outputTerminal input/output @@ -10675,11 +11011,14 @@ Next: , Previ tilde accentAccents tilde accent, mathMath accents tilde, ASCII, in textText symbols +title page, separate or run-inDocument class options title pages, creatingtitlepage title, for titlepage\maketitle titles, making\maketitle trademark symbolText symbols -transcript fileOverview +transcript fileOutput files +TrueType fontsTeX engines +TUGboat templatetugboat template two-column output\twocolumn two-thirds em-dashText symbols typed text, simulatingverbatim @@ -10693,8 +11032,11 @@ Next: , Previ umlaut accentAccents underbarAccents underscore, in textText symbols +Unicode input, nativeTeX engines +unofficial nature of this manualAbout this document unordered listsitemize using BibTeXUsing BibTeX +UTF-8TeX engines
      V variables, a list ofCounters @@ -10714,7 +11056,7 @@ Next: , Previ writing external filesfilecontents
      X -XeTeXOverview +XeTeXTeX engines xindy programIndexes
      @@ -10786,21 +11128,23 @@ Previous: , U - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + - - + + - - + + @@ -10890,7 +11247,7 @@ Previous: , U - + @@ -10960,7 +11317,6 @@ Previous: , U - @@ -11032,8 +11388,8 @@ Previous: , U - - + + @@ -11186,6 +11542,7 @@ Previous: , U + @@ -11234,7 +11591,7 @@ Previous: , U - + @@ -11256,6 +11613,7 @@ Previous: , U + @@ -11290,6 +11648,8 @@ Previous: , U + + @@ -11390,7 +11750,7 @@ Previous: , U - + @@ -11545,11 +11905,9 @@ Previous: , U - - @@ -11609,9 +11967,9 @@ Previous: , U - - - + + + @@ -11622,7 +11980,7 @@ Previous: , U - + @@ -11635,14 +11993,14 @@ Previous: , U - + - + - - + + @@ -11654,39 +12012,51 @@ Previous: , U + + + + + + + + + + + - + + @@ -11696,7 +12066,8 @@ Previous: , U - + + @@ -11714,7 +12085,7 @@ Previous: , U - + @@ -11738,34 +12109,42 @@ Previous: , U + + + + + - + +
      Jump to:   $   -. +- +   +.   -1 +1   -@ +@   -[ +[   -\ +\   -^ +^   -_ +_   -{ +{  
      A @@ -10815,6 +11159,8 @@ Previous: , U   F   +H +   I   L @@ -10835,6 +11181,8 @@ Previous: , U   T   +U +   V   X @@ -10846,26 +11194,35 @@ Previous: , U
      $
      $: Math formulas

      .
      .aux file: Overview
      .dvi file: Overview
      .log file: Overview
      .pdf file: Overview
      .toc file: Tables of contents
      -
      --help command-line option: Command line

      .
      .aux file: Output files
      .dvi file: Output files
      .lof file: Output files
      .lof file: Tables of contents
      .log file: Output files
      .lot file: Output files
      .lot file: Tables of contents
      .pdf file: Output files
      .tex, default extension: Command line
      .toc file: Output files
      .toc file: Tables of contents

      1
      1
      10pt option: Document class options
      11pt option: Document class options
      12pt option: Document class options

      @
      @
      @{...}: array

      [
      [...] for optional arguments: Overview
      [
      [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax

      \
      \ character starting commands: Overview
      \
      \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax
      \" (umlaut accent): Accents
      \#: Reserved characters
      \$: Reserved characters
      \>: tabbing
      \>: Spacing in math mode
      \> (tabbing): tabbing
      \@: \AT
      \@: \@
      \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes
      \a (tabbing): tabbing
      \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing
      \boldmath: Math formulas
      \bot: Math symbols
      \bottomfraction: figure
      \bottomnumber: figure
      \bowtie: Math symbols
      \Box: Math symbols
      \breve: Math accents
      \delta: Math symbols
      \depth: Predefined lengths
      \det: Math functions
      \dh (æ): Non-English characters
      \DH (Æ): Non-English characters
      \dh (ð): Non-English characters
      \DH (Ð): Non-English characters
      \Diamond: Math symbols
      \diamond: Math symbols
      \diamondsuit: Math symbols
      \Large: Font sizes
      \LARGE: Font sizes
      \LaTeX: Text symbols
      \LaTeXe: Text symbols
      \lbrace: Math symbols
      \lbrack: Math symbols
      \lceil: Math symbols
      \lor: Math symbols
      \lq: Text symbols
      \makebox: \makebox
      \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture)
      \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture)
      \makeglossary: Glossaries
      \makeindex: Indexes
      \makelabels: \makelabels
      \mathversion: Font styles
      \max: Math functions
      \mbox: \mbox
      \mbox, and LR mode: Modes
      \mdseries: Font styles
      \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
      \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
      \NG: Non-English characters
      \ni: Math symbols
      \nocite: \nocite
      \nocorr: Font styles
      \nocorrlist: Font styles
      \nofiles: Tables of contents
      \noindent: \noindent
      \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
      \rm: Font styles
      \rmfamily: Font styles
      \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
      \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
      \Roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
      \rq: Text symbols
      \rule: \rule
      \S: Text symbols
      \top: Math symbols
      \topfraction: figure
      \topmargin: Page layout parameters
      \topnumber: figure
      \topsep: itemize
      \topskip: Page layout parameters
      \totalheight: Predefined lengths
      \totalnumber: figure
      \triangle: Math symbols
      \triangleleft: Math symbols
      \triangleright: Math symbols
      \year: \day \month \year
      \zeta: Math symbols
      \[: Math formulas
      \\ (for array): array
      \\ (for center): center
      \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray
      \\ (for array): array
      \\ (for center): center
      \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray
      \\ (for flushright): flushright
      \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack
      \\ (tabbing): tabbing
      \\ for \author: \maketitle
      \\ for \title: \maketitle
      \\ force line break: \\
      \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray
      \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray
      \]: Math formulas
      \^: Reserved characters
      \^ (circumflex accent): Accents
      \~: Reserved characters
      \~ (tilde accent): Accents

      ^
      ^
      ^: Subscripts & superscripts

      _
      _
      _: Subscripts & superscripts

      {
      {...} for required arguments: Overview
      {
      {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax

      A
      a4paper option: Document class options
      B
      b5paper option: Document class options
      book class: Document classes
      bottomnumber: figure

      C
      center environment: center
      clock option to slides class: Document class options

      D
      dbltopnumber: figure
      description environment: description
      displaymath environment: displaymath
      displaymath environment: Math formulas
      document environment: document
      draft option: Document class options
      dvipdfmx command: Output files
      dvips command: Output files
      dvitype command: Output files

      E
      enumerate environment: enumerate
      eqnarray environment: eqnarray
      equation environment: equation
      equation environment: Math formulas
      etex command: TeX engines
      executivepaper option: Document class options

      F
      figure: figure
      filecontents: filecontents
      final option: Document class options
      first-latex-doc document: About this document
      fleqn option: Document class options
      flushleft environment: flushleft
      flushright environment: flushright

      H
      http://home.gna.org/latexrefman home page: About this document

      I
      indexspace: Indexes
      itemize environment: itemize

      L
      landscape option: Document class options
      latex command: Overview
      latex command: Output files
      latex-doc-ptr document: About this document
      latexrefman-discuss@gna.org email address: About this document
      legalpaper option: Document class options
      leqno option: Document class options
      list: list
      lR box: picture
      lrbox: lrbox
      lualatex command: Overview
      lshort document: About this document
      lualatex command: TeX engines

      M
      math environment: math
      openright option: Document class options

      P
      pdflatex command: Overview
      pdflatex command: Output files
      picture: picture
      printindex: Indexes

      theorem environment: theorem
      titlepage environment: titlepage
      titlepage option: Document class options
      topnumber: figure
      totalnumber: figure
      twocolumn option: Document class options
      twoside option: Document class options

      U
      usrguide official documentation: About this document

      V
      verbatim environment: verbatim
      verse environment: verse

      X
      xelatex command: Overview
      xdvi command: Output files
      xelatex command: TeX engines

      Jump to:   $   -. +-   -1 +.   -@ +1   -[ +@   -\ +[   -^ +\   -_ +^   -{ +_ +   +{  
      A @@ -11780,6 +12159,8 @@ Previous: , U   F   +H +   I   L @@ -11800,6 +12181,8 @@ Previous: , U   T   +U +   V   X diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf index f4049cca11c..c197c59c6ee 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi index bac9e0992a2..7ce2d93da39 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi @@ -1,27 +1,28 @@ \input texinfo -@c $Id: latex2e.texi 282 2014-05-19 16:31:57Z karl $ +@c $Id: latex2e.texi 333 2015-05-12 17:12:37Z karl $ @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) @setfilename latex2e.info -@set UPDATED May 2014 -@settitle @LaTeX{}2e reference manual (@value{UPDATED}) +@set UPDATED May 2015 +@settitle @LaTeX{}2e unofficial reference manual (@value{UPDATED}) @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) @c latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, @c xx but latex2e stuff is missing. +@c xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file @c -@c xx mention \nocorr, \textit and ic -@c xx give actual smallskip/etc. defaults +@c xx ending a run with errors +@c xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX +@c xx classes and packages -- required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts @c -@c xx merge http://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/latex-info/ (alt-latex-info) +@c xx merge http://mirror.ctan.org/info/latex-info/ (alt-latex-info) +@c xx merge http://mirror.ctan.org/latex2e-reference.tar.gz @c xx merge permuted-index @c xx merge latex-manual from savannah @c @c xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel @c xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. @c xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands. -@c xx See also http://www.ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. -@c -@c xx packages -- required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts +@c xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. @copying This document is an unofficial reference manual for @LaTeX{}, a @@ -34,13 +35,13 @@ George@tie{}D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The @LaTeX{}2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using @cite{Hypertext Help with @LaTeX{}}, by Sheldon Green, and -@cite{@LaTeX{} Command Summary} (for @LaTeX{} 2.09) by L.@tie{}Botway -and C.@tie{}Biemesderfer (published by the @TeX{} Users Group as -@cite{@TeX{}niques} number 10), as reference material (no text was -directly copied). +@cite{@LaTeX{} Command Summary} (for @LaTeX{}@tie{}2.09) by +L.@tie{}Botway and C.@tie{}Biemesderfer (published by the @TeX{} Users +Group as @cite{@TeX{}niques} number 10), as reference material (no +text was directly copied). Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, -2014 Karl Berry.@* +2014, 2015 Karl Berry.@* Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.@* Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. @@ -74,7 +75,7 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. @end tex @titlepage -@title @LaTeX{}: An unofficial reference manual +@title @LaTeX{}2e: An unofficial reference manual @subtitle @value{UPDATED} @author @url{http://home.gna.org/latexrefman} @page @@ -86,17 +87,14 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. @contents @node Top -@top @LaTeX{}2e +@top @LaTeX{}2e: An unofficial reference manual -This document is an unofficial reference manual for @LaTeX{}, a -document preparation system, version as of @value{UPDATED}. It is -intended to cover @LaTeX{}2e, which has been the standard version of -@LaTeX{} for many years. +This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of +@value{UPDATED}) for @LaTeX{}2e, a document preparation system. @menu * About this document:: Bug reporting, etc. * Overview:: What is @LaTeX{}? -* Starting & ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document. * Document classes:: Some of the various classes available. * Fonts:: Italic, bold, typewriter, etc. * Layout:: Controlling the page layout. @@ -106,7 +104,7 @@ intended to cover @LaTeX{}2e, which has been the standard version of * Line breaking:: Influencing line breaks. * Page breaking:: Influencing page breaks. * Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes. -* Definitions:: Define your own commands etc. +* Definitions:: Define your own commands, etc. * Counters:: Internal counters used by @LaTeX{}. * Lengths:: The length commands. * Making paragraphs:: Paragraph commands. @@ -118,7 +116,7 @@ intended to cover @LaTeX{}2e, which has been the standard version of * Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters. * Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting. * Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes. -* Letters:: The letter class. +* Letters:: The @code{letter} class. * Terminal input/output:: User interaction. * Command line:: System-independent command-line behavior. * Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes. @@ -130,159 +128,315 @@ intended to cover @LaTeX{}2e, which has been the standard version of @node About this document @chapter About this document -@cindex Knuth, Donald E. -@cindex Lamport, Leslie -@cindex @LaTeX{} Project team -The @LaTeX{} document preparation system is implemented as a macro -package for Donald@tie{}E. Knuth's @TeX{} typesetting program. -@LaTeX{} was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now -maintained by a group of volunteers (@url{http://latex-project.org}). -The official documentation written by the @LaTeX{} project is -available from their web site. - @cindex bug reporting @cindex reporting bugs -@findex @email{latexrefman-discuss@@gna.org} @r{email address} -The present document is completely unofficial and has not been -reviewed by the @LaTeX{} maintainers. Do not send bug reports or -anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all -comments to @email{latexrefman-discuss@@gna.org}. - -The home page for this document is +@findex @url{http://home.gna.org/latexrefman} @r{home page} +This is an unofficial reference manual for the @LaTeX{}2e document +preparation system, which is a macro package for the @TeX{} +typesetting program (@pxref{Overview}). This document's home page is @url{http://home.gna.org/latexrefman}. That page has links to the -current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other -infrastructure. +current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and +subscriptions, and other infrastructure. + +@cindex @LaTeX{} vs.@: @LaTeX{}2e +In this document, we will mostly just use `@LaTeX{}' rather than +`@LaTeX{}2e', since the previous version of @LaTeX{}@tie{}(2.09) was +retired many years ago. -Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about -@LaTeX{}. Here are a few: +@cindex unofficial nature of this manual +@cindex @LaTeX{} Project team +@findex @email{latexrefman-discuss@@gna.org} @r{email address} +@LaTeX{} is currently maintained by a group of volunteers +(@url{http://latex-project.org}). The official documentation written by +the @LaTeX{} project is available from their web site. This document is +completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the @LaTeX{} +maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this +document to them. Instead, please send all comments to +@email{latexrefman-discuss@@gna.org}. + +This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources +of information about @LaTeX{}, at all levels. Here are a few +introductions. @table @url -@item http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr +@item http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr +@findex latex-doc-ptr @r{document} Two pages of recommended references to @LaTeX{} documentation. -@item http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc +@item http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc +@findex first-latex-doc @r{document} Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. -@item http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide -The guide for document authors maintained as part of @LaTeX{}; there -are several others. +@item http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide +@findex usrguide @r{official documentation} +The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of @LaTeX{}; +there are plenty of others available elsewhere. + +@item http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort +@findex lshort @r{document} +A short introduction to @LaTeX{}, translated to many languages. @item http://tug.org/begin.html -Introduction to the @TeX{} system, including @LaTeX{}. +Introduction to the @TeX{} system, including @LaTeX{}, with further +references. + @end table @node Overview @chapter Overview of @LaTeX{} -What is @LaTeX{}? - @cindex overview of @LaTeX{} @cindex basics of @LaTeX{} +@cindex Knuth, Donald E. +@cindex Lamport, Leslie @cindex @LaTeX{} overview -@LaTeX{} typesets a file of text using the @TeX{} program and the -@LaTeX{} ``macro package'' for @TeX{}. That is, it processes an input -file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that -describe how the text should be formatted. @LaTeX{} files are plain -text that can be written in any reasonable editor. It produces at -least three files as output: -@enumerate -@item -The main output file, which is one of: +@LaTeX{} is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally +created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers +(@url{http://latex-project.org}). It is widely used, particularly for +complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics. + +@cindex macro package, @LaTeX{} as +A @LaTeX{} user writes an input file containing text along with +interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text +should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands +that interface with Donald@tie{}E. Knuth's @TeX{} typesetting program +(the technical term is that @LaTeX{} is a @dfn{macro package} for the +@TeX{} engine). The user produces the output document by giving that +file to the @TeX{} engine. + +The term @LaTeX{} is also sometimes used to mean the language in which +the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands +available to a @LaTeX{} user. + +@cindex Lamport @TeX{} +@cindex pronunciation +The name @LaTeX{} is short for ``Lamport @TeX{}''. It is pronounced +LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, +produce the logo with @code{\LaTeX}. Where use of the logo is not +sensible, such as in plain text, write it as @samp{LaTeX}. + +@menu +* Starting and ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document. +* Output files:: Files produced. +* @TeX{} engines:: Programs that implementation @LaTeX{}. +* @LaTeX{} command syntax:: General syntax of @LaTeX{} commands. +@end menu + + +@node Starting and ending +@section Starting and ending + +@anchor{Starting & ending}@c old name +@cindex starting & ending +@cindex ending & starting +@cindex hello, world + +@LaTeX{} files have a simple global structure, with a standard +starting and ending. Here is a ``hello, world'' example: + +@example +\documentclass@{article@} +\begin@{document@} +Hello, \LaTeX\ world. +\end@{document@} +@end example + +@cindex document class, defined +@noindent +Here, the @samp{article} is the so-called @dfn{document class}, +implemented in a file @file{article.cls}. Any document class can be +used. A few document classes are defined by @LaTeX{} itself, and vast +array of others are widely available. @xref{Document classes}. + +@cindex preamble, defined +You can include other @LaTeX{} commands between the +@code{\documentclass} and the @code{\begin@{document@}} commands. +This area is called the @dfn{preamble}. + +The @code{\begin@{document@} ... \end@{document@}} is a so-called +@dfn{environment}; the @samp{document} environment (and no others) is +required in all @LaTeX{} documents. @LaTeX{} provides many +environments itself, and many more are defined separately. +@xref{Environments}. + +The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from +a @LaTeX{} input file. + + +@node Output files +@section Output files + +@LaTeX{} produces a main output file and at least two accessory files. +The main output file's name ends in either @file{.dvi} or @file{.pdf}. @table @code @item .dvi @findex .dvi @r{file} @findex latex @r{command} -If invoked as @command{latex}, a ``Device Independent'' (@file{.dvi}) -file is produced. This contains commands that can be translated into -commands for virtually any output device. You can view such -@file{.dvi} output of @LaTeX{} by using a program such as -@command{xdvi} (display directly), @command{dvips} (convert to -PostScript), or @command{dvipdfmx} (convert to PDF). +@findex xdvi @r{command} +@findex dvips @r{command} +@findex dvipdfmx @r{command} +@findex dvitype @r{command} +If @LaTeX{} is invoked with the system command @command{latex} then it +produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension @file{.dvi}. You +can view this file with a command such as @command{xdvi}, or convert +it to a PostScript @code{.ps} file with @command{dvips} or to a +Portable Document Format @code{.pdf} file with @command{dvipdfmx}. +The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with +@command{dvitype}. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are +available (@url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware}). @item .pdf @findex .pdf @r{file} @cindex pdf@TeX{} @findex pdflatex @r{command} -If invoked as @command{pdflatex}, a ``Portable Document Format'' -(@file{.pdf}) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with -all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does -make the output much larger than the @file{.dvi} produced from the -same document. - -@findex lualatex @r{command} -@cindex Lua@TeX{} -If invoked as @command{lualatex}, a @file{.pdf} file is created using -the Lua@TeX{} engine (@url{http://luatex.org}). - -@findex xelatex @r{command} -@cindex Xe@TeX{} -If invoked as @command{xelatex}, a @file{.pdf} file is created using -the Xe@TeX{} engine (@url{http://tug.org/xetex}). +If @LaTeX{} is invoked via the system command @command{pdflatex}, +among other commands (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}), then the main output is +a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a +self-contained file, with all fonts and images included. @end table -Many other less-common variants of @LaTeX{} (and @TeX{}) exist, which -can produce HTML, XML, and other things. +@LaTeX{} also produces at least two additional files. -@item +@table @code +@item .log @cindex transcript file @cindex log file @findex .log @r{file} -The ``transcript'' or @file{.log} file that contains summary -information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the -input file. +This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of +loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps +additional information for any errors. -@item +@item .aux @cindex auxiliary file @findex .aux @r{file} -An ``auxiliary'' or @file{.aux} file. This is used by @LaTeX{} itself, -for things such as cross-references. -@end enumerate +@cindex cross references, resolving +@cindex forward references, resolving +@cindex references, resolving forward +Auxiliary information is used by @LaTeX{} for things such as +cross references. For example, the first time that @LaTeX{} finds a +forward reference---a cross reference to something that has not yet +appeared in the source---it will appear in the output as a doubled +question mark @code{??}. When the referred-to spot does eventually +appear in the source then @LaTeX{} writes its location information to +this @code{.aux} file. On the next invocation, @LaTeX{} reads the +location information from this file and uses it to resolve the +reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered +location. -An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won't try to -list them all. Xxx components? +@end table -@findex \ @r{character starting commands} -@findex [...] @r{for optional arguments} -@findex @{...@} @r{for required arguments} -In the @LaTeX{} input file, a command name starts with a @code{\}, -followed by either (a)@tie{}a string of letters or (b)@tie{}a single -non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, @code{[]}, are -optional while arguments contained in braces, @code{@{@}}, are -required. +@findex .lof @r{file} +@cindex list of figures file +@findex .lot @r{file} +@cindex list of tables file +@findex .toc @r{file} +@cindex table of contents file +@cindex contents file +@LaTeX{} may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename +ending. These include a @code{.lof} file that is used to make a list +of figures, a @code{.lot} file used to make a list of tables, and a +@code{.toc} file used to make a table of contents. A particular class +may create others; the list is open-ended. -@cindex case sensitivity of @LaTeX{} -@LaTeX{} is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless -explicitly directed to do otherwise. +@node @TeX{} engines +@section @TeX{} engines -@node Starting & ending -@chapter Starting & ending +@cindex engines, @TeX{} +@cindex implementations of @TeX{} +@cindex UTF-8 +@cindex Unicode input, native +@cindex TrueType fonts +@cindex OpenType fonts -@cindex starting & ending -@cindex ending & starting +@LaTeX{} is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a @TeX{} +implementation (@pxref{Overview}). This section gives a terse +overview of the main programs. -A minimal input file looks like the following: +@table @code +@item latex +@itemx pdflatex +@cindex pdf@TeX{} engine +@findex etex @r{command} +@cindex e-@TeX{} +In @TeX{} Live (@url{http://tug.org/texlive}, if @LaTeX{} is invoked +via either the system command @command{latex} or @command{pdflatex}, +then the pdf@TeX{} engine is run (@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex}). +When invoked as @command{latex}, the main output is a @file{.dvi} +file; as @command{pdflatex}, the main output is a @file{.pdf} file. + +pdf@TeX{} incorporates the e-@TeX{} extensions to Knuth's original +program (@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/etex}), including additional +programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of +extensions of its own. e-@TeX{} is available on its own as the +command @command{etex}, but this is plain @TeX{} (and produces +@file{.dvi}). + +In other @TeX{} distributions, @command{latex} may invoke e-@TeX{} +rather than pdf@TeX{}. In any case, the e-@TeX{} extensions can be +assumed to be available in @LaTeX{}. + +@item lualatex +@findex lualatex @r{command} +@cindex Lua@TeX{} +If @LaTeX{} is invoked via the system command @command{lualatex}, the +Lua@TeX{} engine is run (@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex}). This +program allows code written in the scripting language Lua +(@url{http://luatex.org}) to interact with @TeX{}'s typesetting. +Lua@TeX{} handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType +and TrueType fonts, and produces a @file{.pdf} file by default. +There is also @command{dvilualatex} to produce a @file{.dvi} file, +but this is rarely used. + +@item xelatex +@findex xelatex @r{command} +@cindex Xe@TeX{} +If @LaTeX{} is invoked with the system command @command{xelatex}, the +Xe@TeX{} engine is run (@url{http://tug.org/xetex}). Like Lua@TeX{}, +Xe@TeX{} also natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and +OpenType fonts, though the implementation is completely different, +mainly using external libraries instead of internal code. Xe@TeX{} +produces a @file{.pdf} file as output; it does not support DVI output. -@example -\documentclass@{@var{class}@} -\begin@{document@} -@var{your text} -\end@{document@} -@end example +@end table -@noindent -where the @var{class} is a valid document class for @LaTeX{}. -@xref{Document classes}, for details of the various document classes -available locally. +Other variants of @LaTeX{} and @TeX{} exist, e.g., to provide +additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p@TeX{}, +@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex}, @url{http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex}). -@cindex preamble, defined -You may include other @LaTeX{} commands between the @code{\documentclass} -and the @code{\begin@{document@}} commands (this area is called the -@dfn{preamble}). + +@node @LaTeX{} command syntax +@section @LaTeX{} command syntax + +@cindex command syntax +@findex \ @r{character starting commands} +@findex [...] @r{for optional arguments} +@findex @{...@} @r{for required arguments} +In the @LaTeX{} input file, a command name starts with a @code{\}; the +name itself then consists of either (a)@tie{}a string of letters or +(b)@tie{}a single non-letter. + +A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments, either +required or optional. Required arguments are contained in curly +braces, @code{@{...@}}. Optional arguments are contained in square +brackets, @code{[...]}. Generally, but not universally, if the +command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any +required arguments. + +Some commands have a @code{*} form that is related to the form without +a @code{*}, such as @code{\chapter} and @code{\chapter*}. + +@LaTeX{} commands are case sensitive; neither @code{\Begin@{document@}} +nor @code{\begin@{Document@}} will work. Most commands are lowercase, +but in any event you must enter all commands in the same case as they +are defined. + +This manual describes all accepted options and @code{*}-forms for the +commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a.@: bugs). @node Document classes @@ -292,31 +446,43 @@ and the @code{\begin@{document@}} commands (this area is called the @cindex classes of documents @findex \documentclass -The class of a given document is defined with the command: +The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is +normally the first command in a @LaTeX{} source file. @example \documentclass[@var{options}]@{@var{class}@} @end example -@noindent -The @code{\documentclass} command must be the first command in a -@LaTeX{} source file. - @findex article @r{class} @findex report @r{class} @findex book @r{class} @findex letter @r{class} @findex slides @r{class} -Built-in @LaTeX{} document @var{class} names are (many other document -classes are available as add-ons; @pxref{Overview}): +The following document @var{class} names are built into @LaTeX{}. +(Many other document classes are available as separate packages; +@pxref{Overview}.) -@example -article report book letter slides -@end example +@table @code +@item article +For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use. + +@item book +Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front +matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix +(@pxref{Front/back matter}). + +@item report +For documents of length between an @code{article} and a @code{book}, +such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters. -@c xx briefly describe each one +@item slides +For slide presentations---rarely used today. In its place the +@code{beamer} package is perhaps the most prevalent (@pxref{beamer +template}). + +@end table -Standard @var{options} are described below. +Standard @var{options} are described in the next section. @menu * Document class options:: Global options. @@ -331,10 +497,9 @@ Standard @var{options} are described below. @cindex class options @cindex global options -You can specify so-called @dfn{global options} or @dfn{class options} -to the @code{\documentclass} command by enclosing them in square -brackets as usual. To specify more than one @var{option}, separate -them with a comma: +You can specify so-called @dfn{global options} or @dfn{class options} to +the @code{\documentclass} command by enclosing them in square brackets. +To specify more than one @var{option}, separate them with a comma, as in: @example \documentclass[@var{option1},@var{option2},...]@{@var{class}@} @@ -376,22 +541,40 @@ a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper Miscellaneous other options: @table @code -@item draft, final +@item draft +@itemx final @cindex black boxes, omitting -mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is @code{final}. +Mark (@code{draft}) or do not mark (@code{final}) overfull boxes with a +black box in the margin; default is @code{final}. + @item fleqn +@cindex flush left equations +@cindex centered equations +@cindex equations, flush left vs.@: centered Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. + @item landscape +@cindex landscape orientation +@cindex portrait orientation Selects landscape format; default is portrait. + @item leqno +@cindex left-hand equation numbers +@cindex right-hand equation numbers +@cindex equation numbers, left vs.@: right Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. + @item openbib +@cindex bibliography format, open Use ``open'' bibliography format. -@item titlepage, notitlepage + +@item titlepage +@itemx notitlepage +@cindex title page, separate or run-in Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. @end table -These options are not available with the slides class: +The following options are not available with the @code{slides} class. @findex onecolumn @r{option} @findex twocolumn @r{option} @@ -409,28 +592,28 @@ Typeset in one or two columns; default is @code{onecolumn}. @findex \evensidemargin @findex \oddsidemargin Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is @code{oneside}, except -for the @code{book} class. +that in the @code{book} class the default is @code{twoside}. -The @code{\evensidemargin} (@code{\oddsidemargin} parameter determines -the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the -page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper -size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided -printing the text is centered, for two-sided, @code{\oddsidemargin} is -40% of the difference between @code{\paperwidth} and @code{\textwidth}, -with @code{\evensidemargin} the remainder. +For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided +printing, the @code{\evensidemargin} (@code{\oddsidemargin}) parameter +determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left +side of the page and the text's left margin, with @code{\oddsidemargin} +being 40% of the difference between @code{\paperwidth} and +@code{\textwidth}, and @code{\evensidemargin} is the remainder. @item openright @itemx openany -Determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page; default is @code{openright} for book. +Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is +@code{openright} for @code{book}, and @code{openany} for @code{report}. @end table +@findex clock @r{option to @code{slides} class} The @code{slides} class offers the option @code{clock} for printing the time at the bottom of each note. - -@cindex packages, loading @cindex loading additional packages +@cindex packages, loading additional +@cindex additional packages, loading @findex \usepackage Additional packages are loaded like this: @@ -438,8 +621,9 @@ Additional packages are loaded like this: \usepackage[@var{options}]@{@var{pkg}@} @end example -To specify more than one @var{pkg}, you can separate them with a -comma, or use multiple @code{\usepackage} commands. +To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma, +as in @code{\usepackage@{@var{pkg1},@var{pkg2},...@}}, or use multiple +@code{\usepackage} commands. @cindex global options @cindex options, global @@ -459,7 +643,7 @@ Two important aspects of selecting a @dfn{font} are specifying a size and a style. The @LaTeX{} commands for doing this are described here. @menu -* Font styles:: Select roman, italics etc. +* Font styles:: Select roman, italics, etc. * Font sizes:: Select point size. * Low-level font commands:: Select encoding, family, series, shape. @end menu @@ -481,13 +665,22 @@ arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, -are cumulative; e.g.,, you can say either @code{\sffamily\bfseries} or +are cumulative; e.g., you can say either @code{\sffamily\bfseries} or @code{\bfseries\sffamily} to get bold sans serif. You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for instance, @code{\begin@{ttfamily@}...\end@{ttfamily@}}. -These commands automatically supply an italic correction if needed. +@findex \nocorrlist +@findex \nocorr +These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections +if needed. (@xref{\/}, for the details of italic corrections.) +Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following +character is in the list @code{\nocorrlist}, which by default consists +of a period and a comma. To suppress the automatic insertion of +italic correction, use @code{\nocorr} at the start or end of the +command argument, such as @code{\textit@{\nocorr text@}} or +@code{\textsc@{text \nocorr@}}. @table @code @item \textrm (\rmfamily) @@ -600,8 +793,8 @@ FAQ entry: @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf}. @LaTeX{} also provides the following commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are @emph{not} cumulative. Also, they are used differently than the above commands: @code{@{\@var{cmd} -...@}} instead of @code{\@var{cmd}@{...@}}. These are two very -different things. +...@}} instead of @code{\@var{cmd}@{...@}}. These are two unrelated +constructs. @ftable @code @item \bf @@ -814,7 +1007,7 @@ Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. * \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout. * \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height. * \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height. -* Page layout parameters:: \headheight \footskip. +* Page layout parameters:: @code{\headheight} @code{\footskip}. @end menu @@ -984,7 +1177,7 @@ then divided by two. @item \topskip Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of -the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the +the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., @samp{10pt} at @samp{10pt}. @end ftable @@ -999,7 +1192,7 @@ Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: @ftable @code @item \part @item \chapter -(report and book class only) +(@code{report} and @code{book} class only) @item \section @item \subsection @item \subsubsection @@ -1094,7 +1287,8 @@ A @code{\label} command appearing in ordinary text assigns to inside a numbered environment assigns that number to @var{key}. A @var{key} name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are +distinguished, as usual. To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by @@ -1238,8 +1432,8 @@ Math arrays are produced with the @code{array} environment, normally within an @code{equation} environment (@pxref{equation}). It has a single mandatory @var{template} argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column @var{col} is -specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should -be formatted, as follows: +specified by a single letter that tells how items in each row of that +column should be formatted, as follows: @table @code @item c @@ -1250,7 +1444,7 @@ flush left flush right @end table -@findex \\ (for @code{array}) +@findex \\ @r{(for @code{array})} Column entries are separated by @code{&}. Column entries may include other @LaTeX{} commands. Each row of the array is terminated with @code{\\}. @@ -1294,7 +1488,7 @@ Synopsis: \end@{center@} @end example -@findex \\ (for @code{center}) +@findex \\ @r{(for @code{center})} The @code{center} environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the @@ -1402,7 +1596,7 @@ equation number, use the @code{equation} environment (@pxref{equation}). @findex document @r{environment} The @code{document} environment encloses the body of a document. -It is required in every @LaTeX{} document. @xref{Starting & ending}. +It is required in every @LaTeX{} document. @xref{Starting and ending}. @node enumerate @@ -1493,13 +1687,13 @@ Nevertheless, here is a description of @code{eqnarray}: \end@{eqnarray@} @end example -@findex \\ (for @code{eqnarray}) +@findex \\ @r{(for @code{eqnarray})} The @code{eqnarray} environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column +equations or inequalities. It is similar to a three-column @code{array} environment, with consecutive rows separated by @code{\\} and consecutive items within a row separated by an @code{&}. -@findex \\* (for @code{eqnarray}) +@findex \\* @r{(for @code{eqnarray})} @code{\\*} can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. @@ -1576,9 +1770,8 @@ output. To ameliorate this, use the @code{stfloats} or FAQ: @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat}. @item h -@cindex @code{float} package -(Here)---at the position in the text where the figure environment -appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; @code{t} is +(Here)---at the position in the text where the @code{figure} environment +appears. However, @code{t} is not allowed by itself; @code{t} is automatically added. @cindex here, putting floats @@ -1601,7 +1794,7 @@ see above. @end table -The standard report and article classes use the default placement +The standard @code{report} and @code{article} classes use the default placement @code{tbp}. The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, @LaTeX{} commands, @@ -1618,7 +1811,7 @@ non-float text: @ftable @code @findex \bottomfraction -The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at the bottom; default @samp{.3}. @item \floatpagefraction @@ -1652,18 +1845,22 @@ Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default @samp{20pt plus2pt minus4pt}. @end ftable -Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page: +Counters relating to the number of floats on a page: @ftable @code -@item \bottomnumber +@item bottomnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; default 1. -@item \topnumber +@item dbltopnumber +Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a +two-column page; default 2. + +@item topnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; default 2. -@item \totalnumber +@item totalnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. @end ftable @@ -1710,7 +1907,7 @@ You can use the @code{filecontents} environment at any point after the declaration @code{\usepackage@{filecontents@}}, not just before @code{\documentclass}. -@item +@item The @code{filecontents} package also provides a @code{filecontents*} environment which is used in the same way as the @code{filecontents} environment except that it won't insert any leading comment, so it is @@ -1723,9 +1920,9 @@ unrelated to using the created file. So you need to use, for instance, @code{\input} or @code{\usepackage} or @code{\bibliography} or whatever is applicable, to use the created file. -This environment is also useful to make a self-contained document, for -example, for a bug report, or to keep a @file{.bib} file with the main -document. +This environment is also useful to make a document in a self-contained +file, for example, for a bug report, or to keep the content of a +@file{.bib} file in the same file as the main document. @node flushleft @@ -2159,6 +2356,7 @@ The @code{picture} commands are described in the following sections. @subsection @code{\circle} @findex \circle +Synopsis: @example \circle[*]@{@var{diameter}@} @end example @@ -2167,21 +2365,24 @@ The @code{\circle} command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The @code{*}-form of the command draws a solid circle. -Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. +Circles up to 40@dmn{pt} can be drawn. @node \makebox (picture) @subsection @code{\makebox} -@findex \makebox (picture) +@findex \makebox @r{(for @code{picture})} -@code{\makebox(width,height)[position]@{...@}} +Synopsis: +@example +\makebox(@var{width},@var{height})[@var{position}]@{@var{text}@} +@end example The @code{\makebox} command for the picture environment is similar to the normal @code{\makebox} command except that you must specify a -@code{width} and @code{height} in multiples of @code{\unitlength}. +@var{width} and @var{height} in multiples of @code{\unitlength}. -The optional argument, @code{[position]}, specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: +The optional argument, @code{[@var{position}]}, specifies the quadrant that +your @var{text} appears in. You may select up to two of the following: @table @code @item t @@ -2238,8 +2439,8 @@ Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: rectangle has overall width @var{rwidth} and height @var{rheight}. The @var{text} is positioned at optional @var{pos}. @c xxref positions. -A dashed box looks best when the @code{rwidth} and @code{rheight} are -multiples of the @code{dlen}. +A dashed box looks best when the @var{rwidth} and @var{rheight} are +multiples of the @var{dlen}. @node \frame @@ -2270,10 +2471,12 @@ Synopsis: The @code{\line} command draws a line with the given @var{length} and slope @var{xslope}/@var{yslope}. +@cindex @code{pict2e} package +@cindex graphics packages Standard @LaTeX{} can only draw lines with @math{@var{slope} = x/y}, where @math{x} and @math{y} have integer values from @minus{}6 -through@tie{}6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, -see the @code{curve2e} and many many other packages on CTAN. +through@tie{}6. For lines of any slope, and plenty of other shapes, +see @code{pict2e} and many other packages on CTAN. @node \linethickness @@ -2353,13 +2556,17 @@ boxes with rounded corners. @node \put @subsection @code{\put} - @findex \put -@code{\put(x coord,y coord)@{ ... @}} +Synopsis: -The @code{\put} command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. +@example +\put(@var{xcoord},@var{ycoord})@{ ... @} +@end example + +The @code{\put} command places the material specified by the +(mandatory) argument in braces at the given coordinate, +(@var{xcoord},@var{ycoord}). @node \shortstack @@ -2395,12 +2602,12 @@ Objects are separated with @code{\\}. Synopsis: @example -\vector(@var{x-slope},@var{y-slope})@{@var{length}@} +\vector(@var{xslope},@var{yslope})@{@var{length}@} @end example The @code{\vector} command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The @math{x} and @math{y} values must lie between -@minus{}4 and +4, inclusive. +length and slope. The @math{@var{xslope}} and @math{@var{yslope}} +values must lie between @minus{}4 and +4, inclusive. @node quotation @@ -2435,7 +2642,7 @@ normally. @cindex displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation @cindex paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting -Snyopsis: +Synopsis: @example \begin@{quote@} @@ -2476,7 +2683,7 @@ the width of each column is constant and known in advance. This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the @code{tabular} environment. -The following commands can be used inside a @code{tabbing} enviroment: +The following commands can be used inside a @code{tabbing} environment: @ftable @code @item \\ @r{(tabbing)} @@ -2941,7 +3148,7 @@ Like @code{plain}, but more compact labels. In addition, numerous other Bib@TeX{} style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -@url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib}. +@url{http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib}. The @code{\bibliography} command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to @code{\bibliography} refers to files @@ -3149,8 +3356,8 @@ mode. @cindex hyphenation, forcing The @code{\-} command tells @LaTeX{} that it may hyphenate the word at -that point. @LaTeX{} is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually -find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +that point. @LaTeX{} is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds +most of the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The @code{\-} command is used for the exceptional cases. @@ -3428,7 +3635,7 @@ redefine @code{\@@fnsymbol}. Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's footnotes. Default dimensions: @code{0.4pt} thick (or wide), and @code{0.4\columnwidth} long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). +@code{slides}, where it does not appear). @item \footnotesep The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By @@ -3454,7 +3661,7 @@ footnotes. This is @samp{6.65pt} for @samp{10pt}, @samp{7.7pt} for * \newlength:: Define a new length. * \newsavebox:: Define a new box. * \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment. -* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment. +* \newtheorem:: Define a new @code{theorem}-like environment. * \newfont:: Define a new font name. * \protect:: Using tricky commands. @end menu @@ -3471,8 +3678,8 @@ footnotes. This is @samp{6.65pt} for @samp{10pt}, @samp{7.7pt} for command, respectively. Synopses: @example - \newcommand[*]@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optarg}]@{@var{defn}@} -\renewcommand[*]@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optarg}]@{@var{defn}@} + \newcommand[*]@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargval}]@{@var{defn}@} +\renewcommand[*]@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargval}]@{@var{defn}@} @end example @table @var @@ -3482,7 +3689,7 @@ The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not @code{\long}, in plain @TeX{} terms). @item cmd -The command name beginning with @code{\}. For @code{\newcommand}, it +The command name, beginning with @code{\}. For @code{\newcommand}, it must not be already defined and must not begin with @code{\end}; for @code{\renewcommand}, it must already be defined. @@ -3491,12 +3698,14 @@ An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. -@item optarg -If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's -first argument is optional. The default value of the optional -argument (i.e., if it is not specified in the call) is @var{optarg}, -or, if that argument is present in the @code{\newcommand} but has an -empty value, the string @samp{def}. +@item optargval +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the first +argument of command @var{cmd} is optional and its default value (i.e., +if it is not specified in the call) is @var{optarg}. In otherwise, +when calling the macro, if no @code{[@var{value}]} is given after +@code{@var{cmd}}---which is different from having @code{[]} for an +empty @var{value}---then string @samp{@var{optargval}} becomes the +value of @code{#1} within @var{defn} when the macro is expanded. @item defn The text to be substituted for every occurrence of @code{cmd}; a @@ -3515,14 +3724,14 @@ text of the @var{n}th argument. Synopsis: @example -\newcounter@{@var{cnt}@}[@var{countername}] +\newcounter@{@var{countername}@}[@var{supercounter}] @end example -The @code{\newcounter} command defines a new counter named @var{cnt}. +The @code{\newcounter} command defines a new counter named @var{countername}. The new counter is initialized to zero. -Given the optional argument @code{[@var{countername}]}, @var{cnt} -will be reset whenever @var{countername} is incremented. +Given the optional argument @code{[@var{super}]}, @var{countername} +will be reset whenever the counter named @var{supercounter} is incremented. @xref{Counters}, for more information about counters. @@ -3539,7 +3748,7 @@ Synopsis: @end example The @code{\newlength} command defines the mandatory argument as a -@code{length} command with a value of @code{0in}. The argument must +@dfn{length} command with a value of zero. The argument must be a control sequence, as in @code{\newlength@{\foo@}}. An error occurs if @code{\foo} is already defined. @@ -3750,7 +3959,7 @@ uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', @enddots{} @item \roman uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', @enddots{} -@item \roman +@item \Roman uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', @enddots{} @item \fnsymbol @@ -3758,18 +3967,13 @@ prints the value of @var{counter} in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of @var{counter} must be between@tie{}1 and@tie{}9, inclusive. -@tex -Here are the symbols: -$\ast$ $\dagger$ $\ddagger$ $\S$ $\P$ $\parallel$ -$\ast\ast$ $\dagger\dagger$ $\ddagger\ddagger$ -@end tex -@ifnottex -The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: +Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output): + @display -asterisk(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel -double-asterisk(**) double-dagger double-ddagger +asterisk(*) dagger(@U{2021}) ddagger(@U{2021}) +section-sign(@U{00A7}) paragraph-sign(@U{00B6}) parallel(@U{2225}) +double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(@U{2021}@U{2021}) double-ddagger(@U{2021}@U{2021}) @end display -@end ifnottex @end ftable @@ -3821,10 +4025,10 @@ be used anywhere @LaTeX{} expects a number, for example: Synopsis: @example -\setcounter@{@var{\counter}@}@{@var{value}@} +\setcounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@} @end example -The @code{\setcounter} command sets the value of @var{\counter} to the +The @code{\setcounter} command sets the value of @var{counter} to the @var{value} argument. @@ -4918,7 +5122,10 @@ parenthesized modulus, as in (@math{\pmod 2^n - 1}) @math{\sinh} @item \sup -@math{\sup} +sup +@c don't try to use \sup since that turned into a Texinfo command +@c and it's not worth hassling with different versions when it's +@c just three roman letters anyway. @item \tan @math{\tan} @@ -5078,7 +5285,7 @@ For example, @math{\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}}. @item \overline@{@var{text}@} Generates a horizontal line over @var{tex}. -For exampe, @math{\overline{x+y}}. +For example, @math{\overline{x+y}}. @item \sqrt[@var{root}]@{arg@} Produces the representation of the square root of @var{arg}. The @@ -5131,8 +5338,7 @@ $\vdots$. @cindex paragraph mode @cindex math mode @cindex left-to-right mode -@cindex lR mode - +@cindex LR mode When @LaTeX{} is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: @@ -5146,32 +5352,35 @@ Math mode Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short @end itemize -@LaTeX{} changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when @LaTeX{} is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. -``Paragraph mode'' is the most common; it's the one @LaTeX{} is in -when processing ordinary text. In that mode, @LaTeX{} breaks your -text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. @LaTeX{} is in -``math mode'' when it's generating a mathematical formula. In ``LR -mode'', as in paragraph mode, @LaTeX{} considers the output that it -produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, -unlike paragraph mode, @LaTeX{} keeps going from left to right; it -never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words -into an @code{\mbox}, @LaTeX{} would keep typesetting them from left -to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting -box was too wide to fit on the line. - -@LaTeX{} is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an @code{\mbox} -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. +@dfn{Paragraph mode} is the most common; it's the one @LaTeX{} is in +when processing ordinary text. In this mode, @LaTeX{} breaks the +input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. + +@LaTeX{} is in @dfn{math mode} when it's generating a mathematical +formula, either displayed math or within a line. + +@findex \mbox@r{, and LR mode} +In @dfn{LR mode}, as in paragraph mode, @LaTeX{} considers the output +that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. +However, unlike paragraph mode, @LaTeX{} keeps going from left to +right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a +hundred words into an @code{\mbox}, @LaTeX{} would keep typesetting +them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely +complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line). +@LaTeX{} is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an +@code{\mbox} command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside +the box---for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a +formula in the box. + There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put @LaTeX{} in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a @code{parbox}. When -@LaTeX{} is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -``inner paragraph mode''. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called ``outer paragraph mode''. +making a box that put @LaTeX{} into paragraph mode. The box made by +one of these commands or environments will be called a @code{parbox}. +When @LaTeX{} is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to +be in ``inner paragraph mode'' (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph +mode, which it starts out in, is called ``outer paragraph mode''. @node Page styles @@ -5242,7 +5451,9 @@ Synopsis: \pagenumbering@{@var{style}@} @end example -Specifies the style of page numbers, according to @var{style}: +Specifies the style of page numbers, according to @var{style}; also +resets the page number to 1. The @var{style} argument is one of +the following: @table @code @item arabic @@ -5336,9 +5547,9 @@ Horizontal space * \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space. * \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space. * \SPACE:: Normal interword space. -* \AT:: Ending a sentence. +* \@@:: Ending a sentence. * \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em. -* \/:: Per-character italic correction. +* \/:: Insert italic correction. * \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule. * \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots. @@ -5373,8 +5584,10 @@ form. @node \hfill @section @code{\hfill} - @findex \hfill + +@cindex stretch, infinite horizontal +@cindex infinite horizontal stretch The @code{\hfill} fill command produces a ``rubber length'' which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. @@ -5386,24 +5599,25 @@ equivalent to @code{\hfill}. @node \SPACE -@section @code{\SPACE} +@section @code{\SPACE}: Normal interword space @findex \SPACE @findex \TAB @findex \NEWLINE The @code{\ } (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's -useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example -@code{Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental}. -It is also often used after control sequences, as in @code{\TeX\ is a +useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example, +@code{the article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental}. It +is also often used after control sequences, as in @code{\TeX\ is a nice system.} In normal circumstances, @code{\}@key{tab} and @code{\}@key{newline} are equivalent to @code{\ }. -@node \AT -@section @code{\@@} +@node \@@ +@section @code{\@@}: Force sentence-ending punctuation @findex \@@ +@anchor{\AT}@c old name The @code{\@@} command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after @@ -5417,7 +5631,7 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without @noindent produces -@c Texinfo does it differently, but the result is the same. +@c Texinfo has different commands, but the result is the same. @quotation @dots{} in C@. Pascal, though @dots{}@* @dots{} in C. Pascal, though @dots{} @@ -5425,17 +5639,18 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without @node \thinspace -@section @code{\thinspace} +@section @code{\thinspace}: Insert 1/6@dmn{em} @findex \thinspace @code{\thinspace} produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that -is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in '@dmn{''}. +is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested +quotes, as in '@dmn{}''.@c Abuse @dmn, which is a thin space in Texinfo. @node \/ -@section @code{\/} +@section @code{\/}: Insert italic correction @findex \/ +@cindex italic correction The @code{\/} command produces an @dfn{italic correction}. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, @@ -5454,6 +5669,11 @@ normal letters, it can help. Compare @end ifnottex with @i{f: f;}. +When changing fonts with commands such as @code{\textit@{italic +text@}} or @code{@{\itshape italic text@}}, @LaTeX{} will +automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (@pxref{Font +styles}). + Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare @tex @@ -5464,6 +5684,9 @@ pdf@TeX{} (in the @TeX{} output, there is a small space after the `f') @end ifnottex with pdf@TeX{}. +There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done +in a different way. + @node \hrulefill @section @code{\hrulefill} @@ -5495,43 +5718,49 @@ with dots instead of just white space. The @code{\addvspace} command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous @code{\addvspace} command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to @code{length}. +command will not add more space than is needed to make the natural +length of the total vertical space equal to @code{length}. @node \bigskip \medskip \smallskip @section @code{\bigskip \medskip \smallskip} -These commands produce a given amount of space. +These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the +document class. @table @code @item \bigskip @findex \bigskip @findex \bigskipamount -The same as @code{\vspace@{bigskipamount@}}, ordinarily about one line -space (with stretch and shrink). +The same as @code{\vspace@{\bigskipamount@}}, ordinarily about one line +space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the @code{book} and +@code{article} classes is @code{12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt}). @item \medskip @findex \medskip @findex \medskipamount -The same as @code{\vspace@{medskipamount@}}, ordinarily -about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +The same as @code{\vspace@{\medskipamount@}}, ordinarily about half of +a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the @code{book} +and @code{article} classes is @code{6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}). @item \smallskip @findex \smallskip @findex \smallskipamount -The same as @code{\vspace@{smallskipamount@}}, ordinarily about a -quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +The same as @code{\vspace@{\smallskipamount@}}, ordinarily about a +quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the +@code{book} and @code{article} classes is @code{3pt plus 1pt minus +1pt}). @end table -The @code{\...amount} parameters are determined by the document class. - @node \vfill @section @code{\vfill} @findex \vfill +@cindex stretch, infinite vertical +@cindex infinite vertical stretch + The @code{\vfill} fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to @code{\vspace@{\fill@}} (@pxref{\hfill}). @@ -5566,12 +5795,12 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands. @menu * \mbox:: Horizontal boxes. * \fbox and \framebox:: Put a frame around a box. -* lrbox:: An environment like \sbox. +* lrbox:: An environment like @code{\sbox}. * \makebox:: Box, adjustable position. * \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode. * \raisebox:: Raise or lower text. -* \savebox:: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. -* \sbox:: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. +* \savebox:: Like @code{\makebox}, but save the text for later use. +* \sbox:: Like @code{\mbox}, but save the text for later use. * \usebox:: Print saved text. @end menu @@ -5765,7 +5994,7 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled @node \usebox -@section @code{\usebox@{@var{\boxcmd}} +@section @code{\usebox@{@var{\boxcmd}@}} @findex \usebox Synopsis: @@ -5785,7 +6014,7 @@ Synopsis: special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. @menu -* Reserved characters:: Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ @{ @} +* Reserved characters:: Inserting @samp{# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ @{ @}} * Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text. * Accents:: Inserting accents. * Non-English characters:: Inserting other non-English characters. @@ -5873,6 +6102,11 @@ The double dagger symbol (in text). @cindex logo, @LaTeX{} The @LaTeX{} logo. +@item \LaTeXe +@cindex @LaTeX{}2e logo +@cindex logo, @LaTeX{}2e +The @LaTeX{}2e logo. + @item \guillemotleft @r{(@guillemotleft{})} @itemx \guillemotright @r{(@guillemotright{})} @itemx \guilsinglleft @r{(@guilsinglleft{})} @@ -5917,7 +6151,7 @@ English pounds sterling: @pounds{}. @cindex double low-9 quotation mark @cindex single low-9 quotation mark @cindex low-9 quotation marks, single and double -Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: @quotedblbase{} and @quotesinglbase{}. @item \rq @@ -6055,8 +6289,8 @@ Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: @ordf{}, @ordm{}. Centered period: @math{\cdot}. @item \textquestiondown @r{(or @code{?`})} -@cindex questionation point, upside-down -Upside down questionation point: @questiondown{}. +@cindex question mark, upside-down +Upside down question mark: @questiondown{}. @item \textquotedblleft @r{(or @code{``})} @cindex left quote, double @@ -6127,6 +6361,8 @@ Visible space symbol. @cindex characters, accented @cindex letters, accented +@cindex @code{babel} package +@cindex multilingual support @LaTeX{} has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through the @code{babel} package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists @@ -6311,8 +6547,8 @@ used in languages other than English. @item \dh @itemx \DH -@findex \dh (@ae{}) -@findex \DH (@AE{}) +@findex \dh (@dh{}) +@findex \DH (@DH{}) @cindex Icelandic eth @cindex eth, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter eth: @dh{} and @DH{}. @@ -6321,7 +6557,7 @@ Icelandic letter eth: @dh{} and @DH{}. @itemx \DJ @findex \dj @findex \DJ -xxxx +Crossed d and D, a.k.a.@: capital and small letter d with stroke. @item \ij @itemx \IJ @@ -6341,7 +6577,7 @@ ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). @itemx \NG @findex \ng @findex \NG -xxxx +Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics. @item \o @itemx \O @@ -6528,17 +6764,20 @@ table of contents, write a @code{\newpage} command after the @findex \listoffigures @findex \listoftables +@findex .lof @r{file} +@findex .lot @r{file} The analogous commands @code{\listoffigures} and @code{\listoftables} -produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. +produce a list of figures and a list of tables (from @file{.lof} and +@file{.lot} files), respectively. Everything works exactly the same +as for the table of contents. @findex \nofiles The command @code{\nofiles} overrides these commands, and @emph{prevents} any of these lists from being generated. @menu -* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents etc. -* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file etc. +* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents, etc. +* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file, etc. @end menu @@ -6571,14 +6810,14 @@ For the list of tables. @end table @item entry -The actual text of the entry. +The text of the entry. @end table @findex \contentsline What is written to the @file{.@var{ext}} file is the command @code{\contentsline@{@var{unit}@}@{@var{name}@}}. -@c ?? how hardwired are these values? other unit names? +@c xx how hardwired are these values? other unit names? @node \addtocontents @@ -6591,9 +6830,9 @@ generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. @table @var @item ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written: -@file{toc} (table of contents), @file{lof} (list of figures), or -@file{lot} (list of tables). +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +typically one of: @file{toc} (table of contents), @file{lof} (list of +figures), or @file{lot} (list of tables). @item text The text to be written. @@ -6617,6 +6856,7 @@ Specifically, what gets written is the command @code{\glossaryentry@{@var{text}@}@{@var{pageno}@}}, where @var{pageno} is the current @code{\thepage} value. +@cindex glossary @r{package} The @code{glossary} package on CTAN provides support for fancier glossaries. @@ -6640,6 +6880,7 @@ Specifically, what gets written is the command is the current @code{\thepage} value. @cindex `see' and `see also' index entries +@cindex index entries, `see' and `see also' To generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a vertical bar: @code{\index@{bar|see@{foo@}@}}. Use @code{seealso} instead of @code{see} to make a `See also' entry. @@ -6730,7 +6971,7 @@ These commands are used with the @code{letter} class. * \cc:: Cc list. * \closing:: Saying goodbye. * \encl:: List of enclosed material. -* \location:: Your organisation's address. +* \location:: Your organization's address. * \makelabels:: Making address labels. * \name:: Your name, for the return address. * \opening:: Saying hello. @@ -6751,7 +6992,7 @@ should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by @code{\\} commands. If you do not make an @code{\address} declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard +will be formatted for copying onto your organization's standard letterhead. (@xref{Overview}, for details on your local implementation). If you give an @code{\address} declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. @@ -6813,7 +7054,7 @@ Declare a list of one more enclosures. @code{\location@{address@}} -This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears +This modifies your organization's standard address. This only appears if the @code{firstpage} pagestyle is selected. @@ -6885,7 +7126,6 @@ space for your signature. @code{\\} starts a new line within Used after a @code{\stopbreaks} command to allow page breaks again. - @node \stopbreaks @section @code{\stopbreaks} @findex \stopbreaks @@ -6895,7 +7135,6 @@ Used after a @code{\stopbreaks} command to allow page breaks again. Inhibit page breaks until a @code{\startbreaks} command occurs. - @node \telephone @section @code{\telephone} @findex \telephone @@ -6962,18 +7201,22 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A @code{^^J} in @chapter Command line @cindex command line +@findex .tex, @r{default extension} The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; @TeX{} uses @file{.tex} as a default file extension. If you omit the -input file entirely, @TeX{} accepts input from the terminal. You -specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the -command; e.g. +input file entirely, @TeX{} accepts input from the terminal. You can +also specify arbitrary @LaTeX{} input by starting with a backslash. +For example, this processes @file{foo.tex} without pausing after every +error: @example latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' @end example -@noindent -will process @file{foo.tex} without pausing after every error. +@findex --help @r{command-line option} +With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also +be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with @samp{-} or +@samp{--}. For a list of those options, try @samp{latex --help}. @cindex @samp{*} prompt @cindex prompt, @samp{*} @@ -6982,6 +7225,7 @@ If @LaTeX{} stops in the middle of the document and gives you a @samp{*} prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type @code{\stop} (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. +@xref{@TeX{} engines}, for other system commands invoking @LaTeX{}. @node Document templates @@ -6989,43 +7233,22 @@ If @LaTeX{} stops in the middle of the document and gives you a @cindex document templates Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional template resources are listed +be useful. Additional template resources are listed at @url{http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates}. @menu -* book template:: * beamer template:: +* book template:: * tugboat template:: @end menu -@node book template -@section @code{book} template - -@verbatim -\documentclass{book} -\title{Book Class Template} -\author{Alex Author} - -\begin{document} -\maketitle - -\chapter{First} -Some text. - -\chapter{Second} -Some other text. - -\section{A subtopic} -The end. -\end{document} -@end verbatim - - @node beamer template @section @code{beamer} template -The @code{beamer} class creates slides presentations. +@cindex @code{beamer} template and class +The @code{beamer} class creates presentation slides. It has a vast +array of features, but here is a basic template: @verbatim \documentclass{beamer} @@ -7055,9 +7278,35 @@ One web resource for this: @url{http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/}. +@node book template +@section @code{book} template + +@verbatim +\documentclass{book} +\title{Book Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\chapter{First} +Some text. + +\chapter{Second} +Some other text. + +\section{A subtopic} +The end. +\end{document} +@end verbatim + + @node tugboat template @section @code{tugboat} template +@cindex TUGboat template +@cindex @code{ltugboat} class + @cite{TUGboat} is the journal of the @TeX{} Users Group, @url{http://tug.org/TUGboat}. @@ -7092,8 +7341,8 @@ This is an example article for \TUB{}. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the -hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the +\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output. Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: @@ -7168,3 +7417,7 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. \@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbolDefault@item \@onlypreamble\DeclareTextAccentDefault@item \def\UndeclareTextCommand#1#2{% + +@c Local Variables: +@c ispell-dictionary: "english" +@c End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt index 2e686220565..e502e516666 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt @@ -1,376 +1,494 @@ -LaTeX2e +LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual 1 About this document 2 Overview of LaTeX -3 Starting & ending -4 Document classes -5 Fonts -6 Layout -7 Sectioning -8 Cross references -9 Environments -10 Line breaking -11 Page breaking -12 Footnotes -13 Definitions -14 Counters -15 Lengths -16 Making paragraphs -17 Math formulas -18 Modes -19 Page styles -20 Spaces -21 Boxes -22 Special insertions -23 Splitting the input -24 Front/back matter -25 Letters -26 Terminal input/output -27 Command line +3 Document classes +4 Fonts +5 Layout +6 Sectioning +7 Cross references +8 Environments +9 Line breaking +10 Page breaking +11 Footnotes +12 Definitions +13 Counters +14 Lengths +15 Making paragraphs +16 Math formulas +17 Modes +18 Page styles +19 Spaces +20 Boxes +21 Special insertions +22 Splitting the input +23 Front/back matter +24 Letters +25 Terminal input/output +26 Command line Appendix A Document templates Concept Index Command Index -LaTeX2e +LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual 1 About this document 2 Overview of LaTeX -3 Starting & ending -4 Document classes - 4.1 Document class options -5 Fonts - 5.1 Font styles - 5.2 Font sizes - 5.3 Low-level font commands -6 Layout - 6.1 '\onecolumn' - 6.2 '\twocolumn' - 6.3 '\flushbottom' - 6.4 '\raggedbottom' - 6.5 Page layout parameters -7 Sectioning -8 Cross references - 8.1 '\label' - 8.2 '\pageref{KEY}' - 8.3 '\ref{KEY}' -9 Environments - 9.1 'abstract' - 9.2 'array' - 9.3 'center' - 9.3.1 '\centering' - 9.4 'description' - 9.5 'displaymath' - 9.6 'document' - 9.7 'enumerate' - 9.8 'eqnarray' - 9.9 'equation' - 9.10 'figure' - 9.11 'filecontents': Create external files - 9.12 'flushleft' - 9.12.1 '\raggedright' - 9.13 'flushright' - 9.13.1 '\raggedleft' - 9.14 'itemize' - 9.15 'letter' environment: writing letters - 9.16 'list' - 9.17 'math' - 9.18 'minipage' - 9.19 'picture' - 9.19.1 '\circle' - 9.19.2 '\makebox' - 9.19.3 '\framebox' - 9.19.4 '\dashbox' - 9.19.5 '\frame' - 9.19.6 '\line' - 9.19.7 '\linethickness' - 9.19.8 '\thicklines' - 9.19.9 '\thinlines' - 9.19.10 '\multiput' - 9.19.11 '\oval' - 9.19.12 '\put' - 9.19.13 '\shortstack' - 9.19.14 '\vector' - 9.20 'quotation' - 9.21 'quote' - 9.22 'tabbing' - 9.23 'table' - 9.24 'tabular' - 9.24.1 '\multicolumn' - 9.24.2 '\cline' - 9.24.3 '\hline' - 9.24.4 '\vline' - 9.25 'thebibliography' - 9.25.1 '\bibitem' - 9.25.2 '\cite' - 9.25.3 '\nocite' - 9.25.4 Using BibTeX - 9.26 'theorem' - 9.27 'titlepage' - 9.28 'verbatim' - 9.28.1 '\verb' - 9.29 'verse' -10 Line breaking - 10.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE] - 10.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr' - 10.3 '\newline' - 10.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen) - 10.5 '\fussy' - 10.6 '\sloppy' - 10.7 '\hyphenation' - 10.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak' -11 Page breaking - 11.1 '\cleardoublepage' - 11.2 '\clearpage' - 11.3 '\newpage' - 11.4 '\enlargethispage' - 11.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak' -12 Footnotes - 12.1 '\footnote' - 12.2 '\footnotemark' - 12.3 '\footnotetext' - 12.4 Symbolic footnotes - 12.5 Footnote parameters -13 Definitions - 13.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand' - 13.2 '\newcounter' - 13.3 '\newlength' - 13.4 '\newsavebox' - 13.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment' - 13.6 '\newtheorem' - 13.7 '\newfont' - 13.8 '\protect' -14 Counters - 14.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters - 14.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}' - 14.3 '\value{COUNTER}' - 14.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' - 14.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' - 14.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' - 14.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}' - 14.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters -15 Lengths - 15.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' - 15.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} - 15.3 '\settodepth' - 15.4 '\settoheight' - 15.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' - 15.6 Predefined lengths -16 Making paragraphs - 16.1 '\indent' - 16.2 '\noindent' - 16.3 '\parskip' - 16.4 Marginal notes -17 Math formulas - 17.1 Subscripts & superscripts - 17.2 Math symbols - 17.3 Math functions - 17.4 Math accents - 17.5 Spacing in math mode - 17.6 Math miscellany -18 Modes -19 Page styles - 19.1 '\maketitle' - 19.2 '\pagenumbering' - 19.3 '\pagestyle' - 19.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}' -20 Spaces - 20.1 '\hspace' - 20.2 '\hfill' - 20.3 '\SPACE' - 20.4 '\@' - 20.5 '\thinspace' - 20.6 '\/' - 20.7 '\hrulefill' - 20.8 '\dotfill' - 20.9 '\addvspace' - 20.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' - 20.11 '\vfill' - 20.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' -21 Boxes - 21.1 '\mbox{TEXT}' - 21.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox' - 21.3 'lrbox' - 21.4 '\makebox' - 21.5 '\parbox' - 21.6 '\raisebox' - 21.7 '\savebox' - 21.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' - 21.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD' -22 Special insertions - 22.1 Reserved characters - 22.2 Text symbols - 22.3 Accents - 22.4 Non-English characters - 22.5 '\rule' - 22.6 '\today' -23 Splitting the input - 23.1 '\include' - 23.2 \'includeonly' - 23.3 \input -24 Front/back matter - 24.1 Tables of contents - 24.1.1 \addcontentsline - 24.1.2 \addtocontents - 24.2 Glossaries - 24.3 Indexes -25 Letters - 25.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS} - 25.2 '\cc' - 25.3 '\closing' - 25.4 '\encl' - 25.5 '\location' - 25.6 '\makelabels' - 25.7 '\name' - 25.8 '\opening{TEXT}' - 25.9 '\ps' - 25.10 '\signature{TEXT}' - 25.11 '\startbreaks' - 25.12 '\stopbreaks' - 25.13 '\telephone' -26 Terminal input/output - 26.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}' - 26.2 '\typeout{MSG}' -27 Command line + 2.1 Starting and ending + 2.2 Output files + 2.3 TeX engines + 2.4 LaTeX command syntax +3 Document classes + 3.1 Document class options +4 Fonts + 4.1 Font styles + 4.2 Font sizes + 4.3 Low-level font commands +5 Layout + 5.1 '\onecolumn' + 5.2 '\twocolumn' + 5.3 '\flushbottom' + 5.4 '\raggedbottom' + 5.5 Page layout parameters +6 Sectioning +7 Cross references + 7.1 '\label' + 7.2 '\pageref{KEY}' + 7.3 '\ref{KEY}' +8 Environments + 8.1 'abstract' + 8.2 'array' + 8.3 'center' + 8.3.1 '\centering' + 8.4 'description' + 8.5 'displaymath' + 8.6 'document' + 8.7 'enumerate' + 8.8 'eqnarray' + 8.9 'equation' + 8.10 'figure' + 8.11 'filecontents': Create external files + 8.12 'flushleft' + 8.12.1 '\raggedright' + 8.13 'flushright' + 8.13.1 '\raggedleft' + 8.14 'itemize' + 8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters + 8.16 'list' + 8.17 'math' + 8.18 'minipage' + 8.19 'picture' + 8.19.1 '\circle' + 8.19.2 '\makebox' + 8.19.3 '\framebox' + 8.19.4 '\dashbox' + 8.19.5 '\frame' + 8.19.6 '\line' + 8.19.7 '\linethickness' + 8.19.8 '\thicklines' + 8.19.9 '\thinlines' + 8.19.10 '\multiput' + 8.19.11 '\oval' + 8.19.12 '\put' + 8.19.13 '\shortstack' + 8.19.14 '\vector' + 8.20 'quotation' + 8.21 'quote' + 8.22 'tabbing' + 8.23 'table' + 8.24 'tabular' + 8.24.1 '\multicolumn' + 8.24.2 '\cline' + 8.24.3 '\hline' + 8.24.4 '\vline' + 8.25 'thebibliography' + 8.25.1 '\bibitem' + 8.25.2 '\cite' + 8.25.3 '\nocite' + 8.25.4 Using BibTeX + 8.26 'theorem' + 8.27 'titlepage' + 8.28 'verbatim' + 8.28.1 '\verb' + 8.29 'verse' +9 Line breaking + 9.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE] + 9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr' + 9.3 '\newline' + 9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen) + 9.5 '\fussy' + 9.6 '\sloppy' + 9.7 '\hyphenation' + 9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak' +10 Page breaking + 10.1 '\cleardoublepage' + 10.2 '\clearpage' + 10.3 '\newpage' + 10.4 '\enlargethispage' + 10.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak' +11 Footnotes + 11.1 '\footnote' + 11.2 '\footnotemark' + 11.3 '\footnotetext' + 11.4 Symbolic footnotes + 11.5 Footnote parameters +12 Definitions + 12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand' + 12.2 '\newcounter' + 12.3 '\newlength' + 12.4 '\newsavebox' + 12.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment' + 12.6 '\newtheorem' + 12.7 '\newfont' + 12.8 '\protect' +13 Counters + 13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters + 13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}' + 13.3 '\value{COUNTER}' + 13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' + 13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' + 13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' + 13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}' + 13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters +14 Lengths + 14.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' + 14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} + 14.3 '\settodepth' + 14.4 '\settoheight' + 14.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' + 14.6 Predefined lengths +15 Making paragraphs + 15.1 '\indent' + 15.2 '\noindent' + 15.3 '\parskip' + 15.4 Marginal notes +16 Math formulas + 16.1 Subscripts & superscripts + 16.2 Math symbols + 16.3 Math functions + 16.4 Math accents + 16.5 Spacing in math mode + 16.6 Math miscellany +17 Modes +18 Page styles + 18.1 '\maketitle' + 18.2 '\pagenumbering' + 18.3 '\pagestyle' + 18.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}' +19 Spaces + 19.1 '\hspace' + 19.2 '\hfill' + 19.3 '\SPACE': Normal interword space + 19.4 '\@': Force sentence-ending punctuation + 19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em + 19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction + 19.7 '\hrulefill' + 19.8 '\dotfill' + 19.9 '\addvspace' + 19.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' + 19.11 '\vfill' + 19.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' +20 Boxes + 20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}' + 20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox' + 20.3 'lrbox' + 20.4 '\makebox' + 20.5 '\parbox' + 20.6 '\raisebox' + 20.7 '\savebox' + 20.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' + 20.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD}' +21 Special insertions + 21.1 Reserved characters + 21.2 Text symbols + 21.3 Accents + 21.4 Non-English characters + 21.5 '\rule' + 21.6 '\today' +22 Splitting the input + 22.1 '\include' + 22.2 \'includeonly' + 22.3 \input +23 Front/back matter + 23.1 Tables of contents + 23.1.1 \addcontentsline + 23.1.2 \addtocontents + 23.2 Glossaries + 23.3 Indexes +24 Letters + 24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS} + 24.2 '\cc' + 24.3 '\closing' + 24.4 '\encl' + 24.5 '\location' + 24.6 '\makelabels' + 24.7 '\name' + 24.8 '\opening{TEXT}' + 24.9 '\ps' + 24.10 '\signature{TEXT}' + 24.11 '\startbreaks' + 24.12 '\stopbreaks' + 24.13 '\telephone' +25 Terminal input/output + 25.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}' + 25.2 '\typeout{MSG}' +26 Command line Appendix A Document templates - A.1 'book' template - A.2 'beamer' template + A.1 'beamer' template + A.2 'book' template A.3 'tugboat' template Concept Index Command Index -LaTeX2e -******* +LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual +*************************************** -This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document -preparation system, version as of May 2014. It is intended to cover -LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years. +This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of May 2015) +for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. 1 About this document ********************* -The LaTeX document preparation system is implemented as a macro package -for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. LaTeX was originally -created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers -(). The official documentation written by the -LaTeX project is available from their web site. +This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document +preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting +program (*note Overview::). This document's home page is +. That page has links to the current +output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and +subscriptions, and other infrastructure. - The present document is completely unofficial and has not been -reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything -else about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to -. + In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than +'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was retired many +years ago. - The home page for this document is . -That page has links to the current output in various formats, sources, -mailing lists, and other infrastructure. + LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers +(). The official documentation written by the +LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is +completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX +maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this +document to them. Instead, please send all comments to +. - Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about -LaTeX. Here are a few: + This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources +of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few +introductions. - + Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation. - + Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. - - The guide for document authors maintained as part of LaTeX; there - are several others. + + The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX; + there are plenty of others available elsewhere. + + + A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages. - Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX. + Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further + references. 2 Overview of LaTeX ******************* -What is LaTeX? +LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally created +by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers +(). It is widely used, particularly for +complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics. + + A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with +interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text +should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands +that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the +technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine). +The user produces the output document by giving that file to the TeX +engine. + + The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which +the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands +available to a LaTeX user. + + The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX". It is pronounced LAH-teck +or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, produce the +logo with '\LaTeX'. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in +plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'. + +2.1 Starting and ending +======================= - LaTeX typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the LaTeX -"macro package" for TeX. That is, it processes an input file containing -the text of a document with interspersed commands that describe how the -text should be formatted. LaTeX files are plain text that can be -written in any reasonable editor. It produces at least three files as -output: +LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard starting and +ending. Here is a "hello, world" example: - 1. The main output file, which is one of: + \documentclass{article} + \begin{document} + Hello, \LaTeX\ world. + \end{document} - '.dvi' - If invoked as 'latex', a "Device Independent" ('.dvi') file is - produced. This contains commands that can be translated into - commands for virtually any output device. You can view such - '.dvi' output of LaTeX by using a program such as 'xdvi' - (display directly), 'dvips' (convert to PostScript), or - 'dvipdfmx' (convert to PDF). +Here, the 'article' is the so-called "document class", implemented in a +file 'article.cls'. Any document class can be used. A few document +classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of others are widely +available. *Note Document classes::. - '.pdf' - If invoked as 'pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format" - ('.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with - all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but - it does make the output much larger than the '.dvi' produced - from the same document. + You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and +the '\begin{document}' commands. This area is called the "preamble". - If invoked as 'lualatex', a '.pdf' file is created using the - LuaTeX engine (). + The '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' is a so-called +"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in +all LaTeX documents. LaTeX provides many environments itself, and many +more are defined separately. *Note Environments::. - If invoked as 'xelatex', a '.pdf' file is created using the - XeTeX engine (). + The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output +from a LaTeX input file. - Many other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) exist, which can - produce HTML, XML, and other things. +2.2 Output files +================ - 2. The "transcript" or '.log' file that contains summary information - and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input - file. +LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two accessory files. The +main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'. + +'.dvi' + If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'latex' then it + produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension '.dvi'. You can + view this file with a command such as 'xdvi', or convert it to a + PostScript '.ps' file with 'dvips' or to a Portable Document Format + '.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'. The contents of the file can be + dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'. A vast array of + other DVI utility programs are available + (). + +'.pdf' + If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other + commands (*note TeX engines::), then the main output is a Portable + Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained + file, with all fonts and images included. + + LaTeX also produces at least two additional files. + +'.log' + This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of + loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps + additional information for any errors. + +'.aux' + Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross + references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward + reference--a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared + in the source--it will appear in the output as a doubled question + mark '??'. When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the + source then LaTeX writes its location information to this '.aux' + file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the location information + from this file and uses it to resolve the reference, replacing the + double question mark with the remembered location. + + LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename +ending. These include a '.lof' file that is used to make a list of +figures, a '.lot' file used to make a list of tables, and a '.toc' file +used to make a table of contents. A particular class may create others; +the list is open-ended. + +2.3 TeX engines +=============== - 3. An "auxiliary" or '.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for - things such as cross-references. +LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX +implementation (*note Overview::). This section gives a terse overview +of the main programs. + +'latex' +'pdflatex' + In TeX Live (, if LaTeX is invoked via + either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX + engine is run (). When invoked as + 'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main + output is a '.pdf' file. + + pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original + program (), including additional + programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty + of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the + command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi'). + + In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than + pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be + available in LaTeX. + +'lualatex' + If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'lualatex', the LuaTeX + engine is run (). This program allows + code written in the scripting language Lua () to + interact with TeX's typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode + input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and + produces a '.pdf' file by default. There is also 'dvilualatex' to + produce a '.dvi' file, but this is rarely used. + +'xelatex' + If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX + engine is run (). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX also + natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts, + though the implementation is completely different, mainly using + external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a + '.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output. + + Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional +support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX, +, ). + +2.4 LaTeX command syntax +======================== - An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won't try to -list them all. Xxx components? +In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a '\'; the name +itself then consists of either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single +non-letter. - In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a '\', followed -by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments -contained in square brackets, '[]', are optional while arguments -contained in braces, '{}', are required. + A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments, either +required or optional. Required arguments are contained in curly braces, +'{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in square brackets, '[...]'. +Generally, but not universally, if the command accepts an optional +argument, it comes first, before any required arguments. - LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless -explicitly directed to do otherwise. + Some commands have a '*' form that is related to the form without a +'*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'. -3 Starting & ending -******************* + LaTeX commands are case sensitive; neither '\Begin{document}' nor +'\begin{Document}' will work. Most commands are lowercase, but in any +event you must enter all commands in the same case as they are defined. -A minimal input file looks like the following: + This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the +commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs). - \documentclass{CLASS} - \begin{document} - YOUR TEXT - \end{document} - -where the CLASS is a valid document class for LaTeX. *Note Document -classes::, for details of the various document classes available -locally. - - You may include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and -the '\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the "preamble"). - -4 Document classes +3 Document classes ****************** -The class of a given document is defined with the command: +The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is +normally the first command in a LaTeX source file. \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS} -The '\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX source -file. + The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX. (Many other +document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.) + +'article' + For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general + use. - Built-in LaTeX document CLASS names are (many other document classes -are available as add-ons; *note Overview::): +'book' + Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front + matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix + (*note Front/back matter::). - article report book letter slides +'report' + For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as + technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters. - Standard OPTIONS are described below. +'slides' + For slide presentations--rarely used today. In its place the + 'beamer' package is perhaps the most prevalent (*note beamer + template::). -4.1 Document class options + Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section. + +3.1 Document class options ========================== You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the -'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. -To specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma: +'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets. To +specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma, as in: \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS} @@ -388,23 +506,30 @@ paper size (default is 'letterpaper'): Miscellaneous other options: -'draft, final' - mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is - 'final'. +'draft' +'final' + Mark ('draft') or do not mark ('final') overfull boxes with a black + box in the margin; default is 'final'. + 'fleqn' Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. + 'landscape' Selects landscape format; default is portrait. + 'leqno' Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. + 'openbib' Use "open" bibliography format. -'titlepage, notitlepage' + +'titlepage' +'notitlepage' Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. - These options are not available with the slides class: + The following options are not available with the 'slides' class. 'onecolumn' 'twocolumn' @@ -412,21 +537,20 @@ paper size (default is 'letterpaper'): 'oneside' 'twoside' - Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except for - the 'book' class. + Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except that + in the 'book' class the default is 'twoside'. - The '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the - distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the - page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper - size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For - one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, - '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth' and - '\textwidth', with '\evensidemargin' the remainder. + For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For + two-sided printing, the '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin') + parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages + between the left side of the page and the text's left margin, with + '\oddsidemargin' being 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth' + and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is the remainder. 'openright' 'openany' Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default - is 'openright' for book. + is 'openright' for 'book', and 'openany' for 'report'. The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at the bottom of each note. @@ -435,20 +559,21 @@ the bottom of each note. \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG} - To specify more than one PKG, you can separate them with a comma, or -use multiple '\usepackage' commands. + To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma, +as in '\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}', or use multiple '\usepackage' +commands. Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with '\usepackage'. -5 Fonts +4 Fonts ******* Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here. -5.1 Font styles +4.1 Font styles =============== The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. @@ -460,13 +585,19 @@ arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, -are cumulative; e.g.,, you can say either '\sffamily\bfseries' or +are cumulative; e.g., you can say either '\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif. You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for instance, '\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'. - These commands automatically supply an italic correction if needed. + These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections +if needed. (*Note \/::, for the details of italic corrections.) +Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following +character is in the list '\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a +period and a comma. To suppress the automatic insertion of italic +correction, use '\nocorr' at the start or end of the command argument, +such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'. '\textrm (\rmfamily)' Roman. @@ -540,7 +671,7 @@ the default. FAQ entry: LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. Also, they are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of -'\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things. +'\CMD{...}'. These are two unrelated constructs. '\bf' Switch to bold face. @@ -576,7 +707,7 @@ situations when an unconditional font switch is precisely what you need to get the desired output; for one example, *note 'description': description. Both sets of commands have their place. -5.2 Font sizes +4.2 Font sizes ============== The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The @@ -602,7 +733,7 @@ the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these commands; for instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. -5.3 Low-level font commands +4.3 Low-level font commands =========================== These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and @@ -672,18 +803,18 @@ ones. and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by '\selectfont'. -6 Layout +5 Layout ******** Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. -6.1 '\onecolumn' +5.1 '\onecolumn' ================ The '\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default. -6.2 '\twocolumn' +5.2 '\twocolumn' ================ Synopsis: @@ -727,7 +858,7 @@ typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. Default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. -6.3 '\flushbottom' +5.3 '\flushbottom' ================== The '\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height, @@ -736,13 +867,13 @@ adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. This is the default if 'twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document class options::). -6.4 '\raggedbottom' +5.4 '\raggedbottom' =================== The '\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. -6.5 Page layout parameters +5.5 Page layout parameters ========================== '\headheight' @@ -808,17 +939,17 @@ the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. '\topskip' Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline - of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is - the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at '10pt'. + of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default + is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at '10pt'. -7 Sectioning +6 Sectioning ************ Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: '\part' '\chapter' - (report and book class only) + ('report' and 'book' class only) '\section' '\subsection' '\subsubsection' @@ -863,13 +994,13 @@ setting suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where 'chapter' is level zero. (*Note \setcounter::.) -8 Cross references +7 Cross references ****************** One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details." -8.1 '\label' +7.1 '\label' ============ Synopsis: @@ -881,7 +1012,8 @@ number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered environment assigns that number to KEY. A KEY name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished, +as usual. To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a @@ -901,7 +1033,7 @@ colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:snark' or 'fig.snark'. -8.2 '\pageref{KEY}' +7.2 '\pageref{KEY}' =================== Synopsis: @@ -911,7 +1043,7 @@ Synopsis: The '\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears. -8.3 '\ref{KEY}' +7.3 '\ref{KEY}' =============== Synopsis: @@ -923,7 +1055,7 @@ equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::). It does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just the bare number itself. -9 Environments +8 Environments ************** LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each @@ -933,7 +1065,7 @@ environment begins and ends in the same manner: ... \end{ENVNAME} -9.1 'abstract' +8.1 'abstract' ============== Synopsis: @@ -944,7 +1076,7 @@ Synopsis: Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. -9.2 'array' +8.2 'array' =========== Synopsis: @@ -958,7 +1090,8 @@ Synopsis: within an 'equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter -that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: +that tells how items in each row of that column should be formatted, as +follows: 'c' centered @@ -989,7 +1122,7 @@ parameters which affect formatting in 'array' environments, namely The 'array' environment can only be used in math mode. -9.3 'center' +8.3 'center' ============ Synopsis: @@ -1003,7 +1136,7 @@ Synopsis: of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the string '\\'. -9.3.1 '\centering' +8.3.1 '\centering' ------------------ The '\centering' declaration corresponds to the 'center' environment. @@ -1026,7 +1159,7 @@ environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. second line \\ \end{quote} -9.4 'description' +8.4 'description' ================= Synopsis: @@ -1049,7 +1182,7 @@ resets all other style variations: '\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'. For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::. -9.5 'displaymath' +8.5 'displaymath' ================= Synopsis: @@ -1069,13 +1202,13 @@ option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::. No equation number is added to 'displaymath' text; to get an equation number, use the 'equation' environment (*note equation::). -9.6 'document' +8.6 'document' ============== The 'document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is -required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting & ending::. +required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::. -9.7 'enumerate' +8.7 'enumerate' =============== Synopsis: @@ -1113,7 +1246,7 @@ letters: \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} -9.8 'eqnarray' +8.8 'eqnarray' ============== First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment has some infelicities which @@ -1132,9 +1265,9 @@ that it is better to use the 'align' environment (and others) from the \end{eqnarray} The 'eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations -or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column 'array' -environment, with consecutive rows separated by '\\' and consecutive -items within a row separated by an '&'. +or inequalities. It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, +with consecutive rows separated by '\\' and consecutive items within a +row separated by an '&'. '\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. @@ -1148,7 +1281,7 @@ entirely, while otherwise being the same as 'eqnarray'. lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. -9.9 'equation' +8.9 'equation' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1161,7 +1294,7 @@ Synopsis: displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. -9.10 'figure' +8.10 'figure' ============= \begin{figure[*]}[PLACEMENT] @@ -1192,8 +1325,8 @@ put a float: . 'h' - (Here)--at the position in the text where the figure environment - appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; 't' is + (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment + appears. However, 't' is not allowed by itself; 't' is automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear "here", you can @@ -1212,7 +1345,7 @@ put a float: page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see above. - The standard report and article classes use the default placement + The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement 'tbp'. The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, @@ -1225,8 +1358,8 @@ the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::). Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and non-float text: - The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at - the bottom; default '.3'. + The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats + at the bottom; default '.3'. '\floatpagefraction' The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by @@ -1256,23 +1389,27 @@ non-float text: Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. - Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page: + Counters relating to the number of floats on a page: -'\bottomnumber' +'bottomnumber' Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; default 1. -'\topnumber' +'dbltopnumber' + Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a + two-column page; default 2. + +'topnumber' Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; default 2. -'\totalnumber' +'totalnumber' Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats: . -9.11 'filecontents': Create external files +8.11 'filecontents': Create external files ========================================== Synopsis: @@ -1311,11 +1448,11 @@ unrelated to using the created file. So you need to use, for instance, '\input' or '\usepackage' or '\bibliography' or whatever is applicable, to use the created file. - This environment is also useful to make a self-contained document, -for example, for a bug report, or to keep a '.bib' file with the main -document. + This environment is also useful to make a document in a +self-contained file, for example, for a bug report, or to keep the +content of a '.bib' file in the same file as the main document. -9.12 'flushleft' +8.12 'flushleft' ================ \begin{flushleft} @@ -1328,7 +1465,7 @@ document. consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'. -9.12.1 '\raggedright' +8.12.1 '\raggedright' --------------------- The '\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the 'flushleft' @@ -1341,7 +1478,7 @@ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the paragraph unit. -9.13 'flushright' +8.13 'flushright' ================= \begin{flushright} @@ -1354,7 +1491,7 @@ paragraph unit. consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'. -9.13.1 '\raggedleft' +8.13.1 '\raggedleft' -------------------- The '\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the 'flushright' @@ -1367,7 +1504,7 @@ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the paragraph unit. -9.14 'itemize' +8.14 'itemize' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1469,12 +1606,12 @@ within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}% {\end{itemize}} -9.15 'letter' environment: writing letters +8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters ========================================== This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::. -9.16 'list' +8.16 'list' =========== The 'list' environment is a generic environment which is used for @@ -1499,7 +1636,7 @@ empty, i.e., '{}', which leaves the default spacing. The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by '\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::). -9.17 'math' +8.17 'math' =========== Synopsis: @@ -1511,7 +1648,7 @@ Synopsis: The 'math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running text. '\(...\))' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::. -9.18 'minipage' +8.18 'minipage' =============== \begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH} @@ -1539,7 +1676,7 @@ Counters::). However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. -9.19 'picture' +8.19 'picture' ============== \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) @@ -1609,28 +1746,30 @@ corner of the box. The 'picture' commands are described in the following sections. -9.19.1 '\circle' +8.19.1 '\circle' ---------------- +Synopsis: \circle[*]{DIAMETER} The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The '*'-form of the command draws a solid circle. - Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. + Circles up to 40pt can be drawn. -9.19.2 '\makebox' +8.19.2 '\makebox' ----------------- -'\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}' +Synopsis: + \makebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT} The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the -normal '\makebox' command except that you must specify a 'width' and -'height' in multiples of '\unitlength'. +normal '\makebox' command except that you must specify a WIDTH and +HEIGHT in multiples of '\unitlength'. - The optional argument, '[position]', specifies the quadrant that your -text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: + The optional argument, '[POSITION]', specifies the quadrant that your +TEXT appears in. You may select up to two of the following: 't' Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. @@ -1646,7 +1785,7 @@ text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: *Note \makebox::. -9.19.3 '\framebox' +8.19.3 '\framebox' ------------------ Synopsis: @@ -1660,7 +1799,7 @@ creates. The '\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness '\fboxrule', and leaves a space '\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box. -9.19.4 '\dashbox' +8.19.4 '\dashbox' ----------------- Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: @@ -1672,10 +1811,10 @@ environment. Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT. The TEXT is positioned at optional POS. - A dashed box looks best when the 'rwidth' and 'rheight' are multiples -of the 'dlen'. + A dashed box looks best when the RWIDTH and RHEIGHT are multiples of +the DLEN. -9.19.5 '\frame' +8.19.5 '\frame' --------------- Synopsis: @@ -1686,7 +1825,7 @@ Synopsis: reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the object. -9.19.6 '\line' +8.19.6 '\line' -------------- Synopsis: @@ -1697,11 +1836,10 @@ Synopsis: XSLOPE/YSLOPE. Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y -have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to -mention other shapes, see the 'curve2e' and many many other packages on -CTAN. +have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, and +plenty of other shapes, see 'pict2e' and many other packages on CTAN. -9.19.7 '\linethickness' +8.19.7 '\linethickness' ----------------------- The '\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal @@ -1711,21 +1849,21 @@ positive length. '\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or the quarter circles drawn by '\oval'. -9.19.8 '\thicklines' +8.19.8 '\thicklines' -------------------- The '\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness:: and *note \thinlines::. -9.19.9 '\thinlines' +8.19.9 '\thinlines' ------------------- The '\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness:: and *note \thicklines::. -9.19.10 '\multiput' +8.19.10 '\multiput' ------------------- Synopsis: @@ -1735,7 +1873,7 @@ Synopsis: across a picture. OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times. -9.19.11 '\oval' +8.19.11 '\oval' --------------- Synopsis: @@ -1759,15 +1897,17 @@ following: maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with rounded corners. -9.19.12 '\put' +8.19.12 '\put' -------------- -'\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }' +Synopsis: + + \put(XCOORD,YCOORD){ ... } - The '\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. + The '\put' command places the material specified by the (mandatory) +argument in braces at the given coordinate, (XCOORD,YCOORD). -9.19.13 '\shortstack' +8.19.13 '\shortstack' --------------------- Synopsis: @@ -1786,18 +1926,18 @@ positions are: Objects are separated with '\\'. -9.19.14 '\vector' +8.19.14 '\vector' ----------------- Synopsis: - \vector(X-SLOPE,Y-SLOPE){LENGTH} + \vector(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH} The '\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -4 and +4, -inclusive. +length and slope. The XSLOPE and YSLOPE values must lie between -4 and ++4, inclusive. -9.20 'quotation' +8.20 'quotation' ================ Synopsis: @@ -1812,10 +1952,10 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph. Unlike the 'quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally. -9.21 'quote' +8.21 'quote' ============ -Snyopsis: +Synopsis: \begin{quote} TEXT @@ -1827,7 +1967,7 @@ line between text produces a new paragraph. Unlike the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented. -9.22 'tabbing' +8.22 'tabbing' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1846,7 +1986,7 @@ each column is constant and known in advance. This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the 'tabular' environment. - The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' enviroment: + The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' environment: '\\ (tabbing)' End a line. @@ -1918,7 +2058,7 @@ environment. end;\\ \end{tabbing} -9.23 'table' +8.23 'table' ============ Synopsis: @@ -1945,7 +2085,7 @@ and described there (*note figure::). The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc., you wish. The '\caption' command allows you to title your table. -9.24 'tabular' +8.24 'tabular' ============== Synopsis: @@ -2059,7 +2199,7 @@ rule below the table) follows. The following commands can be used inside a 'tabular' environment: -9.24.1 '\multicolumn' +8.24.1 '\multicolumn' --------------------- Synopsis: @@ -2081,7 +2221,7 @@ third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry. 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr \end{tabular} -9.24.2 '\cline' +8.24.2 '\cline' --------------- Synopsis: @@ -2092,21 +2232,21 @@ Synopsis: specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are specified in the mandatory argument. -9.24.3 '\hline' +8.24.3 '\hline' --------------- The '\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. -9.24.4 '\vline' +8.24.4 '\vline' --------------- The '\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An '\hfill' command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression. -9.25 'thebibliography' +8.25 'thebibliography' ====================== Synopsis: @@ -2131,7 +2271,7 @@ wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. It is typically given as '9' for bibliographies with less than 10 references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc. -9.25.1 '\bibitem' +8.25.1 '\bibitem' ----------------- Synopsis: @@ -2148,7 +2288,7 @@ CITE_KEY and label. When the '.aux' file is read by the 'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (see next section) to produce the associated label. -9.25.2 '\cite' +8.25.2 '\cite' -------------- Synopsis: @@ -2162,7 +2302,7 @@ associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux' file. The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation. For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'. -9.25.3 '\nocite' +8.25.3 '\nocite' ---------------- '\nocite{key_list}' @@ -2170,7 +2310,7 @@ For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'. The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes 'key_list', which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the '.aux' file. -9.25.4 Using BibTeX +8.25.4 Using BibTeX ------------------- If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if @@ -2199,7 +2339,7 @@ BibTeX are: In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -. +. The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named @@ -2207,7 +2347,7 @@ bibliography. The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite' will be listed in the bibliography. -9.26 'theorem' +8.26 'theorem' ============== Synopsis: @@ -2220,7 +2360,7 @@ Synopsis: by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::). -9.27 'titlepage' +8.27 'titlepage' ================ Synopsis: @@ -2237,7 +2377,7 @@ be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The You can use the '\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage' environment. -9.28 'verbatim' +8.28 'verbatim' =============== Synopsis: @@ -2254,7 +2394,7 @@ typewriter. The 'verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt'). -9.28.1 '\verb' +8.28.1 '\verb' -------------- Synopsis: @@ -2271,7 +2411,7 @@ in LITERAL-TEXT. The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible space" character. -9.29 'verse' +8.29 'verse' ============ Synopsis: @@ -2290,8 +2430,8 @@ not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with '\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. -10 Line breaking -**************** +9 Line breaking +*************** The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a @@ -2302,8 +2442,8 @@ lines must be broken into pages). environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the '\\' command, and you can always manually force breaks. -10.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE] -======================= +9.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE] +====================== The '\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to @@ -2312,8 +2452,8 @@ be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. The '\\*' command is the same as the ordinary '\\' command except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. -10.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr' -============================= +9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr' +============================ The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M', internally) the same as '\\' (followed by '\relax'). So each new line @@ -2321,27 +2461,27 @@ in the input will also be a new line in the output. '\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior. -10.3 '\newline' -=============== +9.3 '\newline' +============== The '\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode. -10.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen) -================================ +9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen) +=============================== The '\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that -point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most -of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect +point. LaTeX is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds most of +the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The '\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. When you insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. -10.5 '\fussy' -============= +9.5 '\fussy' +============ The declaration '\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the @@ -2350,16 +2490,16 @@ cost of an occasional overfull box. This command cancels the effect of a previous '\sloppy' command (*note \sloppy::. -10.6 '\sloppy' -============== +9.6 '\sloppy' +============= The declaration '\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. Lasts until a '\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::). -10.7 '\hyphenation' -=================== +9.7 '\hyphenation' +================== Synopsis: @@ -2374,8 +2514,8 @@ words): \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} -10.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak' -================================== +9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak' +================================= Synopses: @@ -2391,14 +2531,14 @@ margin as usual. a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. -11 Page breaking +10 Page breaking **************** LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. -11.1 '\cleardoublepage' +10.1 '\cleardoublepage' ======================= The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all @@ -2406,19 +2546,19 @@ figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. -11.2 '\clearpage' +10.2 '\clearpage' ================= The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -11.3 '\newpage' +10.3 '\newpage' =============== The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see '\clearpage' above). -11.4 '\enlargethispage' +10.4 '\enlargethispage' ======================= '\enlargethispage{size}' @@ -2433,7 +2573,7 @@ additional line. as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit '\pagebreak'. -11.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak' +10.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak' ================================== Synopses: @@ -2450,14 +2590,14 @@ extends to the normal bottom margin. command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is. -12 Footnotes +11 Footnotes ************ Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the '\footnote' command. They can also be produced with two commands, the '\footnotemark' and the '\footnotetext' commands. -12.1 '\footnote' +11.1 '\footnote' ================ Synopsis: @@ -2472,7 +2612,7 @@ default footnote number. cannot use it in sectioning commands like '\chapter', in figures, tables or in a 'tabular' environment. (See following sections.) -12.2 '\footnotemark' +11.2 '\footnotemark' ==================== With no optional argument, the '\footnotemark' command puts the current @@ -2487,7 +2627,7 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with after the first '\footnote' command. -12.3 '\footnotetext' +11.3 '\footnotetext' ==================== Synopsis: @@ -2501,7 +2641,7 @@ mode. The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number. -12.4 Symbolic footnotes +11.4 Symbolic footnotes ======================= If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing @@ -2514,14 +2654,14 @@ numbers, redefine '\thefootnote' like this: use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also redefine '\@fnsymbol'. -12.5 Footnote parameters +11.5 Footnote parameters ======================== '\footnoterule' Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's footnotes. Default dimensions: '0.4pt' thick (or wide), and '0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except - slides, where it does not appear). + 'slides', where it does not appear). '\footnotesep' The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. @@ -2530,19 +2670,19 @@ redefine '\@fnsymbol'. between footnotes. This is '6.65pt' for '10pt', '7.7pt' for '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'. -13 Definitions +12 Definitions ************** LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. -13.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand' +12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand' ==================================== '\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: - \newcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARG]{DEFN} - \renewcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARG]{DEFN} + \newcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGVAL]{DEFN} + \renewcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGVAL]{DEFN} '*' The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments not @@ -2550,7 +2690,7 @@ respectively. Synopses: terms). CMD - The command name beginning with '\'. For '\newcommand', it must + The command name, beginning with '\'. For '\newcommand', it must not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'; for '\renewcommand', it must already be defined. @@ -2559,48 +2699,50 @@ NARGS that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. -OPTARG - If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's - first argument is optional. The default value of the optional - argument (i.e., if it is not specified in the call) is OPTARG, or, - if that argument is present in the '\newcommand' but has an empty - value, the string 'def'. +OPTARGVAL + If this optional parameter is present, it means that the first + argument of command CMD is optional and its default value (i.e., if + it is not specified in the call) is OPTARG. In otherwise, when + calling the macro, if no '[VALUE]' is given after 'CMD'--which is + different from having '[]' for an empty VALUE--then string + 'OPTARGVAL' becomes the value of '#1' within DEFN when the macro is + expanded. DEFN The text to be substituted for every occurrence of 'cmd'; a construct of the form '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the Nth argument. -13.2 '\newcounter' +12.2 '\newcounter' ================== Synopsis: - \newcounter{CNT}[COUNTERNAME] + \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER] - The '\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new -counter is initialized to zero. + The '\newcounter' command defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME. +The new counter is initialized to zero. - Given the optional argument '[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset -whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented. + Given the optional argument '[SUPER]', COUNTERNAME will be reset +whenever the counter named SUPERCOUNTER is incremented. *Note Counters::, for more information about counters. -13.3 '\newlength' +12.3 '\newlength' ================= Synopsis: \newlength{\ARG} - The '\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a 'length' -command with a value of '0in'. The argument must be a control sequence, + The '\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a "length" +command with a value of zero. The argument must be a control sequence, as in '\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if '\foo' is already defined. *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. -13.4 '\newsavebox' +12.4 '\newsavebox' ================== Synopsis: @@ -2610,7 +2752,7 @@ Synopsis: Defines '\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. -13.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment' +12.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment' ============================================ Synopses: @@ -2649,7 +2791,7 @@ ENDDEF The text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'. It may not contain any argument parameters. -13.6 '\newtheorem' +12.6 '\newtheorem' ================== \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN] @@ -2677,7 +2819,7 @@ WITHIN At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both. -13.7 '\newfont' +12.7 '\newfont' =============== Synopsis: @@ -2691,7 +2833,7 @@ is named 'FONTNAME.tfm'. This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. More commonly, fonts are defined in families through '.fd' files. -13.8 '\protect' +12.8 '\protect' =============== Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and @@ -2712,7 +2854,7 @@ preceded by '\protect'. -14 Counters +13 Counters *********** Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The @@ -2727,7 +2869,7 @@ counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering. subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv subsubsection -14.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters +13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters ===================================================================== All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for @@ -2745,7 +2887,7 @@ instance, '\alph{enumi}'. '\roman' uses lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ... -'\roman' +'\Roman' uses uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ... '\fnsymbol' @@ -2753,12 +2895,13 @@ instance, '\alph{enumi}'. (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of COUNTER must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. - The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the - names: - asterisk(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel - double-asterisk(**) double-dagger double-ddagger + Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output): + + asterisk(*) dagger(U+2021) ddagger(U+2021) + section-sign(U+00A7) paragraph-sign(U+00B6) parallel(U+2225) + double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(U+2021U+2021) double-ddagger(U+2021U+2021) -14.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}' +13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}' =========================== Synopsis: @@ -2769,7 +2912,7 @@ Synopsis: 'list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list items. -14.3 '\value{COUNTER}' +13.3 '\value{COUNTER}' ====================== Synopsis: @@ -2783,36 +2926,36 @@ anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: \addtocounter{myctr}{1} \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} -14.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' ================================== Synopsis: - \setcounter{\COUNTER}{VALUE} + \setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE} - The '\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE + The '\setcounter' command sets the value of COUNTER to the VALUE argument. -14.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' ==================================== The '\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative. -14.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' +13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' =============================== The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter' *Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current '\ref' value to be the result of '\thecounter'. -14.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}' +13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}' ============================ The '\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary counters. -14.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters +13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters ============================================= LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month ('\day', 1-31), month of @@ -2823,26 +2966,26 @@ running. They are not updated as the job progresses. The related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day (*note \today::). -15 Lengths +14 Lengths ********** A 'length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument. -15.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' +14.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' ============================== The '\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches ('in'), millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big points ('bp', etc. -15.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} +14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} =============================== The '\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative. -15.3 '\settodepth' +14.3 '\settodepth' ================== '\settodepth{\gnat}{text}' @@ -2850,7 +2993,7 @@ amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative. The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal to the depth of the 'text' argument. -15.4 '\settoheight' +14.4 '\settoheight' =================== '\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' @@ -2858,13 +3001,13 @@ to the depth of the 'text' argument. The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal to the height of the 'text' argument. -15.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' +14.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' ============================== The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the width of the TEXT argument. -15.6 Predefined lengths +14.6 Predefined lengths ======================= '\width' @@ -2883,7 +3026,7 @@ size, e.g., say '\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}' -16 Making paragraphs +15 Making paragraphs ******************** A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not @@ -2891,7 +3034,7 @@ containing even a '%'. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command. -16.1 '\indent' +15.1 '\indent' ============== '\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of @@ -2902,20 +3045,20 @@ to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed. otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'. -16.2 '\noindent' +15.2 '\noindent' ================ When used at the beginning of the paragraph, '\noindent' suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. -16.3 '\parskip' +15.3 '\parskip' =============== '\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is '0pt plus1pt'. -16.4 Marginal notes +15.4 Marginal notes =================== Synopsis: @@ -2962,7 +3105,7 @@ hyphenation there by beginning the node with '\hspace{0pt}'. The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes from falling off the bottom of the page. -17 Math formulas +16 Math formulas **************** There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: @@ -2998,7 +3141,7 @@ formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ -17.1 Subscripts & superscripts +16.1 Subscripts & superscripts ============================== To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type @@ -3007,7 +3150,7 @@ LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript. -17.2 Math symbols +16.2 Math symbols ================= LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. @@ -3643,7 +3786,7 @@ symbol (\pi) in your output. '\zeta' \zeta -17.3 Math functions +16.3 Math functions =================== These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper @@ -3743,7 +3886,7 @@ spacing. \sinh '\sup' - \sup + sup '\tan' \tan @@ -3751,7 +3894,7 @@ spacing. '\tanh' \tanh -17.4 Math accents +16.4 Math accents ================= LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in @@ -3803,7 +3946,7 @@ Accents::). '\widehat' Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. -17.5 Spacing in math mode +16.5 Spacing in math mode ========================= In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in @@ -3821,7 +3964,7 @@ math mode: '\!' A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). -17.6 Math miscellany +16.6 Math miscellany ==================== '\*' @@ -3848,7 +3991,7 @@ math mode: \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. '\overline{TEXT}' - Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For exampe, \overline{x+y}. + Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For example, \overline{x+y}. '\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}' Produces the representation of the square root of ARG. The @@ -3871,7 +4014,7 @@ math mode: '\vdots' Produces a vertical ellipsis. -18 Modes +17 Modes ******** When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three @@ -3881,39 +4024,42 @@ modes: * Math mode * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when -LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. + Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or +when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing +commands. "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when -processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into -lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in "math mode" when -it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph -mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of -words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX -keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. -Even if you put a hundred words into an '\mbox', LaTeX would keep -typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then -complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - - LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an '\mbox' -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of +processing ordinary text. In this mode, LaTeX breaks the input text +into lines and breaks the lines into pages. + + LaTeX is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula, +either displayed math or within a line. + + In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that +it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, +unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it never +starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words into an +'\mbox', LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a +single box (and then most likely complain because the resulting box was +too wide to fit on the line). LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making +a box with an '\mbox' command. You can get it to enter a different mode +inside the box--for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a +formula in the box. + + There are also several text-producing commands and environments for +making a box that put LaTeX into paragraph mode. The box made by one of these commands or environments will be called a 'parbox'. When LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner -paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is -called "outer paragraph mode". +paragraph mode" (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph mode, which it +starts out in, is called "outer paragraph mode". -19 Page styles +18 Page styles ************** The '\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. -19.1 '\maketitle' +18.1 '\maketitle' ================= The '\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title @@ -3939,14 +4085,15 @@ obtained from the following declarations: The '\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document. Use '\\' to force a line break, as usual. -19.2 '\pagenumbering' +18.2 '\pagenumbering' ===================== Synopsis: \pagenumbering{STYLE} - Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE: + Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE; also resets +the page number to 1. The STYLE argument is one of the following: 'arabic' arabic numerals @@ -3963,7 +4110,7 @@ Synopsis: 'Alph' uppercase letters -19.3 '\pagestyle' +18.3 '\pagestyle' ================= Synopsis: @@ -3999,14 +4146,14 @@ typeset from the current page onwards. Values for STYLE: '\markright{RIGHT}' Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. -19.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}' +18.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}' ============================ The '\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the '\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to STYLE for the current page only. -20 Spaces +19 Spaces ********* LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. @@ -4015,7 +4162,7 @@ LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::). -20.1 '\hspace' +19.1 '\hspace' ============== Synopsis: @@ -4030,7 +4177,7 @@ with an '\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing. LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional '*' form. -20.2 '\hfill' +19.2 '\hfill' ============= The '\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no @@ -4040,19 +4187,19 @@ natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. glue value '0pt plus1fill'); thus, '\hspace\fill' is equivalent to '\hfill'. -20.3 '\SPACE' -============= +19.3 '\SPACE': Normal interword space +===================================== The '\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful -after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example 'Knuth's +after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example, 'the article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is also often used after control sequences, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.' In normal circumstances, '\' and '\' are equivalent to '\ '. -20.4 '\@' -========= +19.4 '\@': Force sentence-ending punctuation +============================================ The '\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a @@ -4066,14 +4213,15 @@ produces ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ... -20.5 '\thinspace' -================= +19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em +=============================== '\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 -of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in '". +of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested quotes, as in +'". -20.6 '\/' -========= +19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction +=================================== The '\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the @@ -4086,24 +4234,31 @@ very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the 'f's are nicely separated) with f: f;. + When changing fonts with commands such as '\textit{italic text}' or +'{\itshape italic text}', LaTeX will automatically insert an italic +correction if appropriate (*note Font styles::). + Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space after the 'f') with pdfTeX. -20.7 '\hrulefill' + There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is +done in a different way. + +19.7 '\hrulefill' ================= The '\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule. -20.8 '\dotfill' +19.8 '\dotfill' =============== The '\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots instead of just white space. -20.9 '\addvspace' +19.9 '\addvspace' ================= '\addvspace{length}' @@ -4111,36 +4266,38 @@ instead of just white space. The '\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to 'length'. +command will not add more space than is needed to make the natural +length of the total vertical space equal to 'length'. -20.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' +19.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' ==================================== -These commands produce a given amount of space. +These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the +document class. '\bigskip' - The same as '\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line - space (with stretch and shrink). + The same as '\vspace{\bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line + space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the 'book' and + 'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt'). '\medskip' - The same as '\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a - line space (with stretch and shrink). + The same as '\vspace{\medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a + line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the 'book' and + 'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt'). '\smallskip' - The same as '\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter - of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - - The '\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class. + The same as '\vspace{\smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter + of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the + 'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt'). -20.11 '\vfill' +19.11 '\vfill' ============== The '\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to '\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::). -20.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' +19.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' ========================== Synopsis: @@ -4154,20 +4311,20 @@ length. LENGTH can be negative or positive. top or bottom of a page. With the optional '*' argument, the space is not removed. -21 Boxes +20 Boxes ******** All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. -21.1 '\mbox{TEXT}' +20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}' ================== The '\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. -21.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox' +20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox' ============================ Synopses: @@ -4189,7 +4346,7 @@ rule and the contents of the box. *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the '\framebox' command in the 'picture' environment. -21.3 'lrbox' +20.3 'lrbox' ============ '\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}' @@ -4199,7 +4356,7 @@ rule and the contents of the box. The text inside the environment is saved in the box 'cmd', which must have been declared with '\newsavebox'. -21.4 '\makebox' +20.4 '\makebox' =============== Synopsis: @@ -4224,7 +4381,7 @@ optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values: '\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox (picture)::. -21.5 '\parbox' +20.5 '\parbox' ============== Synopsis: @@ -4264,7 +4421,7 @@ box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used. stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space for this to work. -21.6 '\raisebox' +20.6 '\raisebox' ================ Synopsis: @@ -4280,7 +4437,7 @@ specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and depth. -21.7 '\savebox' +20.7 '\savebox' =============== Synopsis: @@ -4292,7 +4449,7 @@ Synopsis: it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). -21.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' +20.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' =========================== Synopsis: @@ -4304,8 +4461,8 @@ except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD. \BOXCMD must have been previously declared with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). -21.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD' -====================== +20.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD}' +======================= Synopsis: @@ -4314,13 +4471,13 @@ Synopsis: '\usebox' produces the box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by a '\savebox' command (*note \savebox::). -22 Special insertions +21 Special insertions ********************* LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. -22.1 Reserved characters +21.1 Reserved characters ======================== The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called @@ -4351,7 +4508,7 @@ decimal 32, so it can be typed as '\symbol{32}'. with '"', so the previous example could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'. -22.2 Text symbols +21.2 Text symbols ================= LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in @@ -4371,6 +4528,9 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package. '\LaTeX' The LaTeX logo. +'\LaTeXe' + The LaTeX2e logo. + '\guillemotleft (<<)' '\guillemotright (>>)' '\guilsinglleft (<)' @@ -4486,7 +4646,7 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package. Centered period: \cdot. '\textquestiondown (or '?`')' - Upside down questionation point: ?. + Upside down question mark: ?. '\textquotedblleft (or '``')' Double left quote: ". @@ -4525,7 +4685,7 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package. '\textvisiblespace' Visible space symbol. -22.3 Accents +21.3 Accents ============ LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, @@ -4619,7 +4779,7 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1. '\capitalcaron' Produces a ha'c. -25 Letters +24 Letters ********** You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The @@ -4916,7 +5077,7 @@ separate the items. These commands are used with the 'letter' class. -25.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS} +24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS} ============================= The '\address' specifies the return address of a letter, as it should @@ -4924,12 +5085,12 @@ appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by '\\' commands. If you do not make an '\address' declaration, then the letter will be -formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead. +formatted for copying onto your organization's standard letterhead. (*Note Overview::, for details on your local implementation). If you give an '\address' declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. -25.2 '\cc' +24.2 '\cc' ========== Synopsis: @@ -4939,7 +5100,7 @@ Synopsis: Produce a list of NAMEs the letter was copied to. Each name is printed on a separate line. -25.3 '\closing' +24.3 '\closing' =============== Synopsis: @@ -4949,7 +5110,7 @@ Synopsis: A letter closes with a '\closing' command, for example, \closing{Best Regards,} -25.4 '\encl' +24.4 '\encl' ============ Synopsis: @@ -4958,15 +5119,15 @@ Synopsis: Declare a list of one more enclosures. -25.5 '\location' +24.5 '\location' ================ '\location{address}' - This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only + This modifies your organization's standard address. This only appears if the 'firstpage' pagestyle is selected. -25.6 '\makelabels' +24.6 '\makelabels' ================== '\makelabels{number}' @@ -4974,7 +5135,7 @@ appears if the 'firstpage' pagestyle is selected. If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. -25.7 '\name' +24.7 '\name' ============ '\name{June Davenport}' @@ -4982,7 +5143,7 @@ of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return address. -25.8 '\opening{TEXT}' +24.8 '\opening{TEXT}' ===================== Synopsis: @@ -4994,33 +5155,33 @@ TEXT, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For instance: \opening{Dear Joe,} -25.9 '\ps' +24.9 '\ps' ========== Use the '\ps' command to start a postscript in a letter, after '\closing'. -25.10 '\signature{TEXT}' +24.10 '\signature{TEXT}' ======================== Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. '\\' starts a new line within TEXT as usual. -25.11 '\startbreaks' +24.11 '\startbreaks' ==================== '\startbreaks' Used after a '\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again. -25.12 '\stopbreaks' +24.12 '\stopbreaks' =================== '\stopbreaks' Inhibit page breaks until a '\startbreaks' command occurs. -25.13 '\telephone' +24.13 '\telephone' ================== '\telephone{number}' @@ -5028,10 +5189,10 @@ space for your signature. '\\' starts a new line within TEXT as usual. This is your telephone number. This only appears if the 'firstpage' pagestyle is selected. -26 Terminal input/output +25 Terminal input/output ************************ -26.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}' +25.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}' ======================== Synopsis: @@ -5045,7 +5206,7 @@ had been included in the input file in place of the '\typein' command. If the \CMD argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input. -26.2 '\typeout{MSG}' +25.2 '\typeout{MSG}' ==================== Synopsis: @@ -5061,53 +5222,39 @@ and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'. A '\space' command in 'msg' causes a single space to be printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A '^^J' in 'msg' prints a newline. -27 Command line +26 Command line *************** The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX uses '.tex' as a default file extension. If you omit the input file -entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command -options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. +entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You can also specify +arbitrary LaTeX input by starting with a backslash. For example, this +processes 'foo.tex' without pausing after every error: latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' -will process 'foo.tex' without pausing after every error. + With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can +also be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with '-' or '--'. For +a list of those options, try 'latex --help'. If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a '*' prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type '\stop' (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. + *Note TeX engines::, for other system commands invoking LaTeX. + Appendix A Document templates ***************************** Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional template resources are listed +be useful. Additional template resources are listed at . -A.1 'book' template -=================== - -\documentclass{book} -\title{Book Class Template} -\author{Alex Author} - -\begin{document} -\maketitle - -\chapter{First} -Some text. - -\chapter{Second} -Some other text. - -\section{A subtopic} -The end. -\end{document} - -A.2 'beamer' template +A.1 'beamer' template ===================== -The 'beamer' class creates slides presentations. +The 'beamer' class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of +features, but here is a basic template: \documentclass{beamer} @@ -5134,6 +5281,26 @@ The 'beamer' class creates slides presentations. One web resource for this: . +A.2 'book' template +=================== + +\documentclass{book} +\title{Book Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\chapter{First} +Some text. + +\chapter{Second} +Some other text. + +\section{A subtopic} +The end. +\end{document} + A.3 'tugboat' template ====================== @@ -5170,8 +5337,8 @@ This is an example article for \TUB{}. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the -hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the +\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output. Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: @@ -5217,1509 +5384,1606 @@ Concept Index * Menu: -* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 5079) +* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 5243) * *-form of defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 2550) + (line 2690) * *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 2627) -* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 843) -* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 4836) -* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 4852) -* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 4866) -* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 4859) -* abstracts: abstract. (line 940) -* accents: Accents. (line 4534) -* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 3760) + (line 2769) +* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 974) +* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 4997) +* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 5013) +* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 5027) +* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 5020) +* abstracts: abstract. (line 1072) +* accents: Accents. (line 4694) +* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 3903) * accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters. - (line 4348) -* acute accent: Accents. (line 4548) -* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 3765) + (line 4505) +* acute accent: Accents. (line 4708) +* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 3908) +* additional packages, loading: Document class options. + (line 559) * ae ligature: Non-English characters. - (line 4637) -* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 1120) -* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 1120) -* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 1834) -* amsmath package, replacing 'eqnarray': eqnarray. (line 1120) -* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 849) + (line 4797) +* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 1253) +* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 1253) +* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 1974) +* amsmath package, replacing 'eqnarray': eqnarray. (line 1253) +* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 980) * aring: Non-English characters. - (line 4633) -* arrays, math: array. (line 951) -* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 4482) -* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 4514) -* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 4450) -* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 4415) -* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 4418) -* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 4421) -* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 3928) -* auxiliary file: Overview. (line 320) -* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 4424) -* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 4430) -* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 4427) -* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 4557) -* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 3768) -* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 4574) -* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 283) -* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 2177) -* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 2113) -* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 2177) -* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 4433) + (line 4793) +* arrays, math: array. (line 1083) +* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 4642) +* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 4674) +* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 4610) +* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 4575) +* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 4578) +* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 4581) +* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 4074) +* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 370) +* 'babel' package: Accents. (line 4694) +* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 4584) +* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 4590) +* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 4587) +* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 4717) +* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 3911) +* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 4734) +* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 290) +* 'beamer' template and class: beamer template. (line 5259) +* bibliography format, open: Document class options. + (line 526) +* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 2317) +* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 2253) +* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 2317) +* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 4593) * black boxes, omitting: Document class options. - (line 393) -* bold font: Font styles. (line 547) -* bold math: Font styles. (line 527) -* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 1045) -* boxes: Boxes. (line 4163) -* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 4436) -* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 4439) -* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 2297) -* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 2398) -* breve accent: Accents. (line 4613) -* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 3771) + (line 512) +* bold font: Font styles. (line 678) +* bold math: Font styles. (line 658) +* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 1178) +* boxes: Boxes. (line 4320) +* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 4596) +* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 4599) +* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 2437) +* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 2538) +* breve accent: Accents. (line 4773) +* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 3914) * bug reporting: About this document. - (line 253) -* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 3097) -* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 4442) -* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 1374) -* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 550) -* cap height: Text symbols. (line 4450) -* caron accent: Accents. (line 4623) -* case sensitivity of LaTeX: Overview. (line 332) -* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 4938) -* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 4578) -* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 4421) -* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 4489) -* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 1010) -* centering text, environment for: center. (line 996) -* characters, accented: Accents. (line 4534) + (line 247) +* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 3240) +* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 4602) +* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 1511) +* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 681) +* cap height: Text symbols. (line 4610) +* caron accent: Accents. (line 4783) +* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 5099) +* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 4738) +* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 4581) +* centered equations: Document class options. + (line 516) +* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 4649) +* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 1143) +* centering text, environment for: center. (line 1129) +* characters, accented: Accents. (line 4694) * characters, non-English: Non-English characters. - (line 4628) + (line 4788) * characters, reserved: Reserved characters. - (line 4329) -* check accent: Accents. (line 4623) -* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 3774) -* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 4433) -* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 4445) -* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 4561) -* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 3786) -* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 4415) + (line 4486) +* check accent: Accents. (line 4783) +* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 3917) +* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 4593) +* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 4605) +* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 4721) +* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 3929) +* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 4575) * class options: Document class options. - (line 372) -* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 355) -* closing letters: \closing. (line 4948) -* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 4406) -* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 2244) -* command line: Command line. (line 5070) + (line 490) +* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 459) +* closing letters: \closing. (line 5109) +* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 4566) +* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 2384) +* command line: Command line. (line 5231) +* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax. + (line 435) * commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 2543) -* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 4450) -* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 2244) -* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 4366) -* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 2720) -* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 2579) -* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 2778) -* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 2792) -* creating letters: Letters. (line 4889) -* creating pictures: picture. (line 1546) -* creating tables: table. (line 1925) -* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 3938) -* cross references: Cross references. (line 870) -* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 908) -* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 918) -* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 4461) -* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 4470) -* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 4458) -* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 4369) -* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 4455) -* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 3934) -* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 4702) + (line 2683) +* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 4610) +* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 2384) +* contents file: Output files. (line 380) +* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 4523) +* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 2862) +* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 2721) +* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 2921) +* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 2935) +* creating letters: Letters. (line 5050) +* creating pictures: picture. (line 1683) +* creating tables: table. (line 2065) +* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 4084) +* cross references: Cross references. (line 1001) +* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 370) +* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 1040) +* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 1050) +* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 4621) +* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 4630) +* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 4618) +* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 4526) +* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 4615) +* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 4080) +* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 4862) * defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 2543) + (line 2683) * defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 2618) -* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 2685) -* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 2657) -* definitions: Definitions. (line 2538) -* description lists, creating: description. (line 1033) -* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 4544) -* discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 3831) + (line 2760) +* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 2827) +* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 2799) +* definitions: Definitions. (line 2678) +* description lists, creating: description. (line 1166) +* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 4704) +* discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 3974) * displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation. - (line 1804) + (line 1944) * displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote. - (line 1819) + (line 1959) * document class options: Document class options. - (line 372) -* document classes: Document classes. (line 355) -* document templates: Document templates. (line 5086) -* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 4461) -* dot accent: Accents. (line 4553) -* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 3780) -* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 4553) -* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 4582) -* dotless i: Accents. (line 4590) -* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 3789) -* dotless j: Accents. (line 4593) -* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 3792) -* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4381) -* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 4372) -* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 4458) -* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 3777) -* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 4381) -* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 4495) -* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 4403) -* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 4508) -* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 4498) + (line 490) +* document class, defined: Starting and ending. + (line 324) +* document classes: Document classes. (line 459) +* document templates: Document templates. (line 5252) +* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 4621) +* dot accent: Accents. (line 4713) +* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 3923) +* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 4713) +* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 4742) +* dotless i: Accents. (line 4750) +* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 3932) +* dotless j: Accents. (line 4753) +* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 3935) +* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541) +* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 4529) +* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 4618) +* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 3920) +* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 4541) +* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 4655) +* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 4563) +* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 4668) +* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 4658) * double spacing: Low-level font commands. - (line 655) -* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 4430) -* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 4467) -* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 4387) -* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 4464) -* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 4517) -* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 4523) -* emphasis: Font styles. (line 479) -* emphasis <1>: Font styles. (line 553) -* enclosure list: \encl. (line 4958) -* ending & starting: Starting & ending. (line 338) -* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 2425) -* environments: Environments. (line 930) + (line 786) +* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 4590) +* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 4627) +* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 395) +* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 4547) +* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 4624) +* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 4677) +* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 4683) +* emphasis: Font styles. (line 610) +* emphasis <1>: Font styles. (line 684) +* enclosure list: \encl. (line 5119) +* ending & starting: Starting and ending. + (line 316) +* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 389) +* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 2565) +* environments: Environments. (line 1062) * environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 2618) -* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 918) -* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 1143) -* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 1120) -* equations, environment for: equation. (line 1155) + (line 2760) +* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050) +* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options. + (line 522) +* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 1276) +* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 1253) +* equations, environment for: equation. (line 1288) +* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options. + (line 516) * es-zet German letter: Non-English characters. - (line 4669) + (line 4829) * eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters. - (line 4641) -* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 4470) -* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 4473) + (line 4801) +* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 4630) +* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 4633) * exponent: Subscripts & superscripts. - (line 3007) -* external files, creating: filecontents. (line 1279) -* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 4486) -* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 918) -* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 1533) -* figures, inserting: figure. (line 1168) -* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 571) -* 'float' package: figure. (line 1196) -* 'float' package <1>: figure. (line 1200) -* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 2413) + (line 3150) +* external files, creating: filecontents. (line 1416) +* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 4646) +* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050) +* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 1670) +* figures, inserting: figure. (line 1301) +* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 702) +* 'float' package: figure. (line 1333) +* flush left equations: Document class options. + (line 516) +* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 2553) * font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands. - (line 609) -* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 583) -* font styles: Font styles. (line 455) -* fonts: Fonts. (line 449) -* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 2685) -* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 3972) + (line 740) +* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 714) +* font styles: Font styles. (line 580) +* fonts: Fonts. (line 574) +* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 2827) +* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 4119) * footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters. - (line 749) -* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 918) + (line 880) +* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 1050) * footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. - (line 2522) -* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 1533) -* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 2458) + (line 2662) +* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 1670) +* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 2598) * footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: Symbolic footnotes. - (line 2509) -* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 1155) -* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 2971) -* fragile commands: \protect. (line 2699) -* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4381) -* functions, math: Math functions. (line 3652) + (line 2649) +* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 1288) +* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 3114) +* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 370) +* fragile commands: \protect. (line 2841) +* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 4541) +* functions, math: Math functions. (line 3795) * global options: Document class options. - (line 372) + (line 490) * global options <1>: Document class options. - (line 442) -* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 4834) -* grave accent: Accents. (line 4565) -* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 3783) -* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 4476) -* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 3016) -* ha'c: Tables of contents. (line 4940) +* .log file: Output files. (line 365) +* .lot file: Output files. (line 380) +* .lot file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 4940) +* .pdf file: Output files. (line 357) +* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 5231) +* .toc file: Output files. (line 380) +* .toc file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 4930) * 10pt option: Document class options. - (line 380) + (line 498) * 11pt option: Document class options. - (line 380) + (line 498) * 12pt option: Document class options. - (line 380) -* @{...}: array. (line 974) -* [...] for optional arguments: Overview. (line 326) -* \ character starting commands: Overview. (line 326) -* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 4544) + (line 498) +* @{...}: array. (line 1107) +* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax. + (line 435) +* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax. + (line 435) +* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 4704) * \#: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) + (line 4491) * \$: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) + (line 4491) * \%: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) + (line 4491) * \&: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) -* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 4548) -* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1873) -* \(: Math formulas. (line 2981) -* \): Math formulas. (line 2981) -* \*: Math miscellany. (line 3830) -* \+: tabbing. (line 1865) + (line 4491) +* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 4708) +* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2013) +* \(: Math formulas. (line 3124) +* \): Math formulas. (line 3124) +* \*: Math miscellany. (line 3973) +* \+: tabbing. (line 2005) * \,: Spacing in math mode. - (line 3823) -* \-: tabbing. (line 1869) -* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 2335) -* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 4553) -* \/: \/. (line 4081) + (line 3966) +* \-: tabbing. (line 2009) +* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 2475) +* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 4713) +* \/: \/. (line 4229) * \:: Spacing in math mode. - (line 3821) + (line 3964) * \;: Spacing in math mode. - (line 3818) -* \<: tabbing. (line 1861) -* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 4557) -* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1855) -* \>: tabbing. (line 1859) + (line 3961) +* \<: tabbing. (line 2001) +* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 4717) +* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1995) +* \>: tabbing. (line 1999) * \> <1>: Spacing in math mode. - (line 3821) -* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1858) -* \@: \AT. (line 4060) -* \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes. (line 2514) -* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1888) -* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 1889) -* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 1889) + (line 3964) +* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1998) +* \@: \@. (line 4207) +* \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes. (line 2654) +* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2028) +* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2029) +* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2029) * \aa (aa): Non-English characters. - (line 4633) + (line 4793) * \AA (AA): Non-English characters. - (line 4633) -* \acute: Math accents. (line 3764) -* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 4790) -* \address: \address. (line 4925) -* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 4819) -* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 2802) -* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 2845) -* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 4112) + (line 4793) +* \acute: Math accents. (line 3907) +* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 4951) +* \address: \address. (line 5086) +* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 4980) +* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 2945) +* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 2988) +* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 4267) * \ae (ae): Non-English characters. - (line 4637) + (line 4797) * \AE (AE): Non-English characters. - (line 4637) -* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 3024) + (line 4797) +* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 3167) * \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. - (line 2738) + (line 2880) * \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. - (line 2741) -* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 1115) -* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 3027) -* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 4863) -* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 3030) -* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 3928) -* \angle: Math symbols. (line 3033) -* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 849) -* \approx: Math symbols. (line 3036) + (line 2883) +* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 1248) +* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 3170) +* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 5024) +* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 3173) +* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 4074) +* \angle: Math symbols. (line 3176) +* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 980) +* \approx: Math symbols. (line 3179) * \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. - (line 2744) -* \arccos: Math functions. (line 3655) -* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 3658) -* \arctan: Math functions. (line 3661) -* \arg: Math functions. (line 3664) -* \arraycolsep: array. (line 986) -* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 2046) -* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 2050) -* \ast: Math symbols. (line 3039) -* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 3042) -* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 3927) -* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 1889) -* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 4574) -* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 3045) + (line 2886) +* \arccos: Math functions. (line 3798) +* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 3801) +* \arctan: Math functions. (line 3804) +* \arg: Math functions. (line 3807) +* \arraycolsep: array. (line 1119) +* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 2186) +* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 2190) +* \ast: Math symbols. (line 3182) +* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 3185) +* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 4073) +* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 2029) +* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 4734) +* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 3188) * \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. - (line 4339) -* \bar: Math accents. (line 3767) + (line 4496) +* \bar: Math accents. (line 3910) * \baselineskip: Low-level font commands. - (line 649) + (line 780) * \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands. - (line 655) -* \begin: Environments. (line 930) -* \beta: Math symbols. (line 3048) -* \bf: Font styles. (line 546) -* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 485) -* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 2138) -* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 2177) -* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 2177) -* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 3051) -* \bigcap <1>: Math symbols. (line 3081) -* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 3054) -* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 3057) -* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 3060) -* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 3063) -* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 3066) + (line 786) +* \begin: Environments. (line 1062) +* \beta: Math symbols. (line 3191) +* \bf: Font styles. (line 677) +* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 616) +* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 2278) +* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 2317) +* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 2317) +* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 3194) +* \bigcap <1>: Math symbols. (line 3224) +* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 3197) +* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 3200) +* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 3203) +* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 3206) +* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 3209) * \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. - (line 4126) + (line 4282) * \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. - (line 4126) -* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 3075) -* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 3069) -* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 3072) -* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 3078) -* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 3084) -* \bmod: Math functions. (line 3667) -* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 2994) -* \bot: Math symbols. (line 3087) -* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 1229) -* \bottomnumber: figure. (line 1262) -* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 3090) -* \Box: Math symbols. (line 3093) -* \breve: Math accents. (line 3770) -* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 3096) -* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 4578) -* \cal: Font styles. (line 549) -* \cap: Math symbols. (line 3099) -* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 4548) -* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 4613) -* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 4623) -* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 4578) -* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 4561) -* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 4544) -* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 4582) -* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 4565) -* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 4586) -* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 4557) -* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 4608) -* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 4597) -* \capitalring: Accents. (line 4602) -* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 4608) -* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 4571) -* \caption: figure. (line 1222) -* \cc: \cc. (line 4938) -* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 3102) -* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 3834) -* \centering: \centering. (line 1010) -* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 821) -* \check: Math accents. (line 3773) -* \chi: Math symbols. (line 3105) -* \circ: Math symbols. (line 3108) -* \circle: \circle. (line 1616) -* \cite: \cite. (line 2155) -* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 2405) -* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 2413) -* \cline: \cline. (line 2088) -* \closing: \closing. (line 4948) -* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 3111) -* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 700) -* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 703) -* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 707) -* \cong: Math symbols. (line 3114) -* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 4813) -* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 3117) -* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 4364) -* \cos: Math functions. (line 3670) -* \cosh: Math functions. (line 3673) -* \cot: Math functions. (line 3676) -* \coth: Math functions. (line 3679) -* \csc: Math functions. (line 3682) -* \cup: Math symbols. (line 3120) -* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 4582) -* \dag: Text symbols. (line 4368) -* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 3123) -* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 1667) -* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 3126) -* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 3933) -* \day: \day \month \year. (line 2821) -* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 718) -* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 722) -* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 727) -* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 713) -* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 4371) -* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 3129) -* \ddot: Math accents. (line 3776) -* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 3838) -* \deg: Math functions. (line 3685) -* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 3132) -* \delta: Math symbols. (line 3135) -* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 2877) -* \det: Math functions. (line 3688) -* \dh (ae): Non-English characters. - (line 4641) -* \DH (AE): Non-English characters. - (line 4641) -* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 3138) -* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 3141) -* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 3144) -* \dim: Math functions. (line 3691) -* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 2999) -* \div: Math symbols. (line 3147) + (line 4282) +* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 3218) +* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 3212) +* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 3215) +* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 3221) +* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 3227) +* \bmod: Math functions. (line 3810) +* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 3137) +* \bot: Math symbols. (line 3230) +* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 1362) +* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 3233) +* \Box: Math symbols. (line 3236) +* \breve: Math accents. (line 3913) +* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 3239) +* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 4738) +* \cal: Font styles. (line 680) +* \cap: Math symbols. (line 3242) +* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 4708) +* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 4773) +* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 4783) +* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 4738) +* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 4721) +* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 4704) +* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 4742) +* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 4725) +* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 4746) +* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 4717) +* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 4768) +* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 4757) +* \capitalring: Accents. (line 4762) +* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 4768) +* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 4731) +* \caption: figure. (line 1355) +* \cc: \cc. (line 5099) +* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 3245) +* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 3977) +* \centering: \centering. (line 1143) +* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 952) +* \check: Math accents. (line 3916) +* \chi: Math symbols. (line 3248) +* \circ: Math symbols. (line 3251) +* \circle: \circle. (line 1753) +* \cite: \cite. (line 2295) +* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 2545) +* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 2553) +* \cline: \cline. (line 2228) +* \closing: \closing. (line 5109) +* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 3254) +* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 831) +* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 834) +* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 838) +* \cong: Math symbols. (line 3257) +* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 4974) +* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 3260) +* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 4521) +* \cos: Math functions. (line 3813) +* \cosh: Math functions. (line 3816) +* \cot: Math functions. (line 3819) +* \coth: Math functions. (line 3822) +* \csc: Math functions. (line 3825) +* \cup: Math symbols. (line 3263) +* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 4742) +* \dag: Text symbols. (line 4525) +* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 3266) +* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 1806) +* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 3269) +* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 4079) +* \day: \day \month \year. (line 2964) +* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 849) +* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 853) +* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 858) +* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 844) +* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 4528) +* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 3272) +* \ddot: Math accents. (line 3919) +* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 3981) +* \deg: Math functions. (line 3828) +* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 3275) +* \delta: Math symbols. (line 3278) +* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 3020) +* \det: Math functions. (line 3831) +* \dh (d): Non-English characters. + (line 4801) +* \DH (D): Non-English characters. + (line 4801) +* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 3281) +* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 3284) +* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 3287) +* \dim: Math functions. (line 3834) +* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 3142) +* \div: Math symbols. (line 3290) * \dj: Non-English characters. - (line 4645) + (line 4805) * \DJ: Non-English characters. - (line 4645) -* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 355) -* \documentclass, commands before: filecontents. (line 1287) -* \dot: Math accents. (line 3779) -* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 3150) -* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 4106) -* \dots: Text symbols. (line 4385) -* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 2054) -* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 3153) -* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 3156) -* \ell: Math symbols. (line 3159) -* \em: Font styles. (line 552) -* \emph: Font styles. (line 479) -* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 3162) -* \encl: \encl. (line 4958) -* \end: Environments. (line 930) -* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 2425) -* \enumi: enumerate. (line 1105) -* \enumii: enumerate. (line 1105) -* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 1105) -* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 1105) -* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 3165) -* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 3168) -* \eta: Math symbols. (line 3171) + (line 4805) +* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 459) +* \documentclass, commands before: filecontents. (line 1424) +* \dot: Math accents. (line 3922) +* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 3293) +* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 4261) +* \dots: Text symbols. (line 4545) +* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 2194) +* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 3296) +* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 3299) +* \ell: Math symbols. (line 3302) +* \em: Font styles. (line 683) +* \emph: Font styles. (line 610) +* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 3305) +* \encl: \encl. (line 5119) +* \end: Environments. (line 1062) +* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 2565) +* \enumi: enumerate. (line 1238) +* \enumii: enumerate. (line 1238) +* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 1238) +* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 1238) +* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 3308) +* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 3311) +* \eta: Math symbols. (line 3314) * \evensidemargin: Document class options. - (line 416) -* \exists: Math symbols. (line 3174) -* \exp: Math functions. (line 3694) -* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 2017) + (line 541) +* \exists: Math symbols. (line 3317) +* \exp: Math functions. (line 3837) +* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 2157) * \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. - (line 4176) + (line 4333) * \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). - (line 1661) + (line 1800) * \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox. - (line 4188) + (line 4345) * \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). - (line 1661) + (line 1800) * \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. - (line 4188) -* \fill: \hfill. (line 4042) -* \flat: Math symbols. (line 3177) -* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 1232) -* \floatsep: figure. (line 1247) -* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 734) + (line 4345) +* \fill: \hfill. (line 4189) +* \flat: Math symbols. (line 3320) +* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 1365) +* \floatsep: figure. (line 1380) +* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 865) * \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. - (line 2753) -* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes. (line 2514) + (line 2895) +* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes. (line 2654) * \fontencoding: Low-level font commands. - (line 614) + (line 745) * \fontfamily: Low-level font commands. - (line 617) + (line 748) * \fontseries: Low-level font commands. - (line 626) + (line 757) * \fontshape: Low-level font commands. - (line 637) + (line 768) * \fontsize: Low-level font commands. - (line 649) -* \footnote: \footnote. (line 2465) -* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 2480) + (line 780) +* \footnote: \footnote. (line 2605) +* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 2620) * \footnoterule: Footnote parameters. - (line 2522) + (line 2662) * \footnotesep: Footnote parameters. - (line 2528) -* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 2495) + (line 2668) +* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 2635) * \footskip: Page layout parameters. - (line 759) -* \forall: Math symbols. (line 3180) -* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 3842) -* \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 3841) -* \frame: \frame. (line 1682) + (line 890) +* \forall: Math symbols. (line 3323) +* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 3985) +* \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 3984) +* \frame: \frame. (line 1821) * \framebox: \framebox (picture). - (line 1653) + (line 1792) * \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. - (line 4176) -* \frown: Math symbols. (line 3183) -* \fussy: \fussy. (line 2347) -* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 3186) -* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 3189) -* \gcd: Math functions. (line 3697) -* \ge: Math symbols. (line 3192) -* \geq: Math symbols. (line 3195) -* \gets: Math symbols. (line 3198) -* \gg: Math symbols. (line 3201) -* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 4836) -* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 4839) -* \grave: Math accents. (line 3782) -* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 4377) -* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 4378) -* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 4379) -* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 4380) -* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 4586) -* \hat: Math accents. (line 3785) -* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 3204) + (line 4333) +* \frown: Math symbols. (line 3326) +* \fussy: \fussy. (line 2487) +* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 3329) +* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 3332) +* \gcd: Math functions. (line 3840) +* \ge: Math symbols. (line 3335) +* \geq: Math symbols. (line 3338) +* \gets: Math symbols. (line 3341) +* \gg: Math symbols. (line 3344) +* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 4997) +* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 5000) +* \grave: Math accents. (line 3925) +* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 4537) +* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 4538) +* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 4539) +* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 4540) +* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 4746) +* \hat: Math accents. (line 3928) +* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 3347) * \headheight: Page layout parameters. - (line 749) + (line 880) * \headsep: Page layout parameters. - (line 754) -* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 3207) -* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 2875) -* \hfill: \hfill. (line 4039) -* \hline: \hline. (line 2099) -* \hom: Math functions. (line 3700) -* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3210) -* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3213) -* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 4099) + (line 885) +* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 3350) +* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 3018) +* \hfill: \hfill. (line 4186) +* \hline: \hline. (line 2239) +* \hom: Math functions. (line 3843) +* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3353) +* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3356) +* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 4254) * \hsize: Page layout parameters. - (line 799) -* \hspace: \hspace. (line 4024) -* \huge: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 2365) -* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 4590) -* \iff: Math symbols. (line 3216) + (line 930) +* \hspace: \hspace. (line 4171) +* \huge: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 2505) +* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 4750) +* \iff: Math symbols. (line 3359) * \ij (ij): Non-English characters. - (line 4649) + (line 4809) * \IJ (IJ): Non-English characters. - (line 4649) -* \Im: Math symbols. (line 3219) -* \imath: Math accents. (line 3788) -* \in: Math symbols. (line 3222) -* \include: \include. (line 4720) -* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 4738) -* \indent: \indent. (line 2900) -* \index: Indexes. (line 4852) -* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 4855) -* \inf: Math functions. (line 3703) -* \infty: Math symbols. (line 3225) -* \input: \input. (line 4752) -* \int: Math symbols. (line 3228) -* \intextsep: figure. (line 1251) -* \iota: Math symbols. (line 3231) -* \it: Font styles. (line 555) -* \item: description. (line 1041) -* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 1095) -* \item <2>: itemize. (line 1374) -* \itemindent: itemize. (line 1417) -* \itemsep: itemize. (line 1439) -* \itshape: Font styles. (line 476) -* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 4593) -* \jmath: Math accents. (line 3791) -* \Join: Math symbols. (line 3234) -* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 4597) -* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 3237) -* \ker: Math functions. (line 3706) -* \kill: tabbing. (line 1893) + (line 4809) +* \Im: Math symbols. (line 3362) +* \imath: Math accents. (line 3931) +* \in: Math symbols. (line 3365) +* \include: \include. (line 4880) +* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 4898) +* \indent: \indent. (line 3043) +* \index: Indexes. (line 5013) +* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 5016) +* \inf: Math functions. (line 3846) +* \infty: Math symbols. (line 3368) +* \input: \input. (line 4912) +* \int: Math symbols. (line 3371) +* \intextsep: figure. (line 1384) +* \iota: Math symbols. (line 3374) +* \it: Font styles. (line 686) +* \item: description. (line 1174) +* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 1228) +* \item <2>: itemize. (line 1511) +* \itemindent: itemize. (line 1554) +* \itemsep: itemize. (line 1576) +* \itshape: Font styles. (line 607) +* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 4753) +* \jmath: Math accents. (line 3934) +* \Join: Math symbols. (line 3377) +* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 4757) +* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 3380) +* \ker: Math functions. (line 3849) +* \kill: tabbing. (line 2033) * \l (/l): Non-English characters. - (line 4653) + (line 4813) * \L (/L): Non-English characters. - (line 4653) -* \label: \label. (line 876) -* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 1109) -* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 1109) -* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 1109) -* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 1109) -* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 1397) -* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 1397) -* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 1397) -* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 1397) -* \labelsep: itemize. (line 1420) -* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 1423) -* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 3240) -* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 3243) -* \land: Math symbols. (line 3246) -* \langle: Math symbols. (line 3249) -* \large: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \Large: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 4374) -* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 3252) -* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 3255) -* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 3258) -* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 4384) -* \le: Math symbols. (line 3261) -* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 3264) -* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 3844) -* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3266) -* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3269) -* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 1148) -* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 3272) -* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 3275) -* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 1404) -* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 1404) -* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 1404) -* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 1404) -* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 1404) -* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 1404) -* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 1404) -* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3278) -* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3281) -* \leq: Math symbols. (line 3284) -* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 3287) -* \lg: Math functions. (line 3709) -* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 3290) -* \lim: Math functions. (line 3712) -* \liminf: Math functions. (line 3715) -* \limsup: Math functions. (line 3718) -* \line: \line. (line 1693) + (line 4813) +* \label: \label. (line 1007) +* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 1242) +* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 1242) +* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 1242) +* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 1242) +* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 1534) +* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 1534) +* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 1534) +* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 1534) +* \labelsep: itemize. (line 1557) +* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 1560) +* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 3383) +* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 3386) +* \land: Math symbols. (line 3389) +* \langle: Math symbols. (line 3392) +* \large: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \Large: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 4531) +* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 4534) +* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 3395) +* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 3398) +* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 3401) +* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 4544) +* \le: Math symbols. (line 3404) +* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 3407) +* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 3987) +* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3409) +* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3412) +* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 1281) +* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 3415) +* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 3418) +* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 1541) +* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 1541) +* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 1541) +* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 1541) +* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 1541) +* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 1541) +* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 1541) +* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3421) +* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3424) +* \leq: Math symbols. (line 3427) +* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 3430) +* \lg: Math functions. (line 3852) +* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 3433) +* \lim: Math functions. (line 3855) +* \liminf: Math functions. (line 3858) +* \limsup: Math functions. (line 3861) +* \line: \line. (line 1832) * \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. - (line 2381) + (line 2521) * \linespread: Low-level font commands. - (line 662) -* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 1708) + (line 793) +* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 1846) * \linewidth: Page layout parameters. - (line 764) -* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 4780) -* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 4780) -* \listparindent: itemize. (line 1426) -* \ll: Math symbols. (line 3293) -* \ln: Math functions. (line 3721) -* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 3296) -* \location: \location. (line 4967) -* \log: Math functions. (line 3724) -* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3299) -* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3302) -* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 3305) -* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3308) -* \lor: Math symbols. (line 3311) -* \lq: Text symbols. (line 4390) -* \makebox: \makebox. (line 4208) -* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 1627) -* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 4834) -* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 4849) -* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 4975) -* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 3922) -* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 3314) -* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 2924) -* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 2951) -* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 2955) -* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 2959) -* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 3995) -* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 4002) -* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 509) -* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 525) -* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 522) -* \mathring: Math accents. (line 3794) -* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 506) -* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 512) -* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 515) -* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 527) -* \max: Math functions. (line 3727) -* \mbox: \mbox. (line 4169) -* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 482) + (line 895) +* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 4940) +* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 4940) +* \listparindent: itemize. (line 1563) +* \ll: Math symbols. (line 3436) +* \ln: Math functions. (line 3864) +* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 3439) +* \location: \location. (line 5128) +* \log: Math functions. (line 3867) +* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 3442) +* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3445) +* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 3448) +* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3451) +* \lor: Math symbols. (line 3454) +* \lq: Text symbols. (line 4550) +* \makebox: \makebox. (line 4365) +* \makebox (for 'picture'): \makebox (picture). (line 1765) +* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 4995) +* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 5010) +* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 5136) +* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 4068) +* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 3457) +* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 3067) +* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 3094) +* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 3098) +* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 3102) +* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 4142) +* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 4149) +* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 640) +* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 656) +* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 653) +* \mathring: Math accents. (line 3937) +* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 637) +* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 643) +* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 646) +* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 658) +* \max: Math functions. (line 3870) +* \mbox: \mbox. (line 4326) +* \mbox, and LR mode: Modes. (line 4041) +* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 613) * \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. - (line 4130) + (line 4287) * \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. - (line 4130) -* \mho: Math symbols. (line 3317) -* \mid: Math symbols. (line 3319) -* \min: Math functions. (line 3730) -* \models: Math symbols. (line 3322) -* \month: \day \month \year. (line 2821) -* \mp: Math symbols. (line 3325) -* \mu: Math symbols. (line 3328) -* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 2066) -* \multiput: \multiput. (line 1732) -* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 3331) -* \name: \name. (line 4983) -* \natural: Math symbols. (line 3334) -* \ne: Math symbols. (line 3337) -* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 3340) -* \neg: Math symbols. (line 3343) -* \neq: Math symbols. (line 3346) + (line 4287) +* \mho: Math symbols. (line 3460) +* \mid: Math symbols. (line 3462) +* \min: Math functions. (line 3873) +* \models: Math symbols. (line 3465) +* \month: \day \month \year. (line 2964) +* \mp: Math symbols. (line 3468) +* \mu: Math symbols. (line 3471) +* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 2206) +* \multiput: \multiput. (line 1870) +* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 3474) +* \name: \name. (line 5144) +* \natural: Math symbols. (line 3477) +* \ne: Math symbols. (line 3480) +* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 3483) +* \neg: Math symbols. (line 3486) +* \neq: Math symbols. (line 3489) * \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 2543) -* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 2579) + (line 2683) +* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 2721) * \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 2618) -* \newfont: \newfont. (line 2685) -* \newlength: \newlength. (line 2594) -* \newline: \newline. (line 2328) -* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 4049) -* \newpage: \newpage. (line 2419) -* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 2608) -* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 2657) -* \newtie: Accents. (line 4608) + (line 2760) +* \newfont: \newfont. (line 2827) +* \newlength: \newlength. (line 2736) +* \newline: \newline. (line 2468) +* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 4196) +* \newpage: \newpage. (line 2559) +* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 2750) +* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 2799) +* \newtie: Accents. (line 4768) * \ng: Non-English characters. - (line 4657) + (line 4817) * \NG: Non-English characters. - (line 4657) -* \ni: Math symbols. (line 3349) -* \nocite: \nocite. (line 2169) -* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 4784) -* \noindent: \noindent. (line 2911) + (line 4817) +* \ni: Math symbols. (line 3492) +* \nocite: \nocite. (line 2309) +* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 595) +* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 595) +* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 4945) +* \noindent: \noindent. (line 3054) * \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. - (line 2381) -* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 1143) + (line 2521) +* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 1276) * \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. - (line 2440) -* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 503) -* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 2939) -* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \not: Math symbols. (line 3352) -* \notin: Math symbols. (line 3355) -* \nu: Math symbols. (line 3358) -* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 3361) + (line 2580) +* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 634) +* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 3082) +* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \not: Math symbols. (line 3495) +* \notin: Math symbols. (line 3498) +* \nu: Math symbols. (line 3501) +* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 3504) * \o (/o): Non-English characters. - (line 4661) + (line 4821) * \O (/O): Non-English characters. - (line 4661) + (line 4821) * \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr. - (line 2319) + (line 2459) * \oddsidemargin: Document class options. - (line 416) -* \odot: Math symbols. (line 3364) + (line 541) +* \odot: Math symbols. (line 3507) * \oe (oe): Non-English characters. - (line 4665) + (line 4825) * \OE (OE): Non-English characters. - (line 4665) -* \oint: Math symbols. (line 3367) -* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 531) -* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 3370) -* \omega: Math symbols. (line 3373) -* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 3376) -* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 684) -* \opening: \opening. (line 4991) -* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 3379) -* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 3382) -* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 3385) -* \oval: \oval. (line 1742) -* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 3849) -* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 3853) -* \owns: Math symbols. (line 3388) -* \P: Text symbols. (line 4393) + (line 4825) +* \oint: Math symbols. (line 3510) +* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 662) +* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 3513) +* \omega: Math symbols. (line 3516) +* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 3519) +* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 815) +* \opening: \opening. (line 5152) +* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 3522) +* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 3525) +* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 3528) +* \oval: \oval. (line 1880) +* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 3992) +* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 3996) +* \owns: Math symbols. (line 3531) +* \P: Text symbols. (line 4553) * \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. - (line 2440) -* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 3948) -* \pageref: \pageref. (line 908) -* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 3972) -* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 826) -* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 3391) -* \parbox: \parbox. (line 4233) -* \parindent: minipage. (line 1529) -* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 2900) -* \parsep: itemize. (line 1444) -* \parskip: \parskip. (line 2918) -* \parskip example: itemize. (line 1460) -* \part: Sectioning. (line 820) -* \partial: Math symbols. (line 3394) -* \partopsep: itemize. (line 1454) -* \perp: Math symbols. (line 3397) -* \phi: Math symbols. (line 3400) -* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 3403) -* \pi: Math symbols. (line 3406) -* \pm: Math symbols. (line 3409) -* \pmod: Math functions. (line 3733) -* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 1899) -* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 1900) -* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 4397) -* \Pr: Math functions. (line 3736) -* \prec: Math symbols. (line 3412) -* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 3415) -* \prime: Math symbols. (line 3418) -* \prod: Math symbols. (line 3421) -* \propto: Math symbols. (line 3424) -* \protect: \protect. (line 2699) -* \ps: \ps. (line 5003) -* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 3427) -* \psi: Math symbols. (line 3430) -* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 1902) -* \put: \put. (line 1766) -* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 4401) -* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 4402) -* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 4602) -* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 743) -* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 1361) -* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 1335) -* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 4273) -* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 3433) -* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 3436) -* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 3439) -* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 3442) -* \Re: Math symbols. (line 3445) -* \ref: \ref. (line 918) -* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 2808) + (line 2580) +* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 4094) +* \pageref: \pageref. (line 1040) +* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 4119) +* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 957) +* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 3534) +* \parbox: \parbox. (line 4390) +* \parindent: minipage. (line 1666) +* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 3043) +* \parsep: itemize. (line 1581) +* \parskip: \parskip. (line 3061) +* \parskip example: itemize. (line 1597) +* \part: Sectioning. (line 951) +* \partial: Math symbols. (line 3537) +* \partopsep: itemize. (line 1591) +* \perp: Math symbols. (line 3540) +* \phi: Math symbols. (line 3543) +* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 3546) +* \pi: Math symbols. (line 3549) +* \pm: Math symbols. (line 3552) +* \pmod: Math functions. (line 3876) +* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 2039) +* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 2040) +* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 4557) +* \Pr: Math functions. (line 3879) +* \prec: Math symbols. (line 3555) +* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 3558) +* \prime: Math symbols. (line 3561) +* \prod: Math symbols. (line 3564) +* \propto: Math symbols. (line 3567) +* \protect: \protect. (line 2841) +* \ps: \ps. (line 5164) +* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 3570) +* \psi: Math symbols. (line 3573) +* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 2042) +* \put: \put. (line 1904) +* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 4561) +* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 4562) +* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 4762) +* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 874) +* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 1498) +* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 1472) +* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 4430) +* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 3576) +* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 3579) +* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 3582) +* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 3585) +* \Re: Math symbols. (line 3588) +* \ref: \ref. (line 1050) +* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 2951) * \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 2618) + (line 2760) * \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr. - (line 2319) -* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 2939) -* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 3448) -* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 3451) -* \rho: Math symbols. (line 3454) -* \right: Math miscellany. (line 3845) -* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3457) -* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3460) -* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 3463) -* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 3466) -* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 3469) -* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 1430) -* \rm: Font styles. (line 558) -* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 473) + (line 2459) +* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 3082) +* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 3591) +* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 3594) +* \rho: Math symbols. (line 3597) +* \right: Math miscellany. (line 3988) +* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3600) +* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 3603) +* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 3606) +* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 3609) +* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 3612) +* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 1567) +* \rm: Font styles. (line 689) +* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 604) * \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. - (line 2747) -* \roman <1>: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. - (line 2750) -* \rq: Text symbols. (line 4405) -* \rule: \rule. (line 4678) -* \S: Text symbols. (line 4408) -* \savebox: \savebox. (line 4289) -* \sbox: \sbox. (line 4301) -* \sc: Font styles. (line 561) -* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \scshape: Font styles. (line 497) -* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 3472) -* \sec: Math functions. (line 3739) -* \section: Sectioning. (line 823) -* \seename: Indexes. (line 4863) + (line 2889) +* \Roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + (line 2892) +* \rq: Text symbols. (line 4565) +* \rule: \rule. (line 4838) +* \S: Text symbols. (line 4568) +* \savebox: \savebox. (line 4446) +* \sbox: \sbox. (line 4458) +* \sc: Font styles. (line 692) +* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \scshape: Font styles. (line 628) +* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 3615) +* \sec: Math functions. (line 3882) +* \section: Sectioning. (line 954) +* \seename: Indexes. (line 5024) * \selectfont: Low-level font commands. - (line 668) -* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 2792) -* \setlength: \setlength. (line 2838) -* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 3475) -* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 2851) -* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 2859) -* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 2867) -* \sf: Font styles. (line 564) -* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 494) -* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 3478) -* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 1774) -* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 3481) -* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 3484) -* \signature: \signature. (line 5009) -* \sim: Math symbols. (line 3487) -* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 3490) -* \sin: Math functions. (line 3742) -* \sinh: Math functions. (line 3745) -* \sl: Font styles. (line 567) -* \slshape: Font styles. (line 491) -* \small: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 3493) + (line 799) +* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 2935) +* \setlength: \setlength. (line 2981) +* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 3618) +* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 2994) +* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 3002) +* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 3010) +* \sf: Font styles. (line 695) +* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 625) +* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 3621) +* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 1914) +* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 3624) +* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 3627) +* \signature: \signature. (line 5170) +* \sim: Math symbols. (line 3630) +* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 3633) +* \sin: Math functions. (line 3885) +* \sinh: Math functions. (line 3888) +* \sl: Font styles. (line 698) +* \slshape: Font styles. (line 622) +* \small: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 3636) * \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. - (line 4134) + (line 4292) * \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. - (line 4134) -* \smile: Math symbols. (line 3496) -* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 4049) -* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 3499) -* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 3502) -* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 3505) -* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math miscellany. (line 3856) -* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 3508) -* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 3511) -* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 3514) -* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 3517) + (line 4292) +* \smile: Math symbols. (line 3639) +* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 4196) +* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 3642) +* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 3645) +* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 3648) +* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math miscellany. (line 3999) +* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 3651) +* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 3654) +* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 3657) +* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 3660) * \ss (ss): Non-English characters. - (line 4669) + (line 4829) * \SS (SS): Non-English characters. - (line 4669) -* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 3862) -* \star: Math symbols. (line 3520) -* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 5015) -* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 2815) -* \stop: Command line. (line 5079) -* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 5022) -* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 827) -* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 824) -* \subset: Math symbols. (line 3523) -* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 3526) -* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 825) -* \succ: Math symbols. (line 3529) -* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 3532) -* \sum: Math symbols. (line 3535) -* \sup: Math functions. (line 3748) -* \supset: Math symbols. (line 3538) -* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 3541) -* \surd: Math symbols. (line 3544) -* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 3547) + (line 4829) +* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 4005) +* \star: Math symbols. (line 3663) +* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 5176) +* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 2958) +* \stop: Command line. (line 5243) +* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 5183) +* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 958) +* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 955) +* \subset: Math symbols. (line 3666) +* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 3669) +* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 956) +* \succ: Math symbols. (line 3672) +* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 3675) +* \sum: Math symbols. (line 3678) +* \sup: Math functions. (line 3891) +* \supset: Math symbols. (line 3681) +* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 3684) +* \surd: Math symbols. (line 3687) +* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 3690) * \symbol: Reserved characters. - (line 4348) -* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 4608) -* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 4049) -* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 1907) -* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 2058) -* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 4770) -* \tan: Math functions. (line 3751) -* \tanh: Math functions. (line 3754) -* \tau: Math symbols. (line 3550) -* \telephone: \telephone. (line 5029) -* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 4411) -* \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4449) -* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 4414) -* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 4417) -* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 4420) -* \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 4423) -* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 4426) -* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 4429) -* \textbf: Font styles. (line 485) -* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 4432) -* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 4435) -* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 4438) -* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 4441) -* \textcapitalwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4448) -* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 4444) -* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4447) -* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 4365) -* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 4454) -* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 4457) -* \textdollar (or '$'): Text symbols. (line 4460) -* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 4386) -* \textemdash (or '---'): Text symbols. (line 4463) -* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 4466) -* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 4469) -* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 4472) -* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 1256) -* \textfraction: figure. (line 1236) -* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 4475) + (line 4505) +* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 4768) +* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 4196) +* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 2047) +* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 2198) +* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 4930) +* \tan: Math functions. (line 3894) +* \tanh: Math functions. (line 3897) +* \tau: Math symbols. (line 3693) +* \telephone: \telephone. (line 5190) +* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 4571) +* \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4609) +* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 4574) +* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 4577) +* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 4580) +* \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 4583) +* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 4586) +* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 4589) +* \textbf: Font styles. (line 616) +* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 4592) +* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 4595) +* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 4598) +* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 4601) +* \textcapitalwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4608) +* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 4604) +* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 4607) +* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 4522) +* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 4614) +* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 4617) +* \textdollar (or '$'): Text symbols. (line 4620) +* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 4546) +* \textemdash (or '---'): Text symbols. (line 4623) +* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 4626) +* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 4629) +* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 4632) +* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 1389) +* \textfraction: figure. (line 1369) +* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 4635) * \textheight: Page layout parameters. - (line 772) -* \textit: Font styles. (line 476) -* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 4481) -* \textless: Text symbols. (line 4478) -* \textmd: Font styles. (line 482) -* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 503) -* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 4484) -* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 4485) -* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 4394) -* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 4488) -* \textquestiondown (or '?`'): Text symbols. (line 4491) -* \textquotedblleft (or '``'): Text symbols. (line 4494) -* \textquotedblright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 4497) -* \textquoteleft (or '`'): Text symbols. (line 4500) -* \textquoteright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 4503) -* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 4506) -* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 4507) -* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 4510) -* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 4513) -* \textrm: Font styles. (line 473) -* \textsc: Font styles. (line 497) -* \textsf: Font styles. (line 494) -* \textsl: Font styles. (line 491) -* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 4398) -* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 4516) -* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 4519) -* \texttt: Font styles. (line 500) -* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 4522) -* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 4525) -* \textup: Font styles. (line 488) -* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 4528) + (line 903) +* \textit: Font styles. (line 607) +* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 4641) +* \textless: Text symbols. (line 4638) +* \textmd: Font styles. (line 613) +* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 634) +* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 4644) +* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 4645) +* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 4554) +* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 4648) +* \textquestiondown (or '?`'): Text symbols. (line 4651) +* \textquotedblleft (or '``'): Text symbols. (line 4654) +* \textquotedblright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 4657) +* \textquoteleft (or '`'): Text symbols. (line 4660) +* \textquoteright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 4663) +* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 4666) +* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 4667) +* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 4670) +* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 4673) +* \textrm: Font styles. (line 604) +* \textsc: Font styles. (line 628) +* \textsf: Font styles. (line 625) +* \textsl: Font styles. (line 622) +* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 4558) +* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 4676) +* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 4679) +* \texttt: Font styles. (line 631) +* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 4682) +* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 4685) +* \textup: Font styles. (line 619) +* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 4688) * \textwidth: Page layout parameters. - (line 779) + (line 910) * \th (th): Non-English characters. - (line 4673) + (line 4833) * \TH (TH): Non-English characters. - (line 4673) -* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 3937) -* \theta: Math symbols. (line 3553) -* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 1718) -* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 1725) -* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 4075) -* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 4008) -* \tilde: Math accents. (line 3797) -* \times: Math symbols. (line 3556) -* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 588) -* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 3941) -* \to: Math symbols. (line 3559) -* \today: \today. (line 4697) -* \top: Math symbols. (line 3562) -* \topfraction: figure. (line 1241) + (line 4833) +* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 4083) +* \theta: Math symbols. (line 3696) +* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 1856) +* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 1863) +* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 4222) +* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 4155) +* \tilde: Math accents. (line 3940) +* \times: Math symbols. (line 3699) +* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 719) +* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 4087) +* \to: Math symbols. (line 3702) +* \today: \today. (line 4857) +* \top: Math symbols. (line 3705) +* \topfraction: figure. (line 1374) * \topmargin: Page layout parameters. - (line 803) -* \topnumber: figure. (line 1266) -* \topsep: itemize. (line 1448) + (line 934) +* \topsep: itemize. (line 1585) * \topskip: Page layout parameters. - (line 810) -* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 2879) -* \totalnumber: figure. (line 1270) -* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 3565) -* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 3568) -* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 3571) -* \tt: Font styles. (line 570) -* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 500) -* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 690) -* \typein: \typein. (line 5040) -* \typeout: \typeout. (line 5054) -* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 4613) -* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 2994) -* \underbar: Accents. (line 4616) -* \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 3866) -* \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 3869) -* \unitlength: picture. (line 1550) -* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 3574) -* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 3577) -* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 3580) -* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 3583) -* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 3586) -* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 3589) -* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 3592) -* \upshape: Font styles. (line 488) -* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 3595) -* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 3598) -* \usebox: \usebox. (line 4313) -* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 2767) + (line 941) +* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 3022) +* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 3708) +* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 3711) +* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 3714) +* \tt: Font styles. (line 701) +* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 631) +* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 821) +* \typein: \typein. (line 5201) +* \typeout: \typeout. (line 5215) +* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 4773) +* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 3137) +* \underbar: Accents. (line 4776) +* \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 4009) +* \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 4012) +* \unitlength: picture. (line 1687) +* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 3717) +* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 3720) +* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 3723) +* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 3726) +* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 3729) +* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 3732) +* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 3735) +* \upshape: Font styles. (line 619) +* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 3738) +* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 3741) +* \usebox: \usebox. (line 4470) +* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 2910) * \usefont: Low-level font commands. - (line 672) + (line 803) * \usepackage: Document class options. - (line 435) -* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 4623) -* \value: \value. (line 2778) -* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 3601) -* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 3604) -* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 3607) -* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 3610) -* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 3613) -* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 3616) -* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 3619) -* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 3874) -* \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 3875) -* \vec: Math accents. (line 3800) -* \vector: \vector. (line 1793) -* \vee: Math symbols. (line 3622) -* \verb: \verb. (line 2261) -* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 3625) -* \vert: Math symbols. (line 3628) -* \vfill: \vfill. (line 4142) -* \vline: \vline. (line 2106) -* \vspace: \vspace. (line 4149) -* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 3631) -* \widehat: Math accents. (line 3803) -* \widehat <1>: Math accents. (line 3806) -* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 2873) -* \wp: Math symbols. (line 3634) -* \wr: Math symbols. (line 3637) -* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 3640) -* \xi: Math symbols. (line 3643) -* \year: \day \month \year. (line 2821) -* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 3646) -* \[: Math formulas. (line 2981) -* \\ (for 'array'): array. (line 971) -* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 1003) -* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1135) -* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 1354) -* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 1788) -* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1852) -* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 1328) -* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 4915) -* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 1969) -* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 2289) -* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 3928) -* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 3942) -* \\ force line break: \\. (line 2309) -* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1140) -* \]: Math formulas. (line 2981) + (line 559) +* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 4783) +* \value: \value. (line 2921) +* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 3744) +* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 3747) +* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 3750) +* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 3753) +* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 3756) +* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 3759) +* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 3762) +* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 4017) +* \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 4018) +* \vec: Math accents. (line 3943) +* \vector: \vector. (line 1933) +* \vee: Math symbols. (line 3765) +* \verb: \verb. (line 2401) +* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 3768) +* \vert: Math symbols. (line 3771) +* \vfill: \vfill. (line 4299) +* \vline: \vline. (line 2246) +* \vspace: \vspace. (line 4306) +* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 3774) +* \widehat: Math accents. (line 3946) +* \widehat <1>: Math accents. (line 3949) +* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 3016) +* \wp: Math symbols. (line 3777) +* \wr: Math symbols. (line 3780) +* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 3783) +* \xi: Math symbols. (line 3786) +* \year: \day \month \year. (line 2964) +* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 3789) +* \[: Math formulas. (line 3124) +* \\ (for 'array'): array. (line 1104) +* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 1136) +* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1268) +* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 1491) +* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 1928) +* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1992) +* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 1465) +* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 5076) +* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 2109) +* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 2429) +* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 4074) +* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 4088) +* \\ force line break: \\. (line 2449) +* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 1273) +* \]: Math formulas. (line 3124) * \^: Reserved characters. - (line 4344) -* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 4561) + (line 4501) +* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 4721) * \_: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) -* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 4565) -* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1879) + (line 4491) +* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 4725) +* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 2019) * \{: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) -* \|: Math symbols. (line 3021) + (line 4491) +* \|: Math symbols. (line 3164) * \}: Reserved characters. - (line 4334) + (line 4491) * \~: Reserved characters. - (line 4344) -* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 4571) + (line 4501) +* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 4731) * ^: Subscripts & superscripts. - (line 3007) + (line 3150) * _: Subscripts & superscripts. - (line 3007) -* {...} for required arguments: Overview. (line 326) + (line 3150) +* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax. + (line 435) * a4paper option: Document class options. - (line 385) + (line 503) * a5paper option: Document class options. - (line 385) -* abstract environment: abstract. (line 940) -* array environment: array. (line 951) -* article class: Document classes. (line 362) + (line 503) +* abstract environment: abstract. (line 1072) +* array environment: array. (line 1083) +* article class: Document classes. (line 464) * b5paper option: Document class options. - (line 385) -* book class: Document classes. (line 362) -* center environment: center. (line 996) -* description environment: description. (line 1033) -* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 1056) -* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 2971) -* document environment: document. (line 1076) + (line 503) +* book class: Document classes. (line 464) +* bottomnumber: figure. (line 1395) +* center environment: center. (line 1129) +* clock option to 'slides' class: Document class options. + (line 556) +* dbltopnumber: figure. (line 1399) +* description environment: description. (line 1166) +* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 1189) +* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 3114) +* document environment: document. (line 1209) * draft option: Document class options. - (line 390) -* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 1082) -* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 1120) -* equation environment: equation. (line 1155) -* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 2971) + (line 508) +* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 347) +* dvips command: Output files. (line 347) +* dvitype command: Output files. (line 347) +* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 1215) +* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 1253) +* equation environment: equation. (line 1288) +* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 3114) +* etex command: TeX engines. (line 395) * executivepaper option: Document class options. - (line 385) -* figure: figure. (line 1168) -* filecontents: filecontents. (line 1279) + (line 503) +* figure: figure. (line 1301) +* filecontents: filecontents. (line 1416) * final option: Document class options. - (line 390) + (line 508) +* first-latex-doc document: About this document. + (line 274) * fleqn option: Document class options. - (line 390) -* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 1322) -* flushright environment: flushright. (line 1348) -* indexspace: Indexes. (line 4875) -* itemize environment: itemize. (line 1374) + (line 508) +* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 1459) +* flushright environment: flushright. (line 1485) +* home page: About this document. + (line 247) +* indexspace: Indexes. (line 5036) +* itemize environment: itemize. (line 1511) * landscape option: Document class options. - (line 390) -* latex command: Overview. (line 293) + (line 508) +* latex command: Output files. (line 347) +* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document. + (line 271) * email address: About this document. - (line 253) + (line 258) * legalpaper option: Document class options. - (line 385) + (line 503) * leqno option: Document class options. - (line 390) -* letter: letter. (line 1476) -* letter class: Document classes. (line 362) + (line 508) +* letter: letter. (line 1613) +* letter class: Document classes. (line 464) * letterpaper option: Document class options. - (line 385) -* list: list. (line 1481) -* lR box: picture. (line 1606) -* lrbox: lrbox. (line 4198) -* lualatex command: Overview. (line 307) -* math environment: math. (line 1506) -* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 2971) -* minipage environment: minipage. (line 1518) + (line 503) +* list: list. (line 1618) +* lR box: picture. (line 1743) +* lrbox: lrbox. (line 4355) +* lshort document: About this document. + (line 281) +* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 412) +* math environment: math. (line 1643) +* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 3114) +* minipage environment: minipage. (line 1655) * notitlepage option: Document class options. - (line 390) + (line 508) * onecolumn option: Document class options. - (line 410) + (line 535) * oneside option: Document class options. - (line 410) + (line 535) * openany option: Document class options. - (line 410) + (line 535) * openbib option: Document class options. - (line 390) + (line 508) * openright option: Document class options. - (line 410) -* pdflatex command: Overview. (line 301) -* picture: picture. (line 1546) -* printindex: Indexes. (line 4871) -* quotation: quotation. (line 1804) -* quote: quote. (line 1819) -* report class: Document classes. (line 362) -* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 859) -* slides class: Document classes. (line 362) -* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 1834) -* table: table. (line 1925) -* tabular environment: tabular. (line 1952) -* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 4360) -* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 2113) -* theorem environment: theorem. (line 2214) -* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 2227) + (line 535) +* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 357) +* picture: picture. (line 1683) +* printindex: Indexes. (line 5032) +* quotation: quotation. (line 1944) +* quote: quote. (line 1959) +* report class: Document classes. (line 464) +* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 990) +* slides class: Document classes. (line 464) +* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 1974) +* table: table. (line 2065) +* tabular environment: tabular. (line 2092) +* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 4517) +* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 2253) +* theorem environment: theorem. (line 2354) +* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 2367) * titlepage option: Document class options. - (line 390) + (line 508) +* topnumber: figure. (line 1403) +* totalnumber: figure. (line 1407) * twocolumn option: Document class options. - (line 410) + (line 535) * twoside option: Document class options. - (line 410) -* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 2244) -* verse environment: verse. (line 2278) -* xelatex command: Overview. (line 310) + (line 535) +* usrguide official documentation: About this document. + (line 277) +* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 2384) +* verse environment: verse. (line 2418) +* xdvi command: Output files. (line 347) +* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 421) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml index b83ec51dae9..ed9dcb8d7ef 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml @@ -1,35 +1,36 @@ - + \input texinfo - + latex2e.info -May 2014 -&latex;2e reference manual (May 2014) +May 2015 +&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (May 2015) + - - + + + - + + - - - + This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of May 2014. +document preparation system, version of May 2015. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -38,13 +39,13 @@ George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and -&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway -and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as -&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was -directly copied). +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by +L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users +Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no +text was directly copied). Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, -2014 Karl Berry.&linebreak; +2014, 2015 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. @@ -78,8 +79,8 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -&latex;: An unofficial reference manual -May 2014 +&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual +May 2015 http://home.gna.org/latexrefman 0pt plus 1filll @@ -90,17 +91,14 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. TopAbout this document(dir) -&latex;2e +&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual -This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version as of May 2014. It is -intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of -&latex; for many years. +This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of +May 2015) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. About this document
      Bug reporting, etc.
       
      Overview
      What is &latex;?
      -
      Starting & ending
      The standard beginning and end of a document.
       
      Document classes
      Some of the various classes available.
       
      Fonts
      Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
       
      Layout
      Controlling the page layout.
      @@ -110,7 +108,7 @@ intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of
       
      Line breaking
      Influencing line breaks.
       
      Page breaking
      Influencing page breaks.
       
      Footnotes
      How to produce footnotes.
      -
      Definitions
      Define your own commands etc.
      +
      Definitions
      Define your own commands, etc.
       
      Counters
      Internal counters used by &latex;.
       
      Lengths
      The length commands.
       
      Making paragraphs
      Paragraph commands.
      @@ -122,7 +120,7 @@ intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of
       
      Special insertions
      Inserting reserved and special characters.
       
      Splitting the input
      Dealing with big files by splitting.
       
      Front/back matter
      Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
      -
      Letters
      The letter class.
      +
      Letters
      The letter class.
       
      Terminal input/output
      User interaction.
       
      Command line
      System-independent command-line behavior.
       
      Document templates
      Starter templates for various document classes.
      @@ -135,196 +133,367 @@ intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of
       About this documentOverviewTopTop
       About this document
       
      -Knuth, Donald E.
      -Lamport, Leslie
      -&latex; Project team
      -The &latex; document preparation system is implemented as a macro
      -package for Donald E. Knuth&textrsquo;s &tex; typesetting program.
      -&latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now
      -maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org).
      -The official documentation written by the &latex; project is
      -available from their web site.
      -
      -bug reporting
      -reporting bugs
      -latexrefman-discuss&arobase;gna.org email address
      -The present document is completely unofficial and has not been
      -reviewed by the &latex; maintainers.  Do not send bug reports or
      -anything else about this document to them.  Instead, please send all
      -comments to latexrefman-discuss&arobase;gna.org.
      -
      -The home page for this document is
      +bug reporting
      +reporting bugs
      +http://home.gna.org/latexrefman home page
      +This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document
      +preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex;
      +typesetting program (Overview).  This document&textrsquo;s home page is
       http://home.gna.org/latexrefman.  That page has links to the
      -current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other
      -infrastructure.
      -
      -Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about
      -&latex;.  Here are a few:
      +current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
      +subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
      +
      +&latex; vs.&noeos; &latex;2e
      +In this document, we will mostly just use &textlsquo;&latex;&textrsquo; rather than
      +&textlsquo;&latex;2e&textrsquo;, since the previous version of &latex; (2.09) was
      +retired many years ago.
      +
      +unofficial nature of this manual
      +&latex; Project team
      +latexrefman-discuss&arobase;gna.org email address
      +&latex; is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
      +(http://latex-project.org).  The official documentation written by
      +the &latex; project is available from their web site.  This document is
      +completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex;
      +maintainers.  Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
      +document to them.  Instead, please send all comments to
      +latexrefman-discuss&arobase;gna.org.
      +
      +This document is a reference.  There is a vast array of other sources
      +of information about &latex;, at all levels.  Here are a few
      +introductions.
       
       
      -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
      -Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation.
      +http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
      +latex-doc-ptr document
      +Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation.
       
      -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
      -Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
      +http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
      +first-latex-doc document
      +Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
       
      -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
      -The guide for document authors maintained as part of &latex;; there
      -are several others.
      +http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
      +usrguide official documentation
      +The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of &latex;;
      +there are plenty of others available elsewhere.
      +
      +http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort
      +lshort document
      +A short introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages.
       
       http://tug.org/begin.html
      -Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;.
      -
      +Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;, with further +references. + +
      -OverviewStarting & endingAbout this documentTop +OverviewDocument classesAbout this documentTop Overview of &latex; -What is &latex;? - overview of &latex; basics of &latex; -&latex; overview -&latex; typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the -&latex; &textldquo;macro package&textrdquo; for &tex;. That is, it processes an input -file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that -describe how the text should be formatted. &latex; files are plain -text that can be written in any reasonable editor. It produces at -least three files as output: +Knuth, Donald E. +Lamport, Leslie +&latex; overview + +&latex; is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally +created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers +(http://latex-project.org). It is widely used, particularly for +complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics. + +macro package, &latex; as +A &latex; user writes an input file containing text along with +interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text +should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands +that interface with Donald E. Knuth&textrsquo;s &tex; typesetting program +(the technical term is that &latex; is a macro package for the +&tex; engine). The user produces the output document by giving that +file to the &tex; engine. + +The term &latex; is also sometimes used to mean the language in which +the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands +available to a &latex; user. + +Lamport &tex; +pronunciation +The name &latex; is short for &textldquo;Lamport &tex;&textrdquo;. It is pronounced +LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, +produce the logo with \LaTeX. Where use of the logo is not +sensible, such as in plain text, write it as LaTeX. - - -The main output file, which is one of: + +Starting and ending
      The standard beginning and end of a document.
      +
      Output files
      Files produced.
      +
      &tex; engines
      Programs that implementation &latex;.
      +
      &latex; command syntax
      General syntax of &latex; commands.
      +
      + + +Starting and endingOutput filesOverview +
      Starting and ending + +Starting & ending +starting & ending +ending & starting +hello, world + +&latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard +starting and ending. Here is a &textldquo;hello, world&textrdquo; example: + + +
      \documentclass{article}
      +\begin{document}
      +Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
      +\end{document}
      +
      + +document class, defined + +Here, the article is the so-called document class, +implemented in a file article.cls. Any document class can be +used. A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast +array of others are widely available. Document classes. + +preamble, defined +You can include other &latex; commands between the +\documentclass and the \begin{document} commands. +This area is called the preamble. + +The \begin{document} ... \end{document} is a so-called +environment; the document environment (and no others) is +required in all &latex; documents. &latex; provides many +environments itself, and many more are defined separately. +Environments. + +The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from +a &latex; input file. + + +
      +Output files&tex; enginesStarting and endingOverview +
      Output files + +&latex; produces a main output file and at least two accessory files. +The main output file&textrsquo;s name ends in either .dvi or .pdf. .dvi -.dvi file -latex command -If invoked as latex, a &textldquo;Device Independent&textrdquo; (.dvi) -file is produced. This contains commands that can be translated into -commands for virtually any output device. You can view such -.dvi output of &latex; by using a program such as -xdvi (display directly), dvips (convert to -PostScript), or dvipdfmx (convert to PDF). +.dvi file +latex command +xdvi command +dvips command +dvipdfmx command +dvitype command +If &latex; is invoked with the system command latex then it +produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension .dvi. You +can view this file with a command such as xdvi, or convert +it to a PostScript .ps file with dvips or to a +Portable Document Format .pdf file with dvipdfmx. +The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with +dvitype. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are +available (http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware). .pdf -.pdf file -pdf&tex; -pdflatex command -If invoked as pdflatex, a &textldquo;Portable Document Format&textrdquo; -(.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with -all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does -make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the -same document. - -lualatex command -Lua&tex; -If invoked as lualatex, a .pdf file is created using -the Lua&tex; engine (http://luatex.org). - -xelatex command -Xe&tex; -If invoked as xelatex, a .pdf file is created using -the Xe&tex; engine (http://tug.org/xetex). +.pdf file +pdf&tex; +pdflatex command +If &latex; is invoked via the system command pdflatex, +among other commands (&tex; engines), then the main output is +a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a +self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
      -Many other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) exist, which -can produce HTML, XML, and other things. - - -transcript file -log file -.log file -The &textldquo;transcript&textrdquo; or .log file that contains summary -information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the -input file. - - -auxiliary file -.aux file -An &textldquo;auxiliary&textrdquo; or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, -for things such as cross-references. - - -An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won&textrsquo;t try to -list them all. Xxx components? +&latex; also produces at least two additional files. -\ character starting commands -[...] for optional arguments -{...} for required arguments -In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \, -followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single -non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are -optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are -required. + +.log +transcript file +log file +.log file +This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of +loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps +additional information for any errors. + +.aux +auxiliary file +.aux file +cross references, resolving +forward references, resolving +references, resolving forward +Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as +cross references. For example, the first time that &latex; finds a +forward reference&textmdash;a cross reference to something that has not yet +appeared in the source&textmdash;it will appear in the output as a doubled +question mark ??. When the referred-to spot does eventually +appear in the source then &latex; writes its location information to +this .aux file. On the next invocation, &latex; reads the +location information from this file and uses it to resolve the +reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered +location. -case sensitivity of &latex; -&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless -explicitly directed to do otherwise. +
      + +.lof file +list of figures file +.lot file +list of tables file +.toc file +table of contents file +contents file +&latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename +ending. These include a .lof file that is used to make a list +of figures, a .lot file used to make a list of tables, and a +.toc file used to make a table of contents. A particular class +may create others; the list is open-ended. - -Starting & endingDocument classesOverviewTop -Starting & ending +
      +&tex; engines&latex; command syntaxOutput filesOverview +
      &tex; engines -starting & ending -ending & starting +engines, &tex; +implementations of &tex; +UTF-8 +Unicode input, native +TrueType fonts +OpenType fonts -A minimal input file looks like the following: +&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex; +implementation (Overview). This section gives a terse +overview of the main programs. - -
      \documentclass{class}
      -\begin{document}
      -your text
      -\end{document}
      -
      + +latex +pdflatex +pdf&tex; engine +etex command +e-&tex; +In &tex; Live (http://tug.org/texlive, if &latex; is invoked +via either the system command latex or pdflatex, +then the pdf&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). +When invoked as latex, the main output is a .dvi +file; as pdflatex, the main output is a .pdf file. + +pdf&tex; incorporates the e-&tex; extensions to Knuth&textrsquo;s original +program (http://ctan.org/pkg/etex), including additional +programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of +extensions of its own. e-&tex; is available on its own as the +command etex, but this is plain &tex; (and produces +.dvi). + +In other &tex; distributions, latex may invoke e-&tex; +rather than pdf&tex;. In any case, the e-&tex; extensions can be +assumed to be available in &latex;. + +lualatex +lualatex command +Lua&tex; +If &latex; is invoked via the system command lualatex, the +Lua&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This +program allows code written in the scripting language Lua +(http://luatex.org) to interact with &tex;&textrsquo;s typesetting. +Lua&tex; handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType +and TrueType fonts, and produces a .pdf file by default. +There is also dvilualatex to produce a .dvi file, +but this is rarely used. + +xelatex +xelatex command +Xe&tex; +If &latex; is invoked with the system command xelatex, the +Xe&tex; engine is run (http://tug.org/xetex). Like Lua&tex;, +Xe&tex; also natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and +OpenType fonts, though the implementation is completely different, +mainly using external libraries instead of internal code. Xe&tex; +produces a .pdf file as output; it does not support DVI output. + +
      - -where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. -Document classes, for details of the various document classes -available locally. +Other variants of &latex; and &tex; exist, e.g., to provide +additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p&tex;, +http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex, http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex). -preamble, defined -You may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass -and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the -preamble). + +
      +&latex; command syntax&tex; enginesOverview +
      &latex; command syntax + +command syntax +\ character starting commands +[...] for optional arguments +{...} for required arguments +In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \; the +name itself then consists of either (a) a string of letters or +(b) a single non-letter. + +A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments, either +required or optional. Required arguments are contained in curly +braces, {...}. Optional arguments are contained in square +brackets, [...]. Generally, but not universally, if the +command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any +required arguments. + +Some commands have a * form that is related to the form without +a *, such as \chapter and \chapter*. + +&latex; commands are case sensitive; neither \Begin{document} +nor \begin{Document} will work. Most commands are lowercase, +but in any event you must enter all commands in the same case as they +are defined. + +This manual describes all accepted options and *-forms for the +commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a.&noeos; bugs). +
      -Document classesFontsStarting & endingTop +Document classesFontsOverviewTop Document classes -document classes -classes of documents -\documentclass +document classes +classes of documents +\documentclass -The class of a given document is defined with the command: +The document&textrsquo;s overall class is defined with this command, which is +normally the first command in a &latex; source file.
      \documentclass[options]{class}
       
      - -The \documentclass command must be the first command in a -&latex; source file. +article class +report class +book class +letter class +slides class +The following document class names are built into &latex;. +(Many other document classes are available as separate packages; +Overview.) -article class -report class -book class -letter class -slides class -Built-in &latex; document class names are (many other document -classes are available as add-ons; Overview): + +article +For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use. - -
      article  report  book  letter  slides
      -
      - - +
      book +Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front +matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix +(Front/back matter). + +report +For documents of length between an article and a book, +such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters. + +slides +For slide presentations&textmdash;rarely used today. In its place the +beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent (beamer +template). + +
      -Standard options are described below. +Standard options are described in the next section. Document class options
      Global options.
      @@ -334,15 +503,14 @@ classes are available as add-ons; Overview
       Document class optionsDocument classes
       
      Document class options -document class options -options, document class -class options -global options +document class options +options, document class +class options +global options -You can specify so-called global options or class options -to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square -brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate -them with a comma: +You can specify so-called global options or class options to +the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets. +To specify more than one option, separate them with a comma, as in:
      \documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class}
      @@ -350,9 +518,9 @@ them with a comma:
       
       Here is the list of the standard class options.
       
      -10pt option
      -11pt option
      -12pt option
      +10pt option
      +11pt option
      +12pt option
       All of the standard classes except slides accept the following
       options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt):
       
      @@ -360,12 +528,12 @@ options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt):
       
      10pt  11pt  12pt
       
      -a4paper option -a5paper option -b5paper option -executivepaper option -legalpaper option -letterpaper option +a4paper option +a5paper option +b5paper option +executivepaper option +legalpaper option +letterpaper option All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default is letterpaper): @@ -373,40 +541,58 @@ size (default is letterpaper):
      a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
       
      -draft option -final option -fleqn option -landscape option -leqno option -openbib option -titlepage option -notitlepage option +draft option +final option +fleqn option +landscape option +leqno option +openbib option +titlepage option +notitlepage option Miscellaneous other options: -draft, final -black boxes, omitting -mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. -fleqn -Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. -landscape -Selects landscape format; default is portrait. -leqno -Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. -openbib -Use &textldquo;open&textrdquo; bibliography format. -titlepage, notitlepage -Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. +draft +final +black boxes, omitting +Mark (draft) or do not mark (final) overfull boxes with a +black box in the margin; default is final. + +fleqn +flush left equations +centered equations +equations, flush left vs.&noeos; centered +Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. + +landscape +landscape orientation +portrait orientation +Selects landscape format; default is portrait. + +leqno +left-hand equation numbers +right-hand equation numbers +equation numbers, left vs.&noeos; right +Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. + +openbib +bibliography format, open +Use &textldquo;open&textrdquo; bibliography format. + +titlepage +notitlepage +title page, separate or run-in +Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class.
      -These options are not available with the slides class: +The following options are not available with the slides class. -onecolumn option -twocolumn option -oneside option -twoside option -openright option -openany option +onecolumn option +twocolumn option +oneside option +twoside option +openright option +openany option onecolumn twocolumn @@ -414,43 +600,44 @@ size (default is letterpaper): oneside twoside -\evensidemargin -\oddsidemargin +\evensidemargin +\oddsidemargin Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except -for the book class. +that in the book class the default is twoside. -The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines -the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the -page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin. The defaults vary with the paper -size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided -printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is -40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, -with \evensidemargin the remainder. +For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided +printing, the \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin) parameter +determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left +side of the page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin, with \oddsidemargin +being 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and +\textwidth, and \evensidemargin is the remainder. openright openany -Determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page; default is openright for book. +Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is +openright for book, and openany for report.
      +clock option to slides class The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note. - -packages, loading -loading additional packages -\usepackage +loading additional packages +packages, loading additional +additional packages, loading +\usepackage Additional packages are loaded like this:
      \usepackage[options]{pkg}
       
      -To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a -comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. +To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma, +as in \usepackage{pkg1,pkg2,...}, or use multiple +\usepackage commands. -global options -options, global +global options +options, global Any options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with \usepackage. @@ -462,14 +649,14 @@ by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with Fonts Typefaces -typefaces -fonts +typefaces +fonts Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. -Font styles
      Select roman, italics etc.
      +Font styles
      Select roman, italics, etc.
       
      Font sizes
      Select point size.
       
      Low-level font commands
      Select encoding, family, series, shape.
       
      @@ -478,9 +665,9 @@ and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. Font stylesFont sizesFonts
      Font styles -font styles -typeface styles -styles of text +font styles +typeface styles +styles of text The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. @@ -491,84 +678,93 @@ arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, -are cumulative; e.g.,, you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or +are cumulative; e.g., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. -These commands automatically supply an italic correction if needed. +\nocorrlist +\nocorr +These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections +if needed. (\/, for the details of italic corrections.) +Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following +character is in the list \nocorrlist, which by default consists +of a period and a comma. To suppress the automatic insertion of +italic correction, use \nocorr at the start or end of the +command argument, such as \textit{\nocorr text} or +\textsc{text \nocorr}. \textrm (\rmfamily) -\textrm -\rmfamily +\textrm +\rmfamily Roman. \textit (\itshape) -\textit -\itshape +\textit +\itshape Italics. \emph -\emph -emphasis +\emph +emphasis Emphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). \textmd (\mdseries) -\textmd -\mdseries +\textmd +\mdseries Medium weight (default). \textbf (\bfseries) -\textbf -\bfseries +\textbf +\bfseries Boldface. \textup (\upshape) -\textup -\upshape +\textup +\upshape Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. \textsl (\slshape) -\textsl -\slshape +\textsl +\slshape Slanted. \textsf (\sffamily) -\textsf -\sffamily +\textsf +\sffamily Sans serif. \textsc (\scshape) -\textsc -\scshape +\textsc +\scshape Small caps. \texttt (\ttfamily) -\texttt -\ttfamily +\texttt +\ttfamily Typewriter. \textnormal (\normalfont) -\textnormal -\normalfont +\textnormal +\normalfont Main document font. \mathrm -\mathrm +\mathrm Roman, for use in math mode. \mathbf -\mathbf +\mathbf Boldface, for use in math mode. \mathsf -\mathsf +\mathsf Sans serif, for use in math mode. \mathtt -\mathtt +\mathtt Typewriter, for use in math mode. \mathit @@ -576,27 +772,27 @@ instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}Italics, for use in math mode. \mathnormal -\mathnormal +\mathnormal For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. \mathcal -\mathcal +\mathcal &textlsquo;Calligraphic&textrsquo; letters, for use in math mode.
      -\mathversion -math, bold -bold math +\mathversion +math, bold +bold math In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. -\oldstylenums -numerals, old-style -old-style numerals -lining numerals -textcomp package +\oldstylenums +numerals, old-style +old-style numerals +lining numerals +textcomp package Finally, the command \oldstylenums{numerals} will typeset so-called &textldquo;old-style&textrdquo; numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard &textldquo;lining&textrdquo; @@ -610,48 +806,48 @@ FAQ entry: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf&latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. Also, they are used differently than the above commands: {\cmd -...} instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very -different things. +...} instead of \cmd{...}. These are two unrelated +constructs.
      -\bf\bf -bold font +\bf\bf +bold font Switch to bold face. -\cal\cal -script letters for math -calligraphic letters for math +\cal\cal +script letters for math +calligraphic letters for math Switch to calligraphic letters for math. -\em\em -emphasis +\em\em +emphasis Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). -\it\it -italic font +\it\it +italic font Italics. -\rm\rm -roman font +\rm\rm +roman font Roman. -\sc\sc -small caps font +\sc\sc +small caps font Small caps. -\sf\sf -sans serif font +\sf\sf +sans serif font Sans serif. -\sl\sl -slanted font -oblique font +\sl\sl +slanted font +oblique font Slanted (oblique). -\tt\tt -typewriter font -monospace font -fixed-width font +\tt\tt +typewriter font +monospace font +fixed-width font Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). @@ -668,9 +864,9 @@ their place.
      Font sizesLow-level font commandsFont stylesFonts
      Font sizes -font sizes -typeface sizes -sizes of text +font sizes +typeface sizes +sizes of text The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font @@ -678,16 +874,16 @@ size used (in points) with the 10pt, 11pt, and 12pt document size options, respectively (Document class options). -\tiny -\scriptsize -\footnotesize -\small -\normalsize -\large -\Large -\LARGE -\huge -\Huge +\tiny +\scriptsize +\footnotesize +\small +\normalsize +\large +\Large +\LARGE +\huge +\Huge \normalsize (default) 24.88 24.88 24.88 Command 10pt 11pt 12pt @@ -722,8 +918,8 @@ these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tin
      Low-level font commandsFont sizesFonts
      Low-level font commands -low-level font commands -font commands, low-level +low-level font commands +font commands, low-level These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available @@ -731,11 +927,11 @@ ones. \fontencoding{enc} -\fontencoding +\fontencoding Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. \fontfamily{family} -\fontfamily +\fontfamily Select font family. Valid families include: @@ -747,7 +943,7 @@ ones. and numerous others. \fontseries{series} -\fontseries +\fontseries Select font series. Valid series include: @@ -761,7 +957,7 @@ ones. and various other combinations. \fontshape{shape} -\fontshape +\fontshape Select font shape. Valid shapes are: @@ -776,17 +972,17 @@ ones. The two last shapes are not available for most font families. \fontsize{size}{skip} -\fontsize -\baselineskip +\fontsize +\baselineskip Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. -\baselinestretch -setspace package -double spacing +\baselinestretch +setspace package +double spacing The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to &textldquo;double space&textrdquo; a document, @@ -794,7 +990,7 @@ if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the setspace package; see http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. -\linespread +\linespread \linespread{factor} Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and @@ -802,12 +998,12 @@ therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as described just above. -\selectfont +\selectfont The changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called. \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} -\usefont +\usefont The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. @@ -819,7 +1015,7 @@ followed by \selectfont. LayoutSectioningFontsTop Layout -layout commands +layout commands Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. @@ -828,14 +1024,14 @@ followed by \selectfont. \twocolumn
      Use two-column layout.
       
      \flushbottom
      Make all text pages the same height.
       
      \raggedbottom
      Allow text pages of differing height.
      -
      Page layout parameters
      \headheight \footskip.
      +
      Page layout parameters
      \headheight \footskip.
       
      \onecolumn\twocolumnLayout
      \onecolumn -\onecolumn -one-column output +\onecolumn +one-column output The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default. @@ -844,9 +1040,9 @@ single-column output. This is the default.
      \twocolumn\flushbottom\onecolumnLayout
      \twocolumn -\twocolumn -multicolumn text -two-column output +\twocolumn +multicolumn text +two-column output Synopsis: @@ -862,13 +1058,13 @@ starts. These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: -\columnsep\columnsep +\columnsep\columnsep The distance between columns (35pt by default). -\columnseprule\columnseprule +\columnseprule\columnseprule The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. -\columnwidth\columnwidth +\columnwidth\columnwidth The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in single-column text. @@ -877,21 +1073,21 @@ single-column text. These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: -\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction +\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by floats. Default .7, can be usefully redefined to (say) .9 to avoid going to float pages so soon. -\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, for a two-column float page. Default .5. -\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float page. Default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt documents, 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for 12pt. -\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. Default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. @@ -902,7 +1098,7 @@ and the main text. Default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. \flushbottom\raggedbottom\twocolumnLayout
      \flushbottom -\flushbottom +\flushbottom The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the @@ -915,8 +1111,8 @@ page.
      \raggedbottomPage layout parameters\flushbottomLayout
      \raggedbottom -\raggedbottom -stretch, omitting vertical +\raggedbottom +stretch, omitting vertical The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be @@ -927,30 +1123,30 @@ stretched. Page layout parameters\raggedbottomLayout
      Page layout parameters -page layout parameters -parameters, page layout -layout, page parameters for -header, parameters for -footer, parameters for -running header and footer +page layout parameters +parameters, page layout +layout, page parameters for +header, parameters for +footer, parameters for +running header and footer -\headheight\headheight +\headheight\headheight Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is 30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\headsep\headsep +\headsep\headsep Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. Default is 25pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\footskip\footskip +\footskip\footskip Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. Default is 30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\linewidth\linewidth +\linewidth\linewidth Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list (list). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth by the sum of \leftmargin and \rightmargin @@ -959,7 +1155,7 @@ width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in 10pt, it&textrsquo;s set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that becomes 229.5pt. -\textheight\textheight +\textheight\textheight The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an article or report document in 10pt, it&textrsquo;s set to @@ -967,7 +1163,7 @@ the font size, document class, etc. For an article or For 11pt, it&textrsquo;s 38\baselineskip and for 12pt, 36\baselineskip. -\textwidth\textwidth +\textwidth\textwidth The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies as usual. For an article or report document, it&textrsquo;s 345pt at 10pt, 360pt at 11pt, and @@ -988,21 +1184,21 @@ column), while \linewidth may decrease for nested lists. specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox. -\hsize +\hsize For completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal &latex; documents. -\topmargin\topmargin +\topmargin\topmargin Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and then divided by two. -\topskip\topskip +\topskip\topskip Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of -the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the +the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at 10pt. @@ -1012,19 +1208,19 @@ same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at 10pt. SectioningCross referencesLayoutTop Sectioning -sectioning +sectioning Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: -\part\part -\chapter\chapter -(report and book class only) -\section\section -\subsection\subsection -\subsubsection\subsubsection -\paragraph\paragraph -\subparagraph\subparagraph +\part\part +\chapter\chapter +(report and book class only) +\section\section +\subsection\subsection +\subsubsection\subsubsection +\paragraph\paragraph +\subparagraph\subparagraph All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., @@ -1048,7 +1244,7 @@ To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. -*-form of sectioning commands +*-form of sectioning commands Also, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. For instance: @@ -1057,8 +1253,8 @@ entry in the table of contents. For instance:
      \section*{Preamble}
       
      -\appendix -appendix, creating +\appendix +appendix, creating The \appendix command changes the way following sectional units are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this @@ -1071,8 +1267,8 @@ command is something like \chapter{The First Appendix} -secnumdepth counter -section numbers, printing +secnumdepth counter +section numbers, printing The secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting @@ -1088,7 +1284,7 @@ The setting
      Cross referencesEnvironmentsSectioningTop Cross references -cross references +cross references One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in &textldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&textrdquo; @@ -1102,7 +1298,7 @@ the reader to them, as in &textldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&textrdquo; \label\pagerefCross references
      \label -\label +\label Synopsis: @@ -1115,7 +1311,8 @@ the reader to them, as in &textldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&textrdquo; inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are +distinguished, as usual. To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by @@ -1141,9 +1338,9 @@ a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
      \pageref\ref\labelCross references
      \pageref{key} -\pageref -cross referencing with page number -page number, cross referencing +\pageref +cross referencing with page number +page number, cross referencing Synopsis: @@ -1159,12 +1356,12 @@ the place in the text where the corresponding
      \ref\pagerefCross references
      \ref{key} -\ref -cross referencing, symbolic -section number, cross referencing -equation number, cross referencing -figure number, cross referencing -footnote number, cross referencing +\ref +cross referencing, symbolic +section number, cross referencing +equation number, cross referencing +figure number, cross referencing +footnote number, cross referencing Synopsis: @@ -1182,10 +1379,10 @@ such as the word &textlsquo;Section&textrsquo; or &textlsquo;Figure&textrsquo;, EnvironmentsLine breakingCross referencesTop Environments -environments +environments -\begin -\end +\begin +\end &latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: @@ -1232,8 +1429,8 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: abstractarrayEnvironments
      abstract -abstract environment -abstracts +abstract environment +abstracts Synopsis: @@ -1248,8 +1445,8 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner:
      arraycenterabstractEnvironments
      array -array environment -arrays, math +array environment +arrays, math Synopsis: @@ -1264,8 +1461,8 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: within an equation environment (equation). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is -specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should -be formatted, as follows: +specified by a single letter that tells how items in each row of that +column should be formatted, as follows:
      c @@ -1276,12 +1473,12 @@ be formatted, as follows: flush right
      -\\ (for array) +\\ (for array) Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with \\. -&arobase;{...} +&arobase;{...} In the template, the construct &arobase;{text} puts text between columns in each row. @@ -1296,7 +1493,7 @@ between columns in each row. \end{equation}
      -\arraycolsep +\arraycolsep The \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space separating columns; the default is 5pt. tabular, for other parameters which affect formatting in array environments, @@ -1309,8 +1506,8 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. centerdescriptionarrayEnvironments
      center -center environment -centering text, environment for +center environment +centering text, environment for Synopsis: @@ -1321,7 +1518,7 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. \end{center}
      -\\ (for center) +\\ (for center) The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the @@ -1335,8 +1532,8 @@ string \\. \centeringcenter \centering -\centering -centering text, declaration for +\centering +centering text, declaration for The \centering declaration corresponds to the center environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such @@ -1366,9 +1563,9 @@ second line \\ descriptiondisplaymathcenterEnvironments
      description -description environment -labelled lists, creating -description lists, creating +description environment +labelled lists, creating +description lists, creating Synopsis: @@ -1380,13 +1577,13 @@ second line \\ \end{description}
      -\item +\item The description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may contain multiple paragraphs. -bold typewriter, avoiding -typewriter labels in lists +bold typewriter, avoiding +typewriter labels in lists Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you&textrsquo;ll get bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This @@ -1401,7 +1598,7 @@ plain typewriter}]. displaymathdocumentdescriptionEnvironments
      displaymath -displaymath environment +displaymath environment Synopsis: @@ -1430,18 +1627,18 @@ equation number, use the equation environment (documentenumeratedisplaymathEnvironments
      document -document environment +document environment The document environment encloses the body of a document. -It is required in every &latex; document. Starting & ending. +It is required in every &latex; document. Starting and ending.
      enumerateeqnarraydocumentEnvironments
      enumerate -enumerate environment -lists of items, numbered +enumerate environment +lists of items, numbered Synopsis: @@ -1459,7 +1656,7 @@ be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as itemize (itemize) and description (description). -\item +\item Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. @@ -1472,26 +1669,26 @@ There must be at least one \item command within the environment. A., B., &dots; -\enumi -\enumii -\enumiii -\enumiv +\enumi +\enumii +\enumiii +\enumiv The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through \enumiv counters (Counters). If the optional argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. -\labelenumi -\labelenumii -\labelenumiii -\labelenumiv +\labelenumi +\labelenumii +\labelenumiii +\labelenumiv The enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels (\newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters: -\Alph example +\Alph example
      \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
       
      @@ -1502,13 +1699,13 @@ letters: eqnarrayequationenumerateEnvironments
      eqnarray -eqnarray environment -equations, aligning -aligning equations +eqnarray environment +equations, aligning +aligning equations -align environment, from amsmath -amsmath package, replacing eqnarray -Madsen, Lars +align environment, from amsmath +amsmath package, replacing eqnarray +Madsen, Lars First, a caveat: the eqnarray environment has some infelicities which cannot be overcome; the article &textldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars Madsen describes them in detail @@ -1526,25 +1723,25 @@ others) from the amsmath package. \end{eqnarray} -\\ (for eqnarray) +\\ (for eqnarray) The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column +equations or inequalities. It is similar to a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. -\\* (for eqnarray) +\\* (for eqnarray) \\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. -\nonumber -equation numbers, omitting +\nonumber +equation numbers, omitting An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a \nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as eqnarray. -\lefteqn +\lefteqn The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. @@ -1554,9 +1751,9 @@ zero width. equationfigureeqnarrayEnvironments
      equation -equation environment -equations, environment for -formulas, environment for +equation environment +equations, environment for +formulas, environment for Synopsis: @@ -1574,9 +1771,9 @@ on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin.
      figurefilecontentsequationEnvironments
      figure -figure -inserting figures -figures, inserting +figure +inserting figures +figures, inserting
      \begin{figure[*]}[placement]
      @@ -1593,8 +1790,8 @@ Figures will not be split between two pages.
       When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a
       full-width figure (across both columns).
       
      -placement of floats
      -specifier, float placement
      +placement of floats
      +specifier, float placement
       The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try
       to place your figure.  There are four places where &latex; can possibly
       put a float:
      @@ -1611,13 +1808,12 @@ output.  To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or
       FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat.
       
       h
      -float package
      -(Here)&textmdash;at the position in the text where the figure environment
      -appears.  However, this is not allowed by itself; t is
      +(Here)&textmdash;at the position in the text where the figure environment
      +appears.  However, t is not allowed by itself; t is
       automatically added.
       
      -here, putting floats
      -float package
      +here, putting floats
      +float package
       To absolutely force a figure to appear &textldquo;here&textrdquo;, you can
       \usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it
       defines.  For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
      @@ -1636,13 +1832,13 @@ see above.
       
       
       
      -The standard report and article classes use the default placement
      +The standard report and article classes use the default placement
       tbp.
       
       The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands,
       etc.&noeos; you wish.
       
      -\caption
      +\caption
       The \caption command specifies caption text for the
       figure.  The caption is numbered by default.  If loftitle is
       present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text
      @@ -1652,20 +1848,20 @@ present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text
       non-float text:
       
       
      -\bottomfraction
      -The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at
      +\bottomfraction
      +The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
       the bottom; default .3.
       
      -\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction
      +\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction
       The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
       default .5.
       
      -\textfraction\textfraction
      +\textfraction\textfraction
       Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
       much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
       different page.  The default is .2.
       
      -\topfraction\topfraction
      +\topfraction\topfraction
       Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
       floats; default .7.
       
      @@ -1673,32 +1869,36 @@ floats; default .7.
       Parameters relating to vertical space around floats:
       
       
      -\floatsep\floatsep
      +\floatsep\floatsep
       Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
       12pt plus2pt minus2pt.
       
      -\intextsep\intextsep
      +\intextsep\intextsep
       Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
       12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt styles,
       14pt plus4pt minus4pt for 12pt.
       
      -\textfloatsep\textfloatsep
      +\textfloatsep\textfloatsep
       Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
       default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt.
       
       
      -Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page:
      +Counters relating to the number of floats on a page:
       
       
      -\bottomnumber\bottomnumber
      +bottomnumberbottomnumber
       Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
       default 1.
       
      -\topnumber\topnumber
      +dbltopnumberdbltopnumber
      +Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
      +two-column page; default 2.
      +
      +topnumbertopnumber
       Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
       default 2.
       
      -\totalnumber\totalnumber
      +totalnumbertotalnumber
       Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
       
       
      @@ -1709,9 +1909,9 @@ default 2.
       
      filecontentsflushleftfigureEnvironments
      filecontents: Create external files -filecontents -external files, creating -writing external files +filecontents +external files, creating +writing external files Synopsis: @@ -1723,8 +1923,8 @@ default 2. \documentclass{my-document-class} -initial command -\documentclass, commands before +initial command +\documentclass, commands before The filecontents environment is an initial command, meaning that it can be used only before the \documentclass command, as in the synopsis above. @@ -1746,7 +1946,7 @@ following advantages: declaration \usepackage{filecontents}, not just before \documentclass. - + The filecontents package also provides a filecontents* environment which is used in the same way as the filecontents environment except that it won&textrsquo;t insert any leading comment, so it is @@ -1759,17 +1959,17 @@ unrelated to using the created file. So you need to use, for instance, \input or \usepackage or \bibliography or whatever is applicable, to use the created file. -This environment is also useful to make a self-contained document, for -example, for a bug report, or to keep a .bib file with the main -document. +This environment is also useful to make a document in a self-contained +file, for example, for a bug report, or to keep the content of a +.bib file in the same file as the main document.
      flushleftflushrightfilecontentsEnvironments
      flushleft -flushleft environment -left-justifying text, environment for -ragged right text, environment for +flushleft environment +left-justifying text, environment for +ragged right text, environment for
      \begin{flushleft}
      @@ -1779,7 +1979,7 @@ document.
       \end{flushleft}
       
      -\\ for flushleft +\\ for flushleft The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. @@ -1791,10 +1991,10 @@ right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. \raggedrightflushleft \raggedright -\raggedright -ragged right text -left-justifying text -justification, ragged right +\raggedright +ragged right text +left-justifying text +justification, ragged right The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an @@ -1811,9 +2011,9 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit.
      flushrightitemizeflushleftEnvironments
      flushright -flushright environment -ragged left text, environment for -right-justifying text, environment for +flushright environment +ragged left text, environment for +right-justifying text, environment for
      \begin{flushright}
      @@ -1823,7 +2023,7 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit.
       \end{flushright}
       
      -\\ (for flushright) +\\ (for flushright) The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. @@ -1835,10 +2035,10 @@ left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. \raggedleftflushright \raggedleft -\raggedleft -ragged left text -justification, ragged left -right-justifying text +\raggedleft +ragged left text +justification, ragged left +right-justifying text The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an @@ -1855,11 +2055,11 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit.
      itemizeletterflushrightEnvironments
      itemize -itemize environment -\item -lists of items -unordered lists -bulleted lists +itemize environment +\item +lists of items +unordered lists +bulleted lists Synopsis: @@ -1888,10 +2088,10 @@ There must be at least one \item command within the environment. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) -\labelitemi -\labelitemii -\labelitemiii -\labelitemiv +\labelitemi +\labelitemii +\labelitemiii +\labelitemiv The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have @@ -1901,13 +2101,13 @@ the first level use diamonds:
      \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
       
      -\leftmargin -\leftmargini -\leftmarginii -\leftmarginiii -\leftmarginiv -\leftmarginv -\leftmarginvi +\leftmargin +\leftmargini +\leftmarginii +\leftmarginiii +\leftmarginiv +\leftmarginv +\leftmarginvi The \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set @@ -1926,20 +2126,20 @@ This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: Some parameters that affect list formatting: -\itemindent\itemindent +\itemindent\itemindent Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. -\labelsep\labelsep +\labelsep\labelsep Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em. -\labelwidth\labelwidth +\labelwidth\labelwidth Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode. -\listparindent\listparindent +\listparindent\listparindent Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a list item; default 0pt. -\rightmargin\rightmargin +\rightmargin\rightmargin Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the enclosing environment; default 0pt, except in the quote, quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal @@ -1951,23 +2151,23 @@ to \leftmargin. loose, by default). -\itemsep\itemsep +\itemsep\itemsep Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. -\parsep\parsep +\parsep\parsep Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults are the same as \itemsep. -\topsep\topsep +\topsep\topsep Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for 10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced for nested lists. -\partopsep\partopsep +\partopsep\partopsep Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt @@ -1975,7 +2175,7 @@ plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. -\parskip example +\parskip example Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs @@ -1995,7 +2195,7 @@ within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific,
      letterlistitemizeEnvironments
      letter environment: writing letters -letter +letter This environment is used for creating letters. Letters. @@ -2003,8 +2203,8 @@ within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific,
      listmathletterEnvironments
      list -list -lists of items, generic +list +lists of items, generic The list environment is a generic environment which is used for defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in @@ -2035,8 +2235,8 @@ empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. mathminipagelistEnvironments
      math -math environment -in-line formulas +math environment +in-line formulas Synopsis: @@ -2055,8 +2255,8 @@ running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. minipagepicturemathEnvironments
      minipage -minipage environment -minipage, creating a +minipage environment +minipage, creating a
      \begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
      @@ -2072,15 +2272,15 @@ other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage.
       
       The arguments are the same as for \parbox (\parbox).
       
      -indentation of paragraphs, in minipage
      -paragraph indentation, in minipage
      -\parindent
      +indentation of paragraphs, in minipage
      +paragraph indentation, in minipage
      +\parindent
       By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage
       environment.  You can restore indentation with a command such as
       \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command.
       
      -footnotes in figures
      -figures, footnotes in
      +footnotes in figures
      +figures, footnotes in
       Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is
       particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables.  A
       \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at
      @@ -2096,9 +2296,9 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
       picturequotationminipageEnvironments
       
      picture -picture -creating pictures -pictures, creating +picture +creating pictures +pictures, creating
      \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
      @@ -2106,7 +2306,7 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
       \end{picture}
       
      -\unitlength +\unitlength The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying @@ -2170,7 +2370,7 @@ command. The command picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. -lR box +lR box The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything that can go in an \mbox (\mbox) in the text argument of the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will @@ -2198,9 +2398,10 @@ be the lower left corner of the box. \circle\makebox (picture)picture \circle -\circle +\circle - +Synopsis: +
      \circle[*]{diameter}
       
      @@ -2208,22 +2409,25 @@ be the lower left corner of the box. to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command draws a solid circle.
      -Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. +Circles up to 40pt can be drawn. \makebox (picture)\framebox (picture)\circlepicture \makebox -\makebox (picture) +\makebox (for picture) + +Synopsis: + +
      \makebox(width,height)[position]{text}
      +
      -\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} - The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a -width and height in multiples of \unitlength. +width and height in multiples of \unitlength. -The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: +The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that +your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: t @@ -2246,7 +2450,7 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: \framebox (picture)\dashbox\makebox (picture)picture \framebox -\framebox +\framebox Synopsis: @@ -2258,8 +2462,8 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. -\fboxrule -\fboxsep +\fboxrule +\fboxsep The \framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents of the box. @@ -2269,7 +2473,7 @@ and the contents of the box. \dashbox\frame\framebox (picture)picture \dashbox -\dashbox +\dashbox Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: @@ -2282,14 +2486,14 @@ and the contents of the box. rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. The text is positioned at optional pos. -A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are -multiples of the dlen. +A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are +multiples of the dlen. \frame\line\dashboxpicture \frame -\frame +\frame Synopsis: @@ -2305,7 +2509,7 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. \line\linethickness\framepicture \line -\line +\line Synopsis: @@ -2316,16 +2520,18 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. The \line command draws a line with the given length and slope xslope/yslope. +pict2e package +graphics packages Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y have integer values from −6 -through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, -see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. +through 6. For lines of any slope, and plenty of other shapes, +see pict2e and many other packages on CTAN. \linethickness\thicklines\linepicture \linethickness -\linethickness +\linethickness The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be @@ -2338,7 +2544,7 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. \thicklines\thinlines\linethicknesspicture \thicklines -\thicklines +\thicklines The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; @@ -2348,7 +2554,7 @@ cf. \linethickness \thinlines\multiput\thicklinespicture \thinlines -\thinlines +\thinlines The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; @@ -2358,7 +2564,7 @@ cf. \linethickness \multiput\oval\thinlinespicture \multiput -\multiput +\multiput Synopsis: @@ -2374,7 +2580,7 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position \oval\put\multiputpicture \oval -\oval +\oval Synopsis: @@ -2405,19 +2611,23 @@ boxes with rounded corners. \put\shortstack\ovalpicture \put +\put -\put - -\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } +Synopsis: -The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. + +
      \put(xcoord,ycoord){ ... }
      +
      + +The \put command places the material specified by the +(mandatory) argument in braces at the given coordinate, +(xcoord,ycoord).
      \shortstack\vector\putpicture \shortstack -\shortstack +\shortstack Synopsis: @@ -2437,24 +2647,24 @@ positions are:
      Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
      -\\ (for \shortstack objects) +\\ (for \shortstack objects) Objects are separated with \\.
      \vector\shortstackpicture \vector -\vector +\vector Synopsis: -
      \vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}
      +
      \vector(xslope,yslope){length}
       
      The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -−4 and +4, inclusive. +length and slope. The xslope and yslope +values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive. @@ -2462,10 +2672,10 @@ length and slope. The x and y values must lie between quotationquotepictureEnvironments
      quotation -quotation -quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying -displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation -paragraph indentations in quoted text +quotation +quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text Synopsis: @@ -2487,12 +2697,12 @@ normally. quotetabbingquotationEnvironments
      quote -quote -quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying -displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation -paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting +quote +quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting -Snyopsis: +Synopsis:
      \begin{quote}
      @@ -2511,10 +2721,10 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
       tabbingtablequoteEnvironments
       
      tabbing -tabbing environment -tab stops, using -lining text up using tab stops -alignment via tabbing +tabbing environment +tab stops, using +lining text up using tab stops +alignment via tabbing Synopsis: @@ -2534,40 +2744,40 @@ the width of each column is constant and known in advance. This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular environment. -The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: +The following commands can be used inside a tabbing environment: -\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) +\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) End a line. -\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) +\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) Sets a tab stop at the current position. -\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) -\> +\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) +\> Advances to the next tab stop. -\<\< +\<\< Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. -\+\+ +\+\+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\-\- +\-\- Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\&textrsquo; (tabbing)\' (tabbing) +\&textrsquo; (tabbing)\' (tabbing) Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush against the current column&textrsquo;s tab stop. -\&textlsquo; (tabbing)\` (tabbing) +\&textlsquo; (tabbing)\` (tabbing) Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can&textrsquo;t move text to the right of the last column because there&textrsquo;s no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the @@ -2576,29 +2786,29 @@ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between the \` and the command that ends the line. -\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) -\a&textrsquo; (acute accent in tabbing) -\a&textlsquo; (grave accent in tabbing) -\a= (macron accent in tabbing) +\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) +\a&textrsquo; (acute accent in tabbing) +\a&textlsquo; (grave accent in tabbing) +\a= (macron accent in tabbing) In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not produce accents as usual (Accents). Instead, the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. -\kill\kill +\kill\kill Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- commands in that line remain in effect. -\poptabs\poptabs -\poptabs +\poptabs\poptabs +\poptabs Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. -\pushtabs\pushtabs +\pushtabs\pushtabs Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. -\tabbingsep\tabbingsep +\tabbingsep\tabbingsep Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. @@ -2622,9 +2832,9 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ tabletabulartabbingEnvironments
      table -table -tables, creating -creating tables +table +tables, creating +creating tables Synopsis: @@ -2656,9 +2866,9 @@ you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table.
      tabularthebibliographytableEnvironments
      tabular -tabular environment -lines in tables -lining text up in tables +tabular environment +lines in tables +lining text up in tables Synopsis: @@ -2682,7 +2892,7 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. -\\ for tabular +\\ for tabular \\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except for the last, where it is optional&textmdash;unless an \hline command (to put a rule below the table) follows. @@ -2735,7 +2945,7 @@ column, you have to load the array package and use the >{...} specifier. -\extracolsep +\extracolsep An \extracolsep{wd} command in an &arobase;-expression causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. @@ -2772,20 +2982,20 @@ which may contain another *-expression. -\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth +\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments; the default is .4pt. -\arraystretch\arraystretch +\arraystretch\arraystretch Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array environments; default is 1, for no scaling. -\doublerulesep\doublerulesep +\doublerulesep\doublerulesep Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || in the tabular and array environments; default is 2pt. -\tabcolsep\tabcolsep +\tabcolsep\tabcolsep Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt. @@ -2803,7 +3013,7 @@ environment: \multicolumn\clinetabular \multicolumn -\multicolumn +\multicolumn Synopsis: @@ -2833,7 +3043,7 @@ for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, \cline\hline\multicolumntabular \cline -\cline +\cline Synopsis: @@ -2849,7 +3059,7 @@ which are specified in the mandatory argument. \hline\vline\clinetabular \hline -\hline +\hline The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or array environment. It&textrsquo;s most @@ -2860,7 +3070,7 @@ of a table. \vline\hlinetabular \vline -\vline +\vline The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to @@ -2873,8 +3083,8 @@ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an thebibliographytheoremtabularEnvironments
      thebibliography -thebibliography -bibliography, creating (manually) +thebibliography +bibliography, creating (manually) Synopsis: @@ -2914,7 +3124,7 @@ less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. \bibitem\citethebibliography \bibitem -\bibitem +\bibitem Synopsis: @@ -2939,7 +3149,7 @@ associated label. \cite\nocite\bibitemthebibliography \cite -\cite +\cite Synopsis: @@ -2960,7 +3170,7 @@ citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might pr \nociteUsing BibTeX\citethebibliography \nocite -\nocite +\nocite \nocite{key_list} @@ -2972,11 +3182,11 @@ which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. Using BibTeX\nocitethebibliography Using Bib&tex; -using Bib&tex; -bib&tex;, using -bibliography, creating (automatically) -\bibliographystyle -\bibliography +using Bib&tex; +bib&tex;, using +bibliography, creating (automatically) +\bibliographystyle +\bibliography If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of @@ -3009,7 +3219,7 @@ publication. In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. +http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files @@ -3023,8 +3233,8 @@ Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and theoremtitlepagethebibliographyEnvironments
      theorem -theorem environment -theorems, typesetting +theorem environment +theorems, typesetting Synopsis: @@ -3044,9 +3254,9 @@ possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem titlepageverbatimtheoremEnvironments
      titlepage -titlepage environment -making a title page -title pages, creating +titlepage environment +making a title page +title pages, creating Synopsis: @@ -3070,12 +3280,12 @@ produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. verbatimversetitlepageEnvironments
      verbatim -verbatim environment -verbatim text -simulating typed text -typed text, simulating -code, typesetting -computer programs, typesetting +verbatim environment +verbatim text +simulating typed text +typed text, simulating +code, typesetting +computer programs, typesetting Synopsis: @@ -3100,8 +3310,8 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter. \verbverbatim \verb -\verb -verbatim text, inline +\verb +verbatim text, inline Synopsis: @@ -3116,7 +3326,7 @@ including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter \verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. -visible space +visible space The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a &textldquo;visible space&textrdquo; character. @@ -3129,8 +3339,8 @@ verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. verseverbatimEnvironments
      verse -verse environment -poetry, an environment for +verse environment +poetry, an environment for Synopsis: @@ -3145,7 +3355,7 @@ verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. -\\ for verse +\\ for verse The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the @@ -3156,8 +3366,8 @@ stanzas. Line breakingPage breakingEnvironmentsTop Line breaking -line breaking -breaking lines +line breaking +breaking lines The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To @@ -3182,9 +3392,9 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the \\\obeycr & \restorecrLine breaking
      \\[*][morespace] -\\ force line break -new line, starting -line break, forcing +\\ force line break +new line, starting +line break, forcing The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra @@ -3198,9 +3408,9 @@ except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line.
      \obeycr & \restorecr\newline\\Line breaking
      \obeycr & \restorecr -\obeycr -\restorecr -new line, output as input +\obeycr +\restorecr +new line, output as input The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (^^M, internally) the same as \\ (followed by @@ -3213,8 +3423,8 @@ in the output.
      \newline\- (hyphenation)\obeycr & \restorecrLine breaking
      \newline -\newline -new line, starting (paragraph mode) +\newline +new line, starting (paragraph mode) The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph @@ -3224,12 +3434,12 @@ mode.
      \- (hyphenation)\fussy\newlineLine breaking
      \- (discretionary hyphen) -\- (hyphenation) -hyphenation, forcing +\- (hyphenation) +hyphenation, forcing The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at -that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually -find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +that point. &latex; is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds +most of the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional cases. @@ -3242,7 +3452,7 @@ that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.
      \fussy\sloppy\- (hyphenation)Line breaking
      \fussy -\fussy +\fussy The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between @@ -3266,8 +3476,8 @@ interword spacing.
      \hyphenation\linebreak & \nolinebreak\sloppyLine breaking
      \hyphenation -\hyphenation -hyphenation, defining +\hyphenation +hyphenation, defining Synopsis: @@ -3290,10 +3500,10 @@ misses the hyphenations in these words):
      \linebreak & \nolinebreak\hyphenationLine breaking
      \linebreak & \nolinebreak -\linebreak -\nolinebreak -line breaks, forcing -line breaks, preventing +\linebreak +\nolinebreak +line breaks, forcing +line breaks, preventing Synopses: @@ -3316,8 +3526,8 @@ from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from Page breakingFootnotesLine breakingTop Page breaking -page breaking -breaking pages +page breaking +breaking pages &latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, @@ -3335,8 +3545,8 @@ but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. \cleardoublepage\clearpagePage breaking
      \cleardoublepage -\cleardoublepage -starting on a right-hand page +\cleardoublepage +starting on a right-hand page The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. @@ -3347,9 +3557,9 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
      \clearpage\newpage\cleardoublepagePage breaking
      \clearpage -\clearpage -flushing floats and starting a page -starting a new page and clearing floats +\clearpage +flushing floats and starting a page +starting a new page and clearing floats The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. @@ -3358,9 +3568,9 @@ figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
      \newpage\enlargethispage\clearpagePage breaking
      \newpage -\newpage -new page, starting -starting a new page +\newpage +new page, starting +starting a new page The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see \clearpage above). @@ -3369,8 +3579,8 @@ floats (see \clearpage above).
      \enlargethispage\pagebreak & \nopagebreak\newpagePage breaking
      \enlargethispage -\enlargethispage -enlarge current page +\enlargethispage +enlarge current page \enlargethispage{size} @@ -3388,10 +3598,10 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
      \pagebreak & \nopagebreak\enlargethispagePage breaking
      \pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\pagebreak -\nopagebreak -page break, forcing -page break, preventing +\pagebreak +\nopagebreak +page break, forcing +page break, preventing Synopses: @@ -3415,7 +3625,7 @@ insistent the request is. FootnotesDefinitionsPage breakingTop Footnotes -footnotes, creating +footnotes, creating Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be @@ -3433,7 +3643,7 @@ produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the \footnote\footnotemarkFootnotes
      \footnote -\footnote +\footnote Synopsis: @@ -3454,7 +3664,7 @@ tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.)
      \footnotemark\footnotetext\footnoteFootnotes
      \footnotemark -\footnotemark +\footnotemark With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in @@ -3475,7 +3685,7 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with
      \footnotetextSymbolic footnotes\footnotemarkFootnotes
      \footnotetext -\footnotetext +\footnotetext Synopsis: @@ -3495,7 +3705,7 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode. Symbolic footnotesFootnote parameters\footnotetextFootnotes
      Symbolic footnotes -footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered +footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: @@ -3503,8 +3713,8 @@ numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this:
      \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
       
      -\fnsymbol, and footnotes -\&arobase;fnsymbol +\fnsymbol, and footnotes +\&arobase;fnsymbol The \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you&textrsquo;ll need to also @@ -3515,17 +3725,17 @@ redefine \&arobase;fnsymbol. Footnote parametersSymbolic footnotesFootnotes
      Footnote parameters -footnote parameters -parameters, for footnotes +footnote parameters +parameters, for footnotes -\footnoterule\footnoterule +\footnoterule\footnoterule Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). +slides, where it does not appear). -\footnotesep\footnotesep +\footnotesep\footnotesep The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize fonts (Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between @@ -3539,7 +3749,7 @@ footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt DefinitionsCountersFootnotesTop Definitions -definitions +definitions &latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. @@ -3551,7 +3761,7 @@ footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt\newlength
      Define a new length.
       
      \newsavebox
      Define a new box.
       
      \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
      Define a new environment.
      -
      \newtheorem
      Define a new theorem-like environment.
      +
      \newtheorem
      Define a new theorem-like environment.
       
      \newfont
      Define a new font name.
       
      \protect
      Using tricky commands.
       
      @@ -3559,27 +3769,27 @@ footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt\newcommand & \renewcommand\newcounterDefinitions
      \newcommand & \renewcommand -\newcommand -commands, defining new ones -defining a new command -new commands, defining +\newcommand +commands, defining new ones +defining a new command +new commands, defining \newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: -
        \newcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optarg]{defn}
      -\renewcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optarg]{defn}
      +
        \newcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optargval]{defn}
      +\renewcommand[*]{cmd}[nargs][optargval]{defn}
       
      * -*-form of defining new commands +*-form of defining new commands The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not \long, in plain &tex; terms). cmd -The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it +The command name, beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand, it must already be defined. @@ -3588,12 +3798,14 @@ must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. -optarg -If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command&textrsquo;s -first argument is optional. The default value of the optional -argument (i.e., if it is not specified in the call) is optarg, -or, if that argument is present in the \newcommand but has an -empty value, the string def. +optargval +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the first +argument of command cmd is optional and its default value (i.e., +if it is not specified in the call) is optarg. In otherwise, +when calling the macro, if no [value] is given after +cmd&textmdash;which is different from having [] for an +empty value&textmdash;then string optargval becomes the +value of #1 within defn when the macro is expanded. defn The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a @@ -3607,20 +3819,20 @@ text of the nth argument. \newcounter\newlength\newcommand & \renewcommandDefinitions
      \newcounter -\newcounter -counters, defining new +\newcounter +counters, defining new Synopsis: -
      \newcounter{cnt}[countername]
      +
      \newcounter{countername}[supercounter]
       
      -The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. +The \newcounter command defines a new counter named countername. The new counter is initialized to zero. -Given the optional argument [countername], cnt -will be reset whenever countername is incremented. +Given the optional argument [super], countername +will be reset whenever the counter named supercounter is incremented. Counters, for more information about counters. @@ -3628,8 +3840,8 @@ will be reset whenever countername is incremented.
      \newlength\newsavebox\newcounterDefinitions
      \newlength -\newlength -lengths, defining new +\newlength +lengths, defining new Synopsis: @@ -3638,7 +3850,7 @@ will be reset whenever countername is incremented. The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a -length command with a value of 0in. The argument must +length command with a value of zero. The argument must be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error occurs if \foo is already defined. @@ -3649,7 +3861,7 @@ for more information about lengths in general.
      \newsavebox\newenvironment & \renewenvironment\newlengthDefinitions
      \newsavebox -\newsavebox +\newsavebox Synopsis: @@ -3664,11 +3876,11 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
      \newenvironment & \renewenvironment\newtheorem\newsaveboxDefinitions
      \newenvironment & \renewenvironment -\newenvironment -\renewenvironment -environments, defining -defining new environments -redefining environments +\newenvironment +\renewenvironment +environments, defining +defining new environments +redefining environments Synopses: @@ -3682,7 +3894,7 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
      * -*-form of environment commands +*-form of environment commands The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments (not the contents of the environment) not contain multiple paragraphs of text. @@ -3715,9 +3927,9 @@ may not contain any argument parameters. \newtheorem\newfont\newenvironment & \renewenvironmentDefinitions
      \newtheorem -\newtheorem -theorems, defining -defining new theorems +\newtheorem +theorems, defining +defining new theorems
      \newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within]
      @@ -3753,9 +3965,9 @@ not both.
       
      \newfont\protect\newtheoremDefinitions
      \newfont -\newfont -fonts, new commands for -defining new fonts +\newfont +fonts, new commands for +defining new fonts Synopsis: @@ -3774,10 +3986,10 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files.
      \protect\newfontDefinitions
      \protect -\protect +\protect -fragile commands -moving arguments +fragile commands +moving arguments Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it @@ -3789,7 +4001,7 @@ commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. &hyphenbreak;expressions in tabular and array environments (tabular). -robust commands +robust commands Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not be preceded by \protect. @@ -3807,8 +4019,8 @@ be preceded by \protect. CountersLengthsDefinitionsTop Counters -counters, a list of -variables, a list of +counters, a list of +variables, a list of Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment @@ -3844,35 +4056,32 @@ subsubsection instance, \alph{enumi}. -\alph\alph +\alph\alph prints counter using lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\Alph\Alph +\Alph\Alph uses uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\arabic\arabic +\arabic\arabic uses Arabic numbers: &textlsquo;1&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;2&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\roman\roman +\roman\roman uses lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\roman\roman +\Roman\Roman uses uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\fnsymbol\fnsymbol +\fnsymbol\fnsymbol prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. - -Here are the symbols: -$\ast$ $\dagger$ $\ddagger$ $\S$ $\P$ $\parallel$ -$\ast\ast$ $\dagger\dagger$ $\ddagger\ddagger$ - -The symbols mostly aren&textrsquo;t supported in Info, but here are the names: - -
      asterisk(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
      -double-asterisk(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
      +Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output):
      +
      +
      +
      asterisk(*) dagger(2021) ddagger(2021)
      +section-sign(00A7) paragraph-sign(00B6) parallel(2225)
      +double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(20212021) double-ddagger(20212021)
       
      @@ -3881,9 +4090,9 @@ double-asterisk(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
      \usecounter\value\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbolCounters
      \usecounter{counter} -\usecounter -list items, specifying counter -numbered items, specifying counter +\usecounter +list items, specifying counter +numbered items, specifying counter Synopsis: @@ -3899,8 +4108,8 @@ the list items.
      \value\setcounter\usecounterCounters
      \value{counter} -\value -counters, getting value of +\value +counters, getting value of Synopsis: @@ -3921,24 +4130,24 @@ be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example:
      \setcounter\addtocounter\valueCounters
      \setcounter{counter}{value} -\setcounter -counters, setting -setting counters +\setcounter +counters, setting +setting counters Synopsis: -
      \setcounter{\counter}{value}
      +
      \setcounter{counter}{value}
       
      -The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the +The \setcounter command sets the value of counter to the value argument.
      \addtocounter\refstepcounter\setcounterCounters
      \addtocounter{counter}{value} -\addtocounter +\addtocounter The \addtocounter command increments counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. @@ -3947,7 +4156,7 @@ amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative.
      \refstepcounter\stepcounter\addtocounterCounters
      \refstepcounter{counter} -\refstepcounter +\refstepcounter The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as \stepcounter \stepcounter, except it also defines the @@ -3957,7 +4166,7 @@ current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter.
      \stepcounter\day \month \year\refstepcounterCounters
      \stepcounter{counter} -\stepcounter +\stepcounter The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and resets all subsidiary counters. @@ -3966,9 +4175,9 @@ resets all subsidiary counters.
      \day \month \year\stepcounterCounters
      \day \month \year: Predefined counters -\day -\month -\year +\day +\month +\year &latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, 1&textndash;31), month of the year (\month, 1&textndash;12), and year @@ -3984,7 +4193,7 @@ current day (\today LengthsMaking paragraphsCountersTop Lengths -lengths, defining and using +lengths, defining and using A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. @@ -4001,8 +4210,8 @@ length as an argument. \setlength\addtolengthLengths
      \setlength{\len}{value} -\setlength -lengths, setting +\setlength +lengths, setting The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex; @@ -4013,8 +4222,8 @@ understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), poin
      \addtolength\settodepth\setlengthLengths
      \addtolength{\len}{amount} -\addtolength -lengths, adding to +\addtolength +lengths, adding to The \addtolength command increments a &textldquo;length command&textrdquo; \len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which @@ -4024,7 +4233,7 @@ may be negative.
      \settodepth\settoheight\addtolengthLengths
      \settodepth -\settodepth +\settodepth \settodepth{\gnat}{text} @@ -4035,7 +4244,7 @@ equal to the depth of the text argument.
      \settoheight\settowidth\settodepthLengths
      \settoheight -\settoheight +\settoheight \settoheight{\gnat}{text} @@ -4047,7 +4256,7 @@ equal to the height of the text argument.
      \settowidthPredefined lengths\settoheightLengths
      \settowidth{\len}{text} -\settowidth +\settowidth The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument. @@ -4056,20 +4265,20 @@ to the width of the text argument.
      Predefined lengths\settowidthLengths
      Predefined lengths -lengths, predefined -predefined lengths +lengths, predefined +predefined lengths \width -\width +\width \height -\height +\height \depth -\depth +\depth \totalheight -\totalheight +\totalheight These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands (Boxes). They specify the natural width, etc., of @@ -4084,8 +4293,8 @@ natural size, e.g., say Making paragraphsMath formulasLengthsTop Making paragraphs -making paragraphs -paragraphs +making paragraphs +paragraphs A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines&textmdash;lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new @@ -4102,9 +4311,9 @@ a sectioning command. \indent\noindentMaking paragraphs
      \indent -\indent -\parindent -indent, forcing +\indent +\parindent +indent, forcing \indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph @@ -4119,8 +4328,8 @@ mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt \noindent\parskip\indentMaking paragraphs
      \noindent -\noindent -indent, suppressing +\noindent +indent, suppressing When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in @@ -4130,8 +4339,8 @@ the middle of a paragraph.
      \parskipMarginal notes\noindentMaking paragraphs
      \parskip -\parskip -vertical space before paragraphs +\parskip +vertical space before paragraphs \parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. @@ -4140,10 +4349,10 @@ before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt.
      Marginal notes\parskipMaking paragraphs
      Marginal notes -marginal notes -notes in the margin -remarks in the margin -\marginpar +marginal notes +notes in the margin +remarks in the margin +\marginpar Synopsis: @@ -4167,8 +4376,8 @@ will be placed in the nearest margin for two-column layout. -\reversemarginpar -\normalmarginpar +\reversemarginpar +\normalmarginpar The command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them in the default position. @@ -4182,15 +4391,15 @@ hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}These parameters affect the formatting of the note: -\marginparpush\marginparpush +\marginparpush\marginparpush Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for 12pt documents, 5pt else. -\marginparsep\marginparsep +\marginparsep\marginparsep Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default 11pt for 10pt documents, 10pt else. -\marginparwidth\marginparwidth +\marginparwidth\marginparwidth Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document is 90pt, 83pt for 11pt, and 68pt for 12pt; 17pt more in each case for a two-sided document. @@ -4209,13 +4418,13 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. Math formulasModesMaking paragraphsTop Math formulas -math formulas -formulas, math -math mode, entering +math formulas +formulas, math +math mode, entering -math environment -displaymath environment -equation environment +math environment +displaymath environment +equation environment There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode:
      @@ -4228,10 +4437,10 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. number in the right margin.
      -\( -\) -\[ -\] +\( +\) +\[ +\] The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath @@ -4242,7 +4451,7 @@ environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
      -$ +$ In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even shorter form: @@ -4250,15 +4459,15 @@ shorter form:
      $ ... $   instead of   \(...\)
       
      -\boldmath -\unboldmath +\boldmath +\unboldmath The \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the \unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used outside of math mode. -\displaystyle +\displaystyle The \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example @@ -4280,11 +4489,11 @@ below summations. For example Subscripts & superscriptsMath symbolsMath formulas
      Subscripts & superscripts -superscript -subscript -exponent -_ -^ +superscript +subscript +exponent +_ +^ To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type _{exp}. To get exp to appear as a @@ -4297,9 +4506,9 @@ superscript.
      Math symbolsMath functionsSubscripts & superscriptsMath formulas
      Math symbols -math symbols -symbols, math -greek letters +math symbols +symbols, math +greek letters &latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you&textrsquo;re likely to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. @@ -4307,635 +4516,635 @@ For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. -\|\| +\|\| \| -\aleph\aleph +\aleph\aleph \aleph -\alpha\alpha +\alpha\alpha \alpha -\amalg\amalg +\amalg\amalg \amalg (binary operation) -\angle\angle +\angle\angle \angle -\approx\approx +\approx\approx \approx (relation) -\ast\ast +\ast\ast \ast (binary operation) -\asymp\asymp +\asymp\asymp \asymp (relation) -\backslash\backslash +\backslash\backslash \ (delimiter) -\beta\beta +\beta\beta \beta -\bigcap\bigcap +\bigcap\bigcap \bigcap -\bigcirc\bigcirc +\bigcirc\bigcirc \bigcirc (binary operation) -\bigcup\bigcup +\bigcup\bigcup \bigcup -\bigodot\bigodot +\bigodot\bigodot \bigodot -\bigoplus\bigoplus +\bigoplus\bigoplus \bigoplus -\bigotimes\bigotimes +\bigotimes\bigotimes \bigotimes -\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown \bigtriangledown (binary operation) -\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup +\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup \bigtriangleup (binary operation) -\bigsqcup\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup\bigsqcup \bigsqcup -\biguplus\biguplus +\biguplus\biguplus \biguplus -\bigcap\bigcap +\bigcap\bigcap \bigvee -\bigwedge\bigwedge +\bigwedge\bigwedge \bigwedge -\bot\bot +\bot\bot \bot -\bowtie\bowtie +\bowtie\bowtie \bowtie (relation) -\Box\Box +\Box\Box (square open box symbol) -\bullet\bullet -bullet symbol +\bullet\bullet +bullet symbol \bullet (binary operation) -\cap\cap +\cap\cap \cap (binary operation) -\cdot\cdot +\cdot\cdot \cdot (binary operation) -\chi\chi +\chi\chi \chi -\circ\circ +\circ\circ \circ (binary operation) -\clubsuit\clubsuit +\clubsuit\clubsuit \clubsuit -\cong\cong +\cong\cong \cong (relation) -\coprod\coprod +\coprod\coprod \coprod -\cup\cup +\cup\cup \cup (binary operation) -\dagger\dagger +\dagger\dagger \dagger (binary operation) -\dashv\dashv +\dashv\dashv \dashv (relation) -\ddagger\ddagger +\ddagger\ddagger \dagger (binary operation) -\Delta\Delta +\Delta\Delta \Delta -\delta\delta +\delta\delta \delta -\Diamond\Diamond +\Diamond\Diamond bigger \diamond -\diamond\diamond +\diamond\diamond \diamond (binary operation) -\diamondsuit\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit\diamondsuit \diamondsuit -\div\div +\div\div \div (binary operation) -\doteq\doteq +\doteq\doteq \doteq (relation) -\downarrow\downarrow +\downarrow\downarrow \downarrow (delimiter) -\Downarrow\Downarrow +\Downarrow\Downarrow \Downarrow (delimiter) -\ell\ell +\ell\ell \ell -\emptyset\emptyset +\emptyset\emptyset \emptyset -\epsilon\epsilon +\epsilon\epsilon \epsilon -\equiv\equiv +\equiv\equiv \equiv (relation) -\eta\eta +\eta\eta \eta -\exists\exists +\exists\exists \exists -\flat\flat +\flat\flat \flat -\forall\forall +\forall\forall \forall -\frown\frown +\frown\frown \frown (relation) -\Gamma\Gamma +\Gamma\Gamma \Gamma -\gamma\gamma +\gamma\gamma \gamma -\ge\ge +\ge\ge \ge -\geq\geq +\geq\geq \geq (relation) -\gets\gets +\gets\gets \gets -\gg\gg +\gg\gg \gg (relation) -\hbar\hbar +\hbar\hbar \hbar -\heartsuit\heartsuit +\heartsuit\heartsuit \heartsuit -\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow \hookleftarrow -\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow \hookrightarrow -\iff\iff +\iff\iff \iff -\Im\Im +\Im\Im \Im -\in\in +\in\in \in (relation) -\infty\infty +\infty\infty \infty -\int\int +\int\int \int -\iota\iota +\iota\iota \iota -\Join\Join +\Join\Join condensed bowtie symbol (relation) -\kappa\kappa +\kappa\kappa \kappa -\Lambda\Lambda +\Lambda\Lambda \Lambda -\lambda\lambda +\lambda\lambda \lambda -\land\land +\land\land \land -\langle\langle +\langle\langle \langle (delimiter) -\lbrace\lbrace +\lbrace\lbrace \lbrace (delimiter) -\lbrack\lbrack +\lbrack\lbrack \lbrack (delimiter) -\lceil\lceil +\lceil\lceil \lceil (delimiter) -\le\le +\le\le \le -\leadsto\leadsto +\leadsto\leadsto -\Leftarrow\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow\Leftarrow \Leftarrow -\leftarrow\leftarrow +\leftarrow\leftarrow \leftarrow -\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown \leftharpoondown -\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup \leftharpoonup -\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow \Leftrightarrow -\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow \leftrightarrow -\leq\leq +\leq\leq \leq (relation) -\lfloor\lfloor +\lfloor\lfloor \lfloor (delimiter) -\lhd\lhd +\lhd\lhd (left-pointing arrow head) -\ll\ll +\ll\ll \ll (relation) -\lnot\lnot +\lnot\lnot \lnot -\longleftarrow\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow\longleftarrow \longleftarrow -\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow \longleftrightarrow -\longmapsto\longmapsto +\longmapsto\longmapsto \longmapsto -\longrightarrow\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow\longrightarrow \longrightarrow -\lor\lor +\lor\lor \lor -\mapsto\mapsto +\mapsto\mapsto \mapsto -\mho\mho +\mho\mho -\mid\mid +\mid\mid \mid (relation) -\models\models +\models\models \models (relation) -\mp\mp +\mp\mp \mp (binary operation) -\mu\mu +\mu\mu \mu -\nabla\nabla +\nabla\nabla \nabla -\natural\natural +\natural\natural \natural -\ne\ne +\ne\ne \ne -\nearrow\nearrow +\nearrow\nearrow \nearrow -\neg\neg +\neg\neg \neg -\neq\neq +\neq\neq \neq (relation) -\ni\ni +\ni\ni \ni (relation) -\not\not +\not\not Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. -\notin\notin +\notin\notin \ni -\nu\nu +\nu\nu \nu -\nwarrow\nwarrow +\nwarrow\nwarrow \nwarrow -\odot\odot +\odot\odot \odot (binary operation) -\oint\oint +\oint\oint \oint -\Omega\Omega +\Omega\Omega \Omega -\omega\omega +\omega\omega \omega -\ominus\ominus +\ominus\ominus \ominus (binary operation) -\oplus\oplus +\oplus\oplus \oplus (binary operation) -\oslash\oslash +\oslash\oslash \oslash (binary operation) -\otimes\otimes +\otimes\otimes \otimes (binary operation) -\owns\owns +\owns\owns \owns -\parallel\parallel +\parallel\parallel \parallel (relation) -\partial\partial +\partial\partial \partial -\perp\perp +\perp\perp \perp (relation) -\phi\phi +\phi\phi \phi -\Pi\Pi +\Pi\Pi \Pi -\pi\pi +\pi\pi \pi -\pm\pm +\pm\pm \pm (binary operation) -\prec\prec +\prec\prec \prec (relation) -\preceq\preceq +\preceq\preceq \preceq (relation) -\prime\prime +\prime\prime \prime -\prod\prod +\prod\prod \prod -\propto\propto +\propto\propto \propto (relation) -\Psi\Psi +\Psi\Psi \Psi -\psi\psi +\psi\psi \psi -\rangle\rangle +\rangle\rangle \rangle (delimiter) -\rbrace\rbrace +\rbrace\rbrace \rbrace (delimiter) -\rbrack\rbrack +\rbrack\rbrack \rbrack (delimiter) -\rceil\rceil +\rceil\rceil \rceil (delimiter) -\Re\Re +\Re\Re \Re -\rfloor\rfloor +\rfloor\rfloor \rfloor -\rhd\rhd +\rhd\rhd (binary operation) -\rho\rho +\rho\rho \rho -\Rightarrow\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow\Rightarrow \Rightarrow -\rightarrow\rightarrow +\rightarrow\rightarrow \rightarrow -\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown \rightharpoondown -\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup \rightharpoonup -\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons \rightleftharpoons -\searrow\searrow +\searrow\searrow \searrow -\setminus\setminus +\setminus\setminus \setminus (binary operation) -\sharp\sharp +\sharp\sharp \sharp -\Sigma\Sigma +\Sigma\Sigma \Sigma -\sigma\sigma +\sigma\sigma \sigma -\sim\sim +\sim\sim \sim (relation) -\simeq\simeq +\simeq\simeq \simeq (relation) -\smallint\smallint +\smallint\smallint \smallint -\smile\smile +\smile\smile \smile (relation) -\spadesuit\spadesuit +\spadesuit\spadesuit \spadesuit -\sqcap\sqcap +\sqcap\sqcap \sqcap (binary operation) -\sqcup\sqcup +\sqcup\sqcup \sqcup (binary operation) -\sqsubset\sqsubset +\sqsubset\sqsubset (relation) -\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq +\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq \sqsubseteq (relation) -\sqsupset\sqsupset +\sqsupset\sqsupset (relation) -\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq +\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq \sqsupseteq (relation) -\star\star +\star\star \star (binary operation) -\subset\subset +\subset\subset \subset (relation) -\subseteq\subseteq +\subseteq\subseteq \subseteq (relation) -\succ\succ +\succ\succ \succ (relation) -\succeq\succeq +\succeq\succeq \succeq (relation) -\sum\sum +\sum\sum \sum -\supset\supset +\supset\supset \supset (relation) -\supseteq\supseteq +\supseteq\supseteq \supseteq (relation) -\surd\surd +\surd\surd \surd -\swarrow\swarrow +\swarrow\swarrow \swarrow -\tau\tau +\tau\tau \tau -\theta\theta +\theta\theta \theta -\times\times +\times\times \times (binary operation) -\to\to +\to\to \to -\top\top +\top\top \top -\triangle\triangle +\triangle\triangle \triangle -\triangleleft\triangleleft +\triangleleft\triangleleft \triangleleft (binary operation) -\triangleright\triangleright +\triangleright\triangleright \triangleright (binary operation) -\unlhd\unlhd +\unlhd\unlhd left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -\unrhd\unrhd +\unrhd\unrhd right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -\Uparrow\Uparrow +\Uparrow\Uparrow \Uparrow (delimiter) -\uparrow\uparrow +\uparrow\uparrow \uparrow (delimiter) -\Updownarrow\Updownarrow +\Updownarrow\Updownarrow \Updownarrow (delimiter) -\updownarrow\updownarrow +\updownarrow\updownarrow \updownarrow (delimiter) -\uplus\uplus +\uplus\uplus \uplus (binary operation) -\Upsilon\Upsilon +\Upsilon\Upsilon \Upsilon -\upsilon\upsilon +\upsilon\upsilon \upsilon -\varepsilon\varepsilon +\varepsilon\varepsilon \varepsilon -\varphi\varphi +\varphi\varphi \varphi -\varpi\varpi +\varpi\varpi \varpi -\varrho\varrho +\varrho\varrho \varrho -\varsigma\varsigma +\varsigma\varsigma \varsigma -\vartheta\vartheta +\vartheta\vartheta \vartheta -\vdash\vdash +\vdash\vdash \vdash (relation) -\vee\vee +\vee\vee \vee (binary operation) -\Vert\Vert +\Vert\Vert \Vert (delimiter) -\vert\vert +\vert\vert \vert (delimiter) -\wedge\wedge +\wedge\wedge \wedge (binary operation) -\wp\wp +\wp\wp \wp -\wr\wr +\wr\wr \wr (binary operation) -\Xi\Xi +\Xi\Xi \Xi -\xi\xi +\xi\xi \xi -\zeta\zeta +\zeta\zeta \zeta @@ -4944,113 +5153,116 @@ the pi symbol (\pi) in your output.
      Math functionsMath accentsMath symbolsMath formulas
      Math functions -math functions -functions, math +math functions +functions, math These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. -\arccos\arccos +\arccos\arccos \arccos -\arcsin\arcsin +\arcsin\arcsin \arcsin -\arctan\arctan +\arctan\arctan \arctan -\arg\arg +\arg\arg \arg -\bmod\bmod +\bmod\bmod Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) -\cos\cos +\cos\cos \cos -\cosh\cosh +\cosh\cosh \cosh -\cot\cot +\cot\cot \cos -\coth\coth +\coth\coth \cosh -\csc\csc +\csc\csc \csc -\deg\deg +\deg\deg \deg -\det\det +\det\det \deg -\dim\dim +\dim\dim \dim -\exp\exp +\exp\exp \exp -\gcd\gcd +\gcd\gcd \gcd -\hom\hom +\hom\hom \hom -\inf\inf +\inf\inf \inf -\ker\ker +\ker\ker \ker -\lg\lg +\lg\lg \lg -\lim\lim +\lim\lim \lim -\liminf\liminf +\liminf\liminf \liminf -\limsup\limsup +\limsup\limsup \limsup -\ln\ln +\ln\ln \ln -\log\log +\log\log \log -\max\max +\max\max \max -\min\min +\min\min \min -\pmod\pmod +\pmod\pmod parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) -\Pr\Pr +\Pr\Pr \Pr -\sec\sec +\sec\sec \sec -\sin\sin +\sin\sin \sin -\sinh\sinh +\sinh\sinh \sinh -\sup\sup -\sup +\sup\sup +sup + + + -\tan\tan +\tan\tan \tan -\tanh\tanh +\tanh\tanh \tanh @@ -5059,76 +5271,76 @@ spacing.
      Math accentsSpacing in math modeMath functionsMath formulas
      Math accents -math accents -accents, mathematical +math accents +accents, mathematical &latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text (Accents). -\acute\acute -acute accent, math +\acute\acute +acute accent, math Math acute accent: \acute{x}. -\bar\bar -bar-over accent, math -macron accent, math +\bar\bar +bar-over accent, math +macron accent, math Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. -\breve\breve -breve accent, math +\breve\breve +breve accent, math Math breve accent: \breve{x}. -\check\check -check accent, math -hacek accent, math +\check\check +check accent, math +hacek accent, math Math hacek (check) accent: \check{x}. -\ddot\ddot -double dot accent, math +\ddot\ddot +double dot accent, math Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. -\dot\dot -overdot accent, math -dot over accent, math +\dot\dot +overdot accent, math +dot over accent, math Math dot accent: \dot{x}. -\grave\grave -grave accent, math +\grave\grave +grave accent, math Math grave accent: \grave{x}. -\hat\hat -hat accent, math -circumflex accent, math +\hat\hat +hat accent, math +circumflex accent, math Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. -\imath\imath -dotless i, math +\imath\imath +dotless i, math Math dotless i. -\jmath\jmath -dotless j, math +\jmath\jmath +dotless j, math Math dotless j. -\mathring\mathring -ring accent, math +\mathring\mathring +ring accent, math Math ring accent: x. -\tilde\tilde -tilde accent, math +\tilde\tilde +tilde accent, math Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}. -\vec\vec -vector symbol, math +\vec\vec +vector symbol, math Math vector symbol: \vec{x}. -\widehat\widehat -wide hat accent, math +\widehat\widehat +wide hat accent, math Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. -\widehat\widehat -wide tile accent, math +\widehat\widehat +wide tile accent, math Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. @@ -5137,8 +5349,8 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text
      Spacing in math modeMath miscellanyMath accentsMath formulas
      Spacing in math mode -spacing within math mode -math mode, spacing +spacing within math mode +math mode, spacing In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics @@ -5147,15 +5359,15 @@ commands for use in math mode: \; -\; +\; A thick space (5\over18\,quad). \: \> -\: -\> +\: +\> Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). \, -\, +\, A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. \! A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). @@ -5165,46 +5377,46 @@ commands for use in math mode: Math miscellanySpacing in math modeMath formulas
      Math miscellany -math miscellany +math miscellany -\*\* -discretionary multiplication -multiplication symbol, discretionary line break +\*\* +discretionary multiplication +multiplication symbol, discretionary line break A &textldquo;discretionary&textrdquo; multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. -\cdots\cdots +\cdots\cdots A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. As in: &textlsquo;$\cdots$&textrsquo;. -\ddots\ddots +\ddots\ddots A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. -\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} -\frac +\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} +\frac Produces the fraction num divided by den. -\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 -\right -null delimiter +\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 +\right +null delimiter The two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. -\overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} +\overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} Generates a brace over text. For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. -\overline{text}\overline{text} +\overline{text}\overline{text} Generates a horizontal line over tex. -For exampe, \overline{x+y}. +For example, \overline{x+y}. -\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} +\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as @@ -5214,7 +5426,7 @@ In &tex;, the result looks like this: $\root 3 \of x+y$. -\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} +\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} Puts text above relation. For example, \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. @@ -5222,14 +5434,14 @@ In &tex;, the result looks like this: $\buildrel f \over \longrightarrow$. -\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} +\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} Generates math with a brace underneath. In &tex;, the result looks like this: $\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}$. -\underline{text}\underline{text} +\underline{text}\underline{text} Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. @@ -5238,8 +5450,8 @@ In &tex;, the result looks like this: $\underline{xyz}$ -\vdots\vdots -\vdots +\vdots\vdots +\vdots Produces a vertical ellipsis. In &tex;, the result looks like this: @@ -5253,12 +5465,11 @@ $\vdots$. ModesPage stylesMath formulasTop Modes -modes -paragraph mode -math mode -left-to-right mode -lR mode - +modes +paragraph mode +math mode +left-to-right mode +LR mode When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: @@ -5272,39 +5483,42 @@ modes: Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short -&latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when +Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when &latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. -&textldquo;Paragraph mode&textrdquo; is the most common; it&textrsquo;s the one &latex; is in -when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your -text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in -&textldquo;math mode&textrdquo; when it&textrsquo;s generating a mathematical formula. In &textldquo;LR -mode&textrdquo;, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it -produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, -unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it -never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words -into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting them from left -to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting -box was too wide to fit on the line. - -&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When -&latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -&textldquo;inner paragraph mode&textrdquo;. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called &textldquo;outer paragraph mode&textrdquo;. +Paragraph mode is the most common; it&textrsquo;s the one &latex; is in +when processing ordinary text. In this mode, &latex; breaks the +input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. + +&latex; is in math mode when it&textrsquo;s generating a mathematical +formula, either displayed math or within a line. + +\mbox, and LR mode +In LR mode, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output +that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. +However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to +right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a +hundred words into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting +them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely +complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line). +&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an +\mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside +the box&textmdash;for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a +formula in the box. + +There are also several text-producing commands and environments for +making a box that put &latex; into paragraph mode. The box made by +one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. +When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to +be in &textldquo;inner paragraph mode&textrdquo; (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph +mode, which it starts out in, is called &textldquo;outer paragraph mode&textrdquo;. Page stylesSpacesModesTop Page styles -styles, page -page styles +styles, page +page styles The \documentclass command determines the size and position of the page&textrsquo;s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. @@ -5319,8 +5533,8 @@ the page&textrsquo;s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them \maketitle\pagenumberingPage styles
      \maketitle -titles, making -\maketitle +titles, making +\maketitle The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title page&textmdash;except in the article class, where the title is placed @@ -5328,30 +5542,30 @@ at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations: -\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} -author, for titlepage -\\ for \author -\and for \author +\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} +author, for titlepage +\\ for \author +\and for \author The \author command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate lines within a single author&textrsquo;s entry&textmdash;for example, to give the author&textrsquo;s institution or address. -\date{text}\date{text} -date, for titlepage +\date{text}\date{text} +date, for titlepage The \date command declares text to be the document&textrsquo;s date. With no \date command, the current date (\today) is used. -\thanks{text}\thanks{text} -thanks, for titlepage -credit footnote +\thanks{text}\thanks{text} +thanks, for titlepage +credit footnote The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. -\title{text}\title{text} -title, for titlepage -\\ for \title +\title{text}\title{text} +title, for titlepage +\\ for \title The \title command declares text to be the title of the document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. @@ -5361,8 +5575,8 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual.
      \pagenumbering\pagestyle\maketitlePage styles
      \pagenumbering -\pagenumbering -page numbering style +\pagenumbering +page numbering style Synopsis: @@ -5370,7 +5584,9 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual.
      \pagenumbering{style}
       
      -Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: +Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style; also +resets the page number to 1. The style argument is one of +the following:
      arabic @@ -5393,10 +5609,10 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. \pagestyle\thispagestyle\pagenumberingPage styles
      \pagestyle -\pagestyle -header style -footer style -running header and footer style +\pagestyle +header style +footer style +running header and footer style Synopsis: @@ -5427,7 +5643,7 @@ goes in the headers. Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: -\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} +\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} Sets both the left and the right heading. A &textldquo;left-hand heading&textrdquo; (left) is generated by the last \markboth command before the end of the page, while a &textldquo;right-hand heading&textrdquo; (right) is @@ -5435,7 +5651,7 @@ generated by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. -\markright{right}\markright{right} +\markright{right}\markright{right} Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. @@ -5444,7 +5660,7 @@ the page.
      \thispagestyle\pagestylePage styles
      \thispagestyle{style} -\thispagestyle +\thispagestyle The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the \pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it @@ -5455,7 +5671,7 @@ changes to style for the current page only. SpacesBoxesPage stylesTop Spaces -spaces +spaces &latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. @@ -5468,9 +5684,9 @@ more often useful in math mode (\hspace
      Fixed horizontal space.
       
      \hfill
      Stretchable horizontal space.
       
      \SPACE
      Normal interword space.
      -
      \AT
      Ending a sentence.
      +
      \&arobase;
      Ending a sentence.
       
      \thinspace
      One-sixth of an em.
      -
      \/
      Per-character italic correction.
      +
      \/
      Insert italic correction.
       
      \hrulefill
      Stretchable horizontal rule.
       
      \dotfill
      Stretchable horizontal dots.
       
      @@ -5484,7 +5700,7 @@ Vertical space
       
       \hspace\hfillSpaces
       
      \hspace -\hspace +\hspace Synopsis: @@ -5506,29 +5722,31 @@ form.
      \hfill\SPACE\hspaceSpaces
      \hfill +\hfill -\hfill +stretch, infinite horizontal +infinite horizontal stretch The \hfill fill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. -\fill +\fill The \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the glue value 0pt plus1fill); thus, \hspace\fill is equivalent to \hfill.
      -\SPACE\AT\hfillSpaces -
      \SPACE -\SPACE -\TAB -\NEWLINE +\SPACE\&arobase;\hfillSpaces +
      \SPACE: Normal interword space +\SPACE +\TAB +\NEWLINE The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It&textrsquo;s -useful after punctuation which shouldn&textrsquo;t end a sentence. For example -Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. -It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a +useful after punctuation which shouldn&textrsquo;t end a sentence. For example, +the article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It +is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system. In normal circumstances, \tab and \newline @@ -5536,9 +5754,10 @@ are equivalent to \ .
      -\AT\thinspace\SPACESpaces -
      \&arobase; -\&arobase; +\&arobase;\thinspace\SPACESpaces +
      \&arobase;: Force sentence-ending punctuation +\&arobase; +\AT The \&arobase; command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after @@ -5552,7 +5771,7 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without produces - + &dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots;&linebreak; &dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; @@ -5560,19 +5779,20 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without
      -\thinspace\/\ATSpaces -
      \thinspace -\thinspace +\thinspace\/\&arobase;Spaces +
      \thinspace: Insert 1/6em +\thinspace \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that -is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in &textrsquo;&textrdquo;. +is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested +quotes, as in &textrsquo;&textrdquo;.
      \/\hrulefill\thinspaceSpaces -
      \/ -\/ +
      \/: Insert italic correction +\/ +italic correction The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, @@ -5589,6 +5809,11 @@ normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the &tex; output, the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;s are nicely separated) with f: f;. +When changing fonts with commands such as \textit{italic +text} or {\itshape italic text}, &latex; will +automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (Font +styles). + Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare @@ -5597,11 +5822,14 @@ pdf\/\TeX{} pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;) with pdf&tex;. +There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done +in a different way. +
      \hrulefill\dotfill\/Spaces
      \hrulefill -\hrulefill +\hrulefill The \hrulefill fill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal @@ -5612,7 +5840,7 @@ rule. \dotfill\addvspace\hrulefillSpaces
      \dotfill -\dotfill +\dotfill The \dotfill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; that fills with dots instead of just white space. @@ -5622,53 +5850,59 @@ with dots instead of just white space.
      \addvspace\bigskip \medskip \smallskip\dotfillSpaces
      \addvspace -\addvspace -vertical space -space, inserting vertical +\addvspace +vertical space +space, inserting vertical \addvspace{length} The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to length. +command will not add more space than is needed to make the natural +length of the total vertical space equal to length.
      \bigskip \medskip \smallskip\vfill\addvspaceSpaces
      \bigskip \medskip \smallskip -These commands produce a given amount of space. +These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the +document class.
      \bigskip -\bigskip -\bigskipamount -The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line -space (with stretch and shrink). +\bigskip +\bigskipamount +The same as \vspace{\bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book and +article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt). \medskip -\medskip -\medskipamount -The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily -about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +\medskip +\medskipamount +The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of +a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book +and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt). \smallskip -\smallskip -\smallskipamount -The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a -quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). +\smallskip +\smallskipamount +The same as \vspace{\smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the +book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus +1pt).
      -The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. -
      \vfill\vspace\bigskip \medskip \smallskipSpaces
      \vfill -\vfill +\vfill + +stretch, infinite vertical +infinite vertical stretch The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It&textrsquo;s equivalent to @@ -5678,7 +5912,7 @@ can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It&textrsquo;s equivalent to
      \vspace\vfillSpaces
      \vspace[*]{length} -\vspace +\vspace Synopsis: @@ -5699,7 +5933,7 @@ space is not removed. BoxesSpecial insertionsSpacesTop Boxes -boxes +boxes All the predefined length parameters (Predefined lengths) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. @@ -5707,21 +5941,21 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands. \mbox
      Horizontal boxes.
       
      \fbox and \framebox
      Put a frame around a box.
      -
      lrbox
      An environment like \sbox.
      +
      lrbox
      An environment like \sbox.
       
      \makebox
      Box, adjustable position.
       
      \parbox
      Box with text in paragraph mode.
       
      \raisebox
      Raise or lower text.
      -
      \savebox
      Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
      -
      \sbox
      Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
      +
      \savebox
      Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
      +
      \sbox
      Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
       
      \usebox
      Print saved text.
       
      \mbox\fbox and \frameboxBoxes
      \mbox{text} -\mbox +\mbox -hyphenation, preventing +hyphenation, preventing The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. @@ -5731,8 +5965,8 @@ lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. \fbox and \frameboxlrbox\mboxBoxes
      \fbox and \framebox -\fbox -\framebox +\fbox +\framebox Synopses: @@ -5749,8 +5983,8 @@ specification of the box width with the optional width argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional position argument. -\fboxrule -\fboxsep +\fboxrule +\fboxsep Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default .4pt), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default 3pt) between the rule and the contents of the box. @@ -5762,7 +5996,7 @@ argument.
      lrbox\makebox\fbox and \frameboxBoxes
      lrbox -lrbox +lrbox \begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} @@ -5775,7 +6009,7 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox.
      \makebox\parboxlrboxBoxes
      \makebox -\makebox +\makebox Synopsis: @@ -5808,7 +6042,7 @@ stretchable space for this to work.
      \parbox\raisebox\makeboxBoxes
      \parbox -\parbox +\parbox Synopsis: @@ -5858,7 +6092,7 @@ for this to work.
      \raisebox\savebox\parboxBoxes
      \raisebox -\raisebox +\raisebox Synopsis: @@ -5880,7 +6114,7 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth.
      \savebox\sbox\raiseboxBoxes
      \savebox -\savebox +\savebox Synopsis: @@ -5897,7 +6131,7 @@ declared with \newsavebox ( \sbox\usebox\saveboxBoxes
      \sbox{\boxcmd}{text} -\sbox +\sbox Synopsis: @@ -5914,8 +6148,8 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled
      \usebox\sboxBoxes -
      \usebox{\boxcmd -\usebox +
      \usebox{\boxcmd} +\usebox Synopsis: @@ -5936,7 +6170,7 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. -Reserved characters
      Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
      +Reserved characters
      Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
       
      Text symbols
      Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
       
      Accents
      Inserting accents.
       
      Non-English characters
      Inserting other non-English characters.
      @@ -5947,8 +6181,8 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
       
       Reserved charactersText symbolsSpecial insertions
       
      Reserved characters -reserved characters -characters, reserved +reserved characters +characters, reserved The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called &textldquo;reserved characters&textrdquo; or &textldquo;special characters&textrdquo;. @@ -5957,33 +6191,33 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
      # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
       
      -\# -\$ -\% -\& -\_ -\{ -\} +\# +\$ +\% +\& +\_ +\{ +\} Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce $ in your output. -\backslash +\backslash One exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is produced by using \ in a verbatim command (verbatim). -\~ -\^ +\~ +\^ Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over the following letter, as in o and o (Accents); to get a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim command. -\symbol -accessing any character of a font +\symbol +accessing any character of a font Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the @@ -5999,274 +6233,279 @@ with ", so the previous example could also be written as Text symbolsAccentsReserved charactersSpecial insertions
      Text symbols -text symbols -textcomp package +text symbols +textcomp package &latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. -\copyright\copyright -\textcopyright\textcopyright -copyright symbol +\copyright\copyright +\textcopyright\textcopyright +copyright symbol The copyright symbol, ©right;. -\dag\dag -dagger, in text +\dag\dag +dagger, in text The dagger symbol (in text). -\ddag\ddag -double dagger, in text +\ddag\ddag +double dagger, in text The double dagger symbol (in text). -\LaTeX\LaTeX -&latex; logo -logo, &latex; +\LaTeX\LaTeX +&latex; logo +logo, &latex; The &latex; logo. -\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) -\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») -\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) -\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) -double guillemets -single guillemets -left angle quotation marks -right angle quotation marks -double angle quotation marks -single angle quotation marks -French quotation marks -quotation marks, French +\LaTeXe\LaTeXe +&latex;2e logo +logo, &latex;2e +The &latex;2e logo. + +\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) +\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») +\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) +\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) +double guillemets +single guillemets +left angle quotation marks +right angle quotation marks +double angle quotation marks +single angle quotation marks +French quotation marks +quotation marks, French Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: «, », ‹, ›. -\ldots\ldots -\dots\dots -\textellipsis\textellipsis -ellipsis +\ldots\ldots +\dots\dots +\textellipsis\textellipsis +ellipsis An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): &textlsquo;&dots;&textrsquo;. \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. -\lq\lq -left quote -opening quote +\lq\lq +left quote +opening quote Left (opening) quote: &textlsquo;. -\P\P -\textparagraph\textparagraph -paragraph symbol -pilcrow +\P\P +\textparagraph\textparagraph +paragraph symbol +pilcrow Paragraph sign (pilcrow). -\pounds\pounds -\textsterling\textsterling -pounds symbol -sterling symbol +\pounds\pounds +\textsterling\textsterling +pounds symbol +sterling symbol English pounds sterling: £. -\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) -\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) -double low-9 quotation mark -single low-9 quotation mark -low-9 quotation marks, single and double -Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) +\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) +double low-9 quotation mark +single low-9 quotation mark +low-9 quotation marks, single and double +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚. -\rq\rq -right quote -closing quote +\rq\rq +right quote +closing quote Right (closing) quote: &textrsquo;. -\S\S -section symbol +\S\S +section symbol Section symbol. -\TeX\TeX -&tex; logo -logo, &tex; +\TeX\TeX +&tex; logo +logo, &tex; The &tex; logo. -\textasciicircum\textasciicircum -circumflex, ASCII, in text -ASCII circumflex, in text +\textasciicircum\textasciicircum +circumflex, ASCII, in text +ASCII circumflex, in text ASCII circumflex: ^. -\textasciitilde\textasciitilde -tilde, ASCII, in text -ASCII tilde, in text +\textasciitilde\textasciitilde +tilde, ASCII, in text +ASCII tilde, in text ASCII tilde: ~. -\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered -asterisk, centered, in text -centered asterisk, in text +\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered +asterisk, centered, in text +centered asterisk, in text Centered asterisk: *. -\textbackslash\textbackslash -backslash, in text +\textbackslash\textbackslash +backslash, in text Backslash: \. -\textbar\textbar -vertical bar, in text -bar, vertical, in text +\textbar\textbar +vertical bar, in text +bar, vertical, in text Vertical bar: |. -\textbardbl\textbardbl -vertical bar, double, in text -bar, double vertical, in text -double vertical bar, in text +\textbardbl\textbardbl +vertical bar, double, in text +bar, double vertical, in text +double vertical bar, in text Double vertical bar. -\textbigcircle\textbigcircle -big circle symbols, in text -circle symbol, big, in text +\textbigcircle\textbigcircle +big circle symbols, in text +circle symbol, big, in text Big circle symbol. -\textbraceleft\textbraceleft -left brace, in text -brace, left, in text +\textbraceleft\textbraceleft +left brace, in text +brace, left, in text Left brace: {. -\textbraceright\textbraceright -right brace, in text -brace, right, in text +\textbraceright\textbraceright +right brace, in text +brace, right, in text Right brace: }. -\textbullet\textbullet -bullet, in text +\textbullet\textbullet +bullet, in text Bullet: •. -\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} -circled letter, in text +\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} +circled letter, in text letter in a circle, as in ®istered;. -\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark -\textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark -\textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmark -composite word mark, in text -cap height -ascender height +\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark +\textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark +\textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmark +composite word mark, in text +cap height +ascender height Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form has the ascender height. -\textdagger\textdagger -dagger, in text +\textdagger\textdagger +dagger, in text Dagger: \dag. -\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl -dagger, double, in text -double dagger, in text +\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl +dagger, double, in text +double dagger, in text Double dagger: \ddag. -\textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $) -dollar sign -currency, dollar +\textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $) +dollar sign +currency, dollar Dollar sign: $. -\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) -em-dash +\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) +em-dash Em-dash: &textmdash; (for punctuation). -\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) -e-dash +\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) +e-dash En-dash: &textmdash; (for ranges). -\texteuro\texteuro -euro symbol -currency, euro +\texteuro\texteuro +euro symbol +currency, euro The Euro symbol: €. -\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) -exclamation point, upside-down +\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) +exclamation point, upside-down Upside down exclamation point: ¡. -\textgreater\textgreater -greater than symbol, in text +\textgreater\textgreater +greater than symbol, in text Greater than: >. -\textless\textless -less than symbol, in text +\textless\textless +less than symbol, in text Less than: <. -\textleftarrow\textleftarrow -arrow, left, in text -left arrow, in text +\textleftarrow\textleftarrow +arrow, left, in text +left arrow, in text Left arrow. -\textordfeminine\textordfeminine -\textordmasculine\textordmasculine -feminine ordinal symbol -masculine ordinal symbol -ordinals, feminine and masculine -Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine +\textordfeminine\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine\textordmasculine +feminine ordinal symbol +masculine ordinal symbol +ordinals, feminine and masculine +Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. -\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered -period, centered, in text -centered period, in text +\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered +period, centered, in text +centered period, in text Centered period: \cdot. -\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) -questionation point, upside-down -Upside down questionation point: ¿. +\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) +question mark, upside-down +Upside down question mark: ¿. -\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) -left quote, double -double left quote +\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) +left quote, double +double left quote Double left quote: &textldquo;. -\textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ') -right quote, double -double right quote +\textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ') +right quote, double +double right quote Double right quote: &textrdquo;. -\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) -left quote, single -single left quote +\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) +left quote, single +single left quote Single left quote: &textlsquo;. -\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') -right quote, single -single right quote +\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') +right quote, single +single right quote Single right quote: &textrsquo;. -\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase -\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase -quote, straight base -straight quote, base -double quote, straight base -straight double quote, base +\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase +\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase +quote, straight base +straight quote, base +double quote, straight base +straight double quote, base Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. -\textregistered\textregistered -registered symbol +\textregistered\textregistered +registered symbol Registered symbol: ®istered;. -\textrightarrow\textrightarrow -arrow, right, in text -right arrow, in text +\textrightarrow\textrightarrow +arrow, right, in text +right arrow, in text Right arrow. -\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash -three-quarters em-dash -em-dash, three-quarters +\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash +three-quarters em-dash +em-dash, three-quarters &textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. -\texttrademark\texttrademark -trademark symbol +\texttrademark\texttrademark +trademark symbol Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. -\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash -two-thirds em-dash -em-dash, two-thirds +\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash +two-thirds em-dash +em-dash, two-thirds &textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. -\textunderscore\textunderscore -underscore, in text +\textunderscore\textunderscore +underscore, in text Underscore: _. -\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace -visible space symbol, in text +\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace +visible space symbol, in text Visible space symbol. @@ -6276,10 +6515,12 @@ has the ascender height. AccentsNon-English charactersText symbolsSpecial insertions
      Accents -accents -characters, accented -letters, accented +accents +characters, accented +letters, accented +babel package +multilingual support &latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists @@ -6291,133 +6532,133 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1. \" \capitaldieresis -\" (umlaut accent) -\capitaldieresis -umlaut accent -dieresis accent +\" (umlaut accent) +\capitaldieresis +umlaut accent +dieresis accent Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o. \' \capitalacute -\&textrsquo; (acute accent) -\capitalacute -acute accent +\&textrsquo; (acute accent) +\capitalacute +acute accent Produces an acute accent, as in o. In the tabbing environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (tabbing). \. -\. (dot-over accent) -dot accent -dot-over accent +\. (dot-over accent) +dot accent +dot-over accent Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o. \= \capitalmacron -\= (macron accent) -\capitalmacron -macron accent -overbar accent -bar-over accent +\= (macron accent) +\capitalmacron +macron accent +overbar accent +bar-over accent Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o. \^ \capitalcircumflex -\^ (circumflex accent) -\capitalcircumflex -circumflex accent -hat accent +\^ (circumflex accent) +\capitalcircumflex +circumflex accent +hat accent Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o. \` \capitalgrave -\&textlsquo; (grave accent) -\capitalgrave -grave accent +\&textlsquo; (grave accent) +\capitalgrave +grave accent Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o. In the tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin (tabbing). \~ \capitaltilde -\~ (tilde accent) -\capitaltilde -tilde accent +\~ (tilde accent) +\capitaltilde +tilde accent Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n. \b -\b (bar-under accent) -bar-under accent +\b (bar-under accent) +bar-under accent Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o. \c \capitalcedilla -\c (cedilla accent) -\capitalcedilla -cedilla accent +\c (cedilla accent) +\capitalcedilla +cedilla accent Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c. \d \capitaldotaccent -\d (dot-under accent) -\capitaldotaccent -dot-under accent +\d (dot-under accent) +\capitaldotaccent +dot-under accent Produces a dot accent under the following, as in o. \H \capitalhungarumlaut -\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) -\capitalhungarumlaut -hungarian umlaut accent +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) +\capitalhungarumlaut +hungarian umlaut accent Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o. \i -\i (dotless i) -dotless i +\i (dotless i) +dotless i Produces a dotless i, as in &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;. \j -\j (dotless j) -dotless j +\j (dotless j) +dotless j Produces a dotless j, as in &textlsquo;j&textrsquo;. \k \capitalogonek -\k (ogonek) -\capitalogonek -ogonek +\k (ogonek) +\capitalogonek +ogonek Produces a letter with ogonek, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. Not available in the OT1 encoding. \r \capitalring -\r (ring accent) -\capitalring -ring accent +\r (ring accent) +\capitalring +ring accent Produces a ring accent, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. \t \capitaltie \newtie \capitalnewtie -\t (tie-after accent) -\capitaltie -\newtie -\capitalnewtie -tie-after accent +\t (tie-after accent) +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +tie-after accent Produces a tie-after accent, as in &textlsquo;oo&textrsquo;. The \newtie form is centered in its box. \u \capitalbreve -\u (breve accent) -\capitalbreve -breve accent +\u (breve accent) +\capitalbreve +breve accent Produces a breve accent, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. \underbar -\underbar -underbar +\underbar +underbar Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through @@ -6425,11 +6666,11 @@ descenders. See also \underline in \v \capitalcaron -\v (breve accent) -\capitalcaron -hacek accent -check accent -caron accent +\v (breve accent) +\capitalcaron +hacek accent +check accent +caron accent Produces a hacek (check, caron) accent, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;.
      @@ -6439,10 +6680,10 @@ descenders. See also \underline in Non-English characters\ruleAccentsSpecial insertions
      Non-English characters -special characters -non-English characters -characters, non-English -letters, non-English +special characters +non-English characters +characters, non-English +letters, non-English Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly used in languages other than English. @@ -6451,80 +6692,80 @@ used in languages other than English. \aa \AA -\aa (å) -\AA (Å) -aring +\aa (å) +\AA (Å) +aring å and Å. \ae \AE -\ae (æ) -\AE (Æ) -ae ligature +\ae (æ) +\AE (Æ) +ae ligature æ and Æ. \dh \DH -\dh (æ) -\DH (Æ) -Icelandic eth -eth, Icelandic letter +\dh (ð) +\DH (Ð) +Icelandic eth +eth, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. \dj \DJ -\dj -\DJ -xxxx +\dj +\DJ +Crossed d and D, a.k.a.&noeos; capital and small letter d with stroke. \ij \IJ -\ij (ij) -\IJ (IJ) -ij letter, Dutch +\ij (ij) +\IJ (IJ) +ij letter, Dutch ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). \l \L -\l (&lslash;) -\L (&Lslash;) -polish l +\l (&lslash;) +\L (&Lslash;) +polish l &lslash; and &Lslash;. \ng \NG -\ng -\NG -xxxx +\ng +\NG +Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics. \o \O -\o (ø) -\O (Ø) -oslash +\o (ø) +\O (Ø) +oslash ø and Ø. \oe \OE -\oe (œ) -\OE (Œ) -oe ligature +\oe (œ) +\OE (Œ) +oe ligature œ and Œ. \ss \SS -\ss (ß) -\SS (SS) -es-zet German letter -sharp S letters +\ss (ß) +\SS (SS) +es-zet German letter +sharp S letters ß and SS. \th \TH -\th (þ) -\TH (Þ) -Icelandic thorn -thorn, Icelandic letter +\th (þ) +\TH (Þ) +Icelandic thorn +thorn, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. @@ -6533,7 +6774,7 @@ used in languages other than English.
      \rule\todayNon-English charactersSpecial insertions
      \rule -\rule +\rule Synopsis: @@ -6559,7 +6800,7 @@ rectangles. The arguments are:
      \today\ruleSpecial insertions
      \today -\today +\today The \today command produces today&textrsquo;s date, in the format month dd, yyyy; for example, &textlsquo;July 4, 1976&textrsquo;. @@ -6567,7 +6808,7 @@ It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and \year (\day \month \year) to do this. It is not updated as the program runs. -datetime package +datetime package The datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety of other date formats. @@ -6576,8 +6817,8 @@ of other date formats. Splitting the inputFront/back matterSpecial insertionsTop Splitting the input -splitting the input file -input file +splitting the input file +input file A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole input in a single large file, it&textrsquo;s more efficient to split it into @@ -6597,7 +6838,7 @@ external file to be created with the main document. \include\includeonlySplitting the input
      \include -\include +\include Synopsis: @@ -6614,7 +6855,7 @@ command executes \clearpage to start a new page only run if file is listed as an argument to \includeonly. See the next section. -nested \include, not allowed +nested \include, not allowed The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read by another \include command. @@ -6622,7 +6863,7 @@ read by another \include command.
      \includeonly\input\includeSplitting the input
      \includeonly -\includeonly +\includeonly Synopsis: @@ -6642,7 +6883,7 @@ effective.
      \input\includeonlySplitting the input
      \input -\input +\input Synopsis: @@ -6674,10 +6915,10 @@ is tried (foo or foo.bar). Tables of contentsGlossariesFront/back matter
      Tables of contents -table of contents, creating +table of contents, creating -\tableofcontents -.toc file +\tableofcontents +.toc file A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must @@ -6688,26 +6929,29 @@ not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command. -\listoffigures -\listoftables +\listoffigures +\listoftables +.lof file +.lot file The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables -produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. +produce a list of figures and a list of tables (from .lof and +.lot files), respectively. Everything works exactly the same +as for the table of contents. -\nofiles +\nofiles The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and prevents any of these lists from being generated. -\addcontentsline
      Add an entry to table of contents etc.
      -
      \addtocontents
      Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
      +\addcontentsline
      Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
      +
      \addtocontents
      Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
       
      \addcontentsline\addtocontentsTables of contents \addcontentsline -\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} -table of contents entry, manually adding +\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +table of contents entry, manually adding The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: @@ -6733,20 +6977,20 @@ following, matching the value of the ext argument: entry -The actual text of the entry. +The text of the entry. -\contentsline +\contentsline What is written to the .ext file is the command \contentsline{unit}{name}. - + \addtocontents\addcontentslineTables of contents \addtocontents -\addtocontents{ext}{text} +\addtocontents{ext}{text} The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text (or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that @@ -6754,9 +6998,9 @@ generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written: -toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or -lot (list of tables). +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of +figures), or lot (list of tables). text The text to be written. @@ -6767,21 +7011,22 @@ generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. GlossariesIndexesTables of contentsFront/back matter
      Glossaries -glossaries +glossaries -\makeglossary +\makeglossary The command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. -\glossary -.glo file +\glossary +.glo file The command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. -\glossaryentry +\glossaryentry Specifically, what gets written is the command \glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. +glossary package The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier glossaries. @@ -6789,36 +7034,37 @@ glossaries.
      IndexesGlossariesFront/back matter
      Indexes -indexes +indexes -\makeindex +\makeindex The command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in the preamble. -\index -.idx file +\index +.idx file The command \index{text} writes an index entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. -\indexentry +\indexentry Specifically, what gets written is the command \indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. -&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries +&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries +index entries, &textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; To generate a index entry for &textlsquo;bar&textrsquo; that says &textlsquo;See foo&textrsquo;, use a vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso instead of see to make a &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo; entry. -\seename -\alsoname +\seename +\alsoname The text &textlsquo;See&textrsquo; is defined by the macro \seename, and &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo; by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other languages. -makeindex program -xindy program -.ind file +makeindex program +xindy program +.ind file The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external command, usually either makeindex (http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the @@ -6826,23 +7072,23 @@ multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge. This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset the index. -printindex -makeidx package +printindex +makeidx package The index is usually generated with the \printindex command. This is defined in the makeidx package, so \usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. -indexspace +indexspace The rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new letter in the printed index; its default value is 10pt plus5pt minus3pt. -showidx package +showidx package The showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. -multind package +multind package The multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. @@ -6852,8 +7098,8 @@ preparing the index. LettersTerminal input/outputFront/back matterTop Letters -letters -creating letters +letters +creating letters You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at @@ -6885,7 +7131,7 @@ the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter closes with a \closing command. -\\ for letters +\\ for letters After the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc command produces the usual &textldquo;cc: &dots;&textrdquo;. There&textrsquo;s also a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these @@ -6898,7 +7144,7 @@ commands, use \\ to separate the items. \cc
      Cc list.
       
      \closing
      Saying goodbye.
       
      \encl
      List of enclosed material.
      -
      \location
      Your organisation&textrsquo;s address.
      +
      \location
      Your organization&textrsquo;s address.
       
      \makelabels
      Making address labels.
       
      \name
      Your name, for the return address.
       
      \opening
      Saying hello.
      @@ -6912,14 +7158,14 @@ commands, use \\ to separate the items.
       
       \address\ccLetters
       
      \address{return-address} -\address +\address The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation&textrsquo;s standard +will be formatted for copying onto your organization&textrsquo;s standard letterhead. (Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. @@ -6929,8 +7175,8 @@ letter will be formatted as a personal letter. \cc\closing\addressLetters
      \cc -\cc -cc list, in letters +\cc +cc list, in letters Synopsis: @@ -6946,9 +7192,9 @@ printed on a separate line. \closing\encl\ccLetters
      \closing -\closing -letters, ending -closing letters +\closing +letters, ending +closing letters Synopsis: @@ -6966,8 +7212,8 @@ printed on a separate line. \encl\location\closingLetters
      \encl -\encl -enclosure list +\encl +enclosure list Synopsis: @@ -6981,18 +7227,18 @@ printed on a separate line.
      \location\makelabels\enclLetters
      \location -\location +\location \location{address} -This modifies your organisation&textrsquo;s standard address. This only appears +This modifies your organization&textrsquo;s standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
      \makelabels\name\locationLetters
      \makelabels -\makelabels +\makelabels \makelabels{number} @@ -7004,7 +7250,7 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
      \name\opening\makelabelsLetters
      \name -\name +\name \name{June Davenport} @@ -7015,8 +7261,8 @@ address.
      \opening\ps\nameLetters
      \opening{text} -\opening -letters, starting +\opening +letters, starting Synopsis: @@ -7036,8 +7282,8 @@ For instance:
      \ps\signature\openingLetters
      \ps -\ps -postscript, in letters +\ps +postscript, in letters Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after \closing. @@ -7046,7 +7292,7 @@ For instance:
      \signature\startbreaks\psLetters
      \signature{text} -\signature +\signature Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within @@ -7056,29 +7302,27 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within
      \startbreaks\stopbreaks\signatureLetters
      \startbreaks -\startbreaks +\startbreaks \startbreaks Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. -
      \stopbreaks\telephone\startbreaksLetters
      \stopbreaks -\stopbreaks +\stopbreaks \stopbreaks Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. -
      \telephone\stopbreaksLetters
      \telephone -\telephone +\telephone \telephone{number} @@ -7090,8 +7334,8 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within Terminal input/outputCommand lineLettersTop Terminal input/output -input/output -terminal input/output +input/output +terminal input/output \typein
      Read text from the terminal.
      @@ -7101,7 +7345,7 @@ space for your signature.  \\ starts a new line within
       
       \typein\typeoutTerminal input/output
       
      \typein[cmd]{msg} -\typein +\typein Synopsis: @@ -7121,7 +7365,7 @@ redefined to be the typed input.
      \typeout\typeinTerminal input/output
      \typeout{msg} -\typeout +\typeout Synopsis: @@ -7145,74 +7389,57 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in Command lineDocument templatesTerminal input/outputTop Command line -command line +command line +.tex, default extension The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; &tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the -input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You -specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the -command; e.g. +input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You can +also specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting with a backslash. +For example, this processes foo.tex without pausing after every +error:
      latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
       
      - -will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. +&textndash;help command-line option +With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also +be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with - or +--. For a list of those options, try latex --help. -* prompt -prompt, * -\stop +* prompt +prompt, * +\stop If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a * prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. - +&tex; engines, for other system commands invoking &latex;. +
      Document templatesConcept IndexCommand lineTop Document templates -document templates +document templates Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional template resources are listed +be useful. Additional template resources are listed at http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. -book template
      -
      beamer template
      +beamer template
      +
      book template
       
      tugboat template
       
      -book templatebeamer templateDocument templates -
      book template - - -\documentclass{book} -\title{Book Class Template} -\author{Alex Author} - -\begin{document} -\maketitle - -\chapter{First} -Some text. - -\chapter{Second} -Some other text. - -\section{A subtopic} -The end. -\end{document} - - - -
      -beamer templatetugboat templatebook templateDocument templates +beamer templatebook templateDocument templates
      beamer template -The beamer class creates slides presentations. +beamer template and class +The beamer class creates presentation slides. It has a vast +array of features, but here is a basic template: \documentclass{beamer} @@ -7243,9 +7470,36 @@ The end.
      -tugboat templatebeamer templateDocument templates +book templatetugboat templatebeamer templateDocument templates +
      book template + + +\documentclass{book} +\title{Book Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\chapter{First} +Some text. + +\chapter{Second} +Some other text. + +\section{A subtopic} +The end. +\end{document} + + + +
      +tugboat templatebook templateDocument templates
      tugboat template +TUGboat template +ltugboat class + TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, http://tug.org/TUGboat. @@ -7280,8 +7534,8 @@ This is an example article for \TUB{}. This is an example article for \TUB, from \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. -We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the -hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). +We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the +\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output. Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: -- cgit v1.2.3